298382
303
Zoom out
Zoom in
Previous page
1/303
Next page
EN Dear Customer,
Gigaset Communications GmbH is the legal successor to
Siemens Home and Office Communication Devices GmbH &
Co. KG (SHC), which in turn continued the Gigaset business
of Siemens AG. Any statements made by Siemens AG or
SHC that are found in the user guides should therefore be
understood as statements of Gigaset Communications
GmbH
.
We hope you enjoy your Gigaset.
DE Sehr geehrte Kundin, sehr geehrter Kunde,
die Gigaset Communications GmbH ist Rechtsnachfolgerin
der Siemens Home and Office Communication Devices
GmbH & Co. KG (SHC), die ihrerseits das Gigaset-Geschäft
der Siemens AG fortführte. Etwaige Erklärungen der
Siemens AG oder der SHC in den Bedienungsanleitungen
sind daher als Erklärungen der Gigaset Communications
GmbH zu verstehen.
Wir wünschen Ihnen viel Freude mit Ihrem Gigaset.
FR Chère Cliente, Cher Client,
la société Gigaset Communications GmbH succède en droit
à Siemens Home and Office Communication Devices GmbH
& Co. KG (SHC) qui poursuivait elle-même les activités Giga-
set de Siemens AG. Donc les éventuelles explications de Sie-
mens AG ou de SHC figurant dans les modes d’emploi
doivent être comprises comme des explications de Gigaset
Communications GmbH.
Nous vous souhaitons beaucoup d’agrément avec votre
Gigaset.
IT Gentile cliente,
la Gigaset Communications GmbH è successore della Sie-
mens Home and Office Communication Devices GmbH &
Co. KG (SHC) che a sua volta ha proseguito l’attività della
Siemens AG. Eventuali dichiarazioni della Siemens AG o
della SHC nei manuali d’istruzione, vanno pertanto intese
come dichiarazioni della Gigaset Communications GmbH.
Le auguriamo tanta soddisfazione con il vostro Gigaset.
NL Geachte klant,
Gigaset Communications GmbH is de rechtsopvolger van
Siemens Home and Office Communication Devices GmbH &
Co. KG (SHC), de onderneming die de Gigaset-activiteiten
van Siemens AG heeft overgenomen. Eventuele uitspraken
of mededelingen van Siemens AG of SHC in de gebruiksaan-
wijzingen dienen daarom als mededelingen van Gigaset
Communications GmbH te worden gezien.
Wij wensen u veel plezier met uw Gigaset
.
ES Estimado cliente,
la Gigaset Communications GmbH es derechohabiente de la
Siemens Home and Office Communication Devices GmbH &
Co. KG (SHC) que por su parte continuó el negocio Gigaset
de la Siemens AG. Las posibles declaraciones de la
Siemens AG o de la SHC en las instrucciones de uso se
deben entender por lo tanto como declaraciones de la Giga-
set Communications GmbH.
Le deseamos que disfrute con su Gigaset.
PT SCaros clientes,
Gigaset Communications GmbH é a sucessora legal da Sie-
mens Home and Office Communication Devices GmbH &
Co. KG (SHC), que, por sua vez, deu continuidade ao sector
de negócios Gigaset, da Siemens AG. Quaisquer declara-
ções por parte da Siemens AG ou da SHC encontradas nos
manuais de utilização deverão, portanto, ser consideradas
como declarações da Gigaset Communications GmbH.
Desejamos que tenham bons momentos com o seu Gigaset.
DA Kære Kunde,
Gigaset Communications GmbH er retlig efterfølger til Sie-
mens Home and Office Communication Devices GmbH &
Co. KG (SHC), som fra deres side videreførte Siemens AGs
Gigaset-forretninger. Siemens AGs eller SHCs eventuelle
forklaringer i betjeningsvejledningerne skal derfor forstås
som Gigaset Communications GmbHs forklaringer.
Vi håber, du får meget glæde af din Gigaset.
FI Arvoisa asiakkaamme,
Gigaset Communications GmbH on Siemens Home and
Office Communication Devices GmbH & Co. KG (SHC)-yri-
tyksen oikeudenomistaja, joka jatkoi puolestaan Siemens
AG:n Gigaset-liiketoimintaa. Käyttöoppaissa mahdollisesti
esiintyvät Siemens AG:n tai SHC:n selosteet on tämän
vuoksi ymmärrettävä Gigaset Communications GmbH:n
selosteina.
Toivotamme Teille paljon iloa Gigaset-laitteestanne.
SV Kära kund,
Gigaset Communications GmbH övertar rättigheterna från
Siemens Home and Office Communication Devices GmbH &
Co. KG (SHC), som bedrev Gigaset-verksamheten efter Sie-
mens AG. Alla förklaringar från Siemens AG eller SHC i
användarhandboken gäller därför som förklaringar från
Gigaset Communications GmbH.
Vi önskar dig mycket nöje med din Gigaset.
NO Kjære kunde,
Gigaset Communications GmbH er rettslig etterfølger etter
Siemens Home and Office Communication Devices GmbH &
Co. KG (SHC), som i sin tur videreførte Gigaset-geskjeften i
Siemens AG. Eventuelle meddelelser fra Siemens AG eller
SHC i bruksanvisningene er derfor å forstå som meddelelser
fra Gigaset Communications GmbH.
Vi håper du får stor glede av din Gigaset-enhet.
EL Αγαπητή πελάτισσα, αγαπητέ πελάτη,
η Gigaset Communications GmbH είναι η νομική διάδοχος της
Siemens Home and Office Communication Devices GmbH &
Co. KG (SHC), η οποία έχει αναλάβει την εμπορική
δραστηριότητα Gigaset της Siemens AG. Οι δηλώσεις της
Siemens AG ή της SHC στις
οδηγίες χρήσ
ης αποτ
ελούν
επομένως δηλώσεις της Gigaset Communications GmbH.
Σας ευχόμαστε καλή διασκέδαση με τη συσκευή σας Gigaset.
HR Poštovani korisnici,
Gigaset Communications GmbH pravni je sljednik tvrtke
Siemens Home and Office Communication Devices GmbH &
Co. KG (SHC), koji je nastavio Gigaset poslovanje tvrtke
Siemens AG. Zato sve izjave tvrtke Siemens AG ili SHC koje
se nalaze u uputama za upotrebu treba tumačiti kao izjave
tvrtke Gigaset Communications GmbH.
Nadamo se da sa zadovoljstvom koristite svoj Gigaset
uređaj.
SL Spoštovani kupec!
Podjetje Gigaset Communications GmbH je pravni naslednik
podjetja Siemens Home and Office Communication Devices
GmbH & Co. KG (SHC), ki nadaljuje dejavnost znamke
Gigaset podjetja Siemens AG. Vse izjave podjetja Siemens
AG ali SHC v priročnikih za uporabnike torej veljajo kot izjave
podjetja Gigaset Communications GmbH.
Želimo vam veliko užitkov ob uporabi naprave Gigaset.
Issued by
Gigaset Communications GmbH
Schlavenhorst 66, D-46395 Bocholt
Gigaset Communications GmbH is a trademark
licensee of Siemens AG
© Gigaset Communications GmbH 2008
All rights reserved.
Subject to availability. Rights of modifications
reserved.
www.gigaset.com
CS Vážení zákazníci,
společnost Gigaset Communications GmbH je právním
nástupcem společnosti Siemens Home and Office
Communication Devices GmbH & Co. KG (SHC), která dále
přejala segment produktů Gigaset společnosti Siemens AG.
Jakékoli prohlášení společnosti Siemens AG nebo SHC, které
naleznete v uživatelských příručkách, je třeba považovat za
prohlášení společnosti Gigaset Communications GmbH.
Doufáme, že jste s produkty Gigaset spokojeni.
SK Vážený zákazník,
Spoločnosť Gigaset Communications GmbH je právnym
nástupcom spoločnosti Siemens Home and Office
Communication Devices GmbH & Co. KG (SHC), ktorá zasa
pokračovala v činnosti divízie Gigaset spoločnosti Siemens
AG. Z tohto dôvodu je potrebné všetky vyhlásenia
spoločnosti Siemens AG alebo SHC, ktoré sa nachádzajú v
používateľských príručkách, chápať ako vyhlásenia
spoločnosti Gigaset Communications GmbH.
Veríme, že budete so zariadením Gigaset spokojní.
RO Stimate client,
Gigaset Communications GmbH este succesorul legal al
companiei Siemens Home and Office Communication
Devices GmbH & Co. KG (SHC), care, la rândul său, a
continuat activitatea companiei Gigaset a Siemens AG.
Orice afirmaţii efectuate de Siemens AG sau SHC şi incluse
în ghidurile de utilizare vor fi, prin urmare, considerate a
aparţine Gigaset Communications GmbH.
Sperăm ca produsele Gigaset să fie la înălţimea dorinţelor
dvs.
SR Poštovani potrošaču,
Gigaset Communications GmbH je pravni naslednik
kompanije Siemens Home and Office Communication
Devices GmbH & Co. KG (SHC), kroz koju je nastavljeno
poslovanje kompanije Gigaset kao dela Siemens AG. Stoga
sve izjave od strane Siemens AG ili SHC koje se mogu naći u
korisničkim uputstvima treba tuma
čiti kao
izjave kompanije
Gigaset Communications GmbH.
Nadamo se da ćete uživati u korišćenju svog Gigaset
uređaja.
BG Уважаеми потребители,
Gigaset Communications GmbH е правоприемникът на
Siemens Home and Office Communication Devices GmbH
& Co. KG (SHC), която на свой ред продължи бизнеса на
подразделението Siemens AG. По тази причина
всякакви изложения, направени от Siemens AG или
SHC, които се намират в ръководствата за
потребителя, следва да се разбират като изложения на
Gigaset Communications GmbH.
Надяваме се да ползвате с удоволствие вашия Gigaset.
HU T
isztelt Vásárló!
A Siemens Home and Communication Devices GmbH & Co.
KG (SHC) törvényes jogutódja a Gigaset Communications
GmbH, amely a Siemens AG Gigaset üzletágának utódja.
Ebből következően a Siemens AG vagy az SHC felhasználói
kézikönyveiben található bármely kijelentést a Gigaset
Communications GmbH kijelentésének kell tekinteni.
Reméljük, megelégedéssel használja Gigaset készülékét.
PL Szanowny Kliencie,
Firma Gigaset Communications GmbH jest spadkobiercą
prawnym firmy Siemens Home and Office Communication
Devices GmbH & Co. KG (SHC), która z kolei przejęła
segment produktów Gigaset od firmy Siemens AG. Wszelkie
oświadczenia firm Siemens AG i SHC, które można znaleźć
w instrukcjach obsługi, należy traktować jako oświadczenia
firmy Gigaset Communications GmbH.
Życzymy wiele przyjemności z korzystania z produktów
Gigaset.
TR Sayın Müşterimiz,
Gigaset Communications GmbH, Siemens AG'nin Gigaset
işletmesini yürüten Siemens Home and Office
Communication Devices GmbH & Co. KG (SHC)'nin yasal
halefidir. Kullanma kılavuzları nda bulunan ve Siemens AG
veya SHC tarafından yapılan bildiriler Gigaset
Communications GmbH tarafından yapılmış bildiriler olarak
algılanmalıdır.
Gigaset'ten memnun kalmanızı ümit ediyoruz.
RU Уважаемыи покупатель!
Компания Gigaset Communications GmbH является
правопреемником компании Siemens Home and Office
Communication Devices GmbH & Co. KG (SHC), которая,
в св
ою очередь, приняла подразделение Gigaset в свое
управление от компании Siemens AG. Поэтому любые
заявления, сделанные от имени компании Siemens AG
или SHC и встречающиеся в руководствах
пользователя, должны восприниматься как заявления
компании Gigaset Communications GmbH.
Мы надеемся, что продукты Gigaset удовлетворяют
вашим требованиям.
Issued by
Gigaset Communications GmbH
Schlavenhorst 66, D-46395 Bocholt
Gigaset Communications GmbH is a trademark
licensee of Siemens AG
© Gigaset Communications GmbH 2008
All rights reserved.
Subject to availability. Rights of modifications
reserved.
www.gigaset.com
 100/ 10 /  / 100-10-10-1-1 / 0. / 0.0.200
s
 
1
S1: The handset at a glance
S1_SL1 / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / SAG_covers_I-II.fm / 02.10.2003
S1: The handset at a glance
ÐV
Internal 11
20.09.03 09:45
§§§§§§§SMS§§§§§§
End call key, On/Off key
End call
Cancel function
Return to idle status
(hold down)
Handset on/off (in idle
status, hold down)
Message key
Access to SMS, calls
list, answering
machine (on base with
AM)
Flashes: new SMS,
calls, messages
Handsfree Key
Switch from "earpiece" to
handsfree mode
Lights up: Handsfree
is activated
Flashes: incoming call,
automatic last number
redial
Star key
Ringer on/off (press for
approx. 2 seconds)
Toggles between upper/
lower case and digits
Charge status
= flat U full
= flashes: battery is
almost flat or is charging
Control key
Opens the menu, direc-
tory, internal list, voice
selection. Navigation in
the input field
Current functions and
display keys
The display keys give you
access to the functions
shown in the display.
Key 1
Answering machine
(hold down)
Microphone
Talk key
Answer a call
Initiate dialling
Switch from handsfree
to "earpiece mode"
Recall key
Initiate enquiry call
Reception strength
Speed dial list key
Open the speed dial list
Hash key
Keypad lock on/off
(long press)
2
SL1: The handset at a glance
S1_SL1 / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / SAG_covers_I-II.fm / 02.10.2003
SL1: The handset at a glance
ÐV
Internal 11
20.09.03 09:45
§§§§§§§SMS§§§§§§
Microphone
Display (display screen)
End call key, On/Off key
End call
Cancel function
Return to idle status
(hold down)
Handset on/off (in idle
status, hold down)
Message key
Access to SMS, calls
list, answering
machine (on base with
AM)
Flashes: new SMS,
calls, messages
S
tar key
Ringer on/off (press for
approx. 2 seconds)
Toggles between upper/
lower case and digits
Control key
Opens the menu, direc-
tory, internal list, voice
selection. Navigation in
the input field
Current functions and
display keys
The display keys give you
access to the functions
shown in the display.
Key 1
Answering machine
(long press)
Talk key
Answer a call
Initiate dialling
Switch from handsfree
to "earpiece mode"
R
ecall key
I
nitiate enquiry call
Reception strength
Speed dial list key
Open the speed dial list
Hash key
Keypad lock on/off
(long press)
Connector jack
for headset and PC
interface
H
andsfree Key
Switch from "earpiece"
to handsfree mode
Lights up: Handsfree
is activated
Flashes: incoming call,
automatic last number
redial
Charge status
= flat U full
= flashes: battery is
almost flat or is charging
3
Contents
S1_SL1 / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / S1_SL1_isdnIVZ.fm / 02.10.2003
Contents
S1: The handset at a glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
SL1: The handset at a glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Safety precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Means of display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Preparing to use the handset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Operating the handset – menu guidance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Operating the base – Getting started wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Registering/de-registering handsets . . . . . . . . . . 20
Making calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Making external calls and ending a call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Making internal calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Accepting a call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Withholding Calling Line Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Handsfree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Picking up a call during ring delay (Call PickUp) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Rejecting a call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Reserving a line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Defining the outgoing MSN for the next call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Ringback when busy (CCBS) / when the call is not answered (CCNR) . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Identify caller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Functions during a call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Muting the handset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Making a call to several users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Forwarding an incoming call – CD (Call Deflection) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Transferring calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Working with call waiting for an external call – CW (Call Waiting) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Putting a call on hold (Call Hold) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Parking/continuing a call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Using the directory and other lists . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Directory and speed dial list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Voice-activated dialling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Email directory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Display available memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Last number redial list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Opening lists with the message key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Call lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
4
Contents
S1_SL1 / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / S1_SL1_isdnIVZ.fm / 02.10.2003
SMS (text messages) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Before you can send and receive text messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Managing SMS service centres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Entering, editing or deleting phone numbers for SMS centres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Activating/deactivating SMS send centre . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Registering/de-registering with an SMS centre . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Sending a text message and the outgoing message list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Sending a text message to an e-mail address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Receiving text messages, incoming message list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Using new ringer tones and logos for the handset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Text messages to a PABX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Errors when sending and receiving a text message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Making cost-effective calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Linking a call-by-call number with a phone number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Displaying the call duration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Displaying call charges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Operating more than one handset . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Using a handset as a room monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Setting the Walk and Talk mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Setting the answering machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Assigning a receive MSN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Hiding/showing an answering machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Specifying the number of rings before the answering machine starts . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Activating/deactivating voice announcement of date and time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Setting the recording time and recording quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Activating/deactivating automatic pause . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Locking the answering machine, defining AM PIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Setting the time control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Activating/deactivating automatic listen in on the handset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Activating/deactivating automatic pickup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Activating/deactivating automatic notification via text message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Security settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Changing the system PIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Defining authorisation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Emergency numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Date and Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Setting the date and the time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Setting the alarm clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Setting appointments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
5
Contents
S1_SL1 / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / S1_SL1_isdnIVZ.fm / 02.10.2003
Displaying missed appointments, and anniversaries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Night service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Individual handset settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Changing the display language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Activating/deactivating Auto Answer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Changing the name of the base . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Adjusting the loudspeaker volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Changing the ringer tone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Sound Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Vibration alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Activating/deactivating advisory tones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Resetting a handset to the factory setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
System settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Changing the names for internal users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Setting up/deleting ISDN phone numbers (MSN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Assigning a phone number (MSN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Setting up the list of outgoing MSN for the next call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Setting up a busy signal when the MSN is being used (Busy on Busy) . . . . . . . . . . 114
Assigning an MSN a ringer melody . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Setting up rejecting for the entire MSN group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Forwarding calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Pre-assigning the call deflection destination – CD (Call Deflection) . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Setting up automatic call forwarding when not reaching a handset . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Setting up an internal group call group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Setting up ring delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Activating/deactivating call waiting – CW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Setting an external/internal enquiry call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Setting up the waiting melody . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Activate/deactivate Call beats data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Changing the long distance prefix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Configuring the answering machine in the network for fast access . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Restoring the factory setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Checking the status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Checking the software version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Operating when connected to a PABX . . . . . . . . 129
Access code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Activating/deactivating call transfer – ECT (Explicit Call Transfer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Dialling options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Operating with other devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Defining device type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Making a call with devices on an analogue connection (TAE connection) . . . . . . . 133
Activating/deactivating repeater mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
6
Contents
S1_SL1 / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / S1_SL1_isdnIVZ.fm / 02.10.2003
Operating the answering machine directly . . . . 136
Selecting an answering machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Activating/deactivating the answering machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Selecting announce only and AM mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Recording/changing announcements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Playing back/deleting announcements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Recording memos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Two-way recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Picking up a call during answering machine operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Playing messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Returning a call during playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Playing a message to another caller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Playing back memos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Setting the playback speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Deleting messages/memos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Marking an old message or memo as "new" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Adding a number to the directory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Operating with a gate telephone . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Assigning internal users to the gate telephone call group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Making calls with the gate telephone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Forwarding the gate telephone externally . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Appendix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Contact with liquid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Questions and Answers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Service (Customer Care) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Character set chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Predictive text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
PC interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Game "Balloon Shooter" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Guarantee certificate (United Kingdom) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Guarantee certificate (Ireland) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Menu Tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Main menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Submenu "Base Settings" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Submenu "Answer Machine" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Directory key and speed dial list key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
7
Safety precautions
S1_SL1 / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / sec_hints.fm / 02.10.2003
Safety precautions
!
Fit only the recommended rechargeable batteries (page 153) and of the
same type! Use no other types of batteries or non-rechargeable batteries, as
they could damage health and cause personal injury.
Ensure correct polarity when fitting rechargeable batteries, and use the bat-
tery type according to these instructions (you will see polarity symbols in the
handset's
battery compartments)
.
The operation of medical appliances may be affected. Be aware of the techni-
cal conditions within the particular environment (e.g. doctor's practice).
The handset may cause an intrusive "hum" in hearing aids.
Do not install the base in bathrooms or shower rooms (page 150). The hand-
set and base are not watertight.
Drivers must not use their phones while driving (Walk and Talk function).
Switch off your phone while on board an aircraft (Walk and Talk function).
Ensure that it cannot be switched on again accidentally.
Do not use the phone in environments subject to explosion hazard
(e.g. auto paint shops).
If you give your Gigaset to someone else, make sure you also give them the
operating manual.
Dispose of the batteries and phone in accordance with environmental regula-
tions.
Œ
ƒ
i
Not all of the functions described in these instructions are available in all
countries.
8
Means of display
S1_SL1 / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / sec_hints.fm / 02.10.2003
Means of display
A table under the title indicates the bases or the handset for which this function is avail-
able.
Example: A function concerning bases with answering machine:
Example: The vibration alarm of the Gigaset SL1:
On the base:
CX150isdn SX150isdn CX253isdn SX255isdn SX353isdn
On the MT:
SL1
9
Preparing to use the handset
S1_SL1 / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / starting.fm / 02.10.2003
Preparing to use the handset
Removing protective film
Inserting the batteries
Insert the batteries ensuring correct polarity (see figure on left).
Place the cover on the battery compartment about 3 mm down from the latch and
push it up until it clicks into position.
Opening the battery compartment
Press on the grooved area of the cover and slide back.
Charging batteries
The charging is indicated in the upper right of the display where the charging status V
flashes:
The display is protected by a plastic film.
Please remove the protective film!
W
Use only the rechargeable batteries recommended by Siemens on
page 153! Never use conventional batteries (non-rechargeable) or other
battery types as this may cause significant damage to health and prop-
erty. For example, the jacket of the battery could be destroyed (hazard-
ous). The phone could also malfunction or be damaged.
= Batteries (almost) empty V Batteries
2
/
3
charged
e Batteries
1
/
3
charged U Batt. fully charged
i
To register additional handsets, refer to page 20.
10
Preparing to use the handset
S1_SL1 / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / starting.fm / 02.10.2003
Your handset is now ready for operation. To correctly record the time of calls and, if
applicable, messages you must now set the date and time. Depending on the network
provider, the date and time are updated automatically by the telephone network with
every outgoing call. All the settings necessary for operating the telephone can also be
set up easily with the Getting started wizard (page 14).
Attaching the belt clip
Push the belt clip onto the back of the handset until the lugs click into the recesses on
either side of the handset.
Activating/deactivating the handset
To activate the handset, press the end call key a and hold. You will hear a confirmation
tone (rising tone sequence).
To deactivate the handset, press the end call key a again in the idle status and hold
(confirmation tone).
Activating/deactivating the keypad lock
You can lock the handset keypad if, for example, you are carrying the handset. This pro-
tects the keypad against inadvertent activation.
Press and hold the hash key R. You will hear a confirmation tone and the symbol Ø
will appear in the display.
To deactivate
on S1, C1, C2:
Press the hash key R again and hold (confirmation tone).
On SL1:
i
The deactivated handset activates automatically when placed in the base
or charger.
R
Press the hash key R again and hold.
Press the display key to deactivate the keypad lock.
If the display key is not pressed within 5 seconds, the
handset returns to keypad lock.
OK
11
Preparing to use the handset
S1_SL1 / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / starting.fm / 02.10.2003
Operating the handset – menu guidance
Special keys
Control key
The control key is the central operating element. It has four black arrows and the corre-
sponding icons. Pressing the various icons (up, down, right, or left) opens a different
function. The side you have to press is shown by a black triangle in the
operating instructions, e.g.:
v key for right = open menu.
Example:
Different functions of the control key:
Display keys
The display keys are the horizontal rocker keys just below the display. Their function
changes depending on the particular operating situation. The current function is shown
in the display directly above the key to which it relates.
Example:
i
The key lock switches itself off automatically if you receive a call. It re-
activates when the call is finished.
When the keypad lock is active, you cannot even call emergency num-
bers.
The keypad lock is still indicated if you have installed a logo as display
graphic (page 69).
Control key
In the idle status In lists and menus In an input field
t
Initiate voice-activated dial-
ling
(long press)
Scroll up Move the cursor up a line
s
Open directory Scroll down Move the cursor down a line
v
Open the menu Confirm the selected option
(same as )
Move the cursor to the right
u
Open list of handsets Go back one menu level, or
cancel
Move the cursor to the left
OK
yx
”Í
Display keys
Display key functions
(depending on the operating situation)
12
Preparing to use the handset
S1_SL1 / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / starting.fm / 02.10.2003
The various display symbols have the following meanings:
Correcting wrong inputs
After a correct input you will hear a confirmation tone (rising tone sequence). An incor-
rect input is indicated by an error tone (descending tone sequence). You can repeat the
input.
If you have entered the wrong character in the text, you can correct it as follows:
Deleting characters to the left of the cursor with clear
To correct a phone number or text, move the cursor to the right of the incorrect charac-
ter with the control key. Then press the display key . The character is deleted. Now
enter the correct character.
Inserting characters to the right of the cursor
If you have left out a character, use the control key to move the cursor to where you
want to insert the character, and then enter it.
Overwriting characters
When entering Date/Time the number of digits is fixed and there is a default entry in
the field. Use the control key to move the cursor to the wrong digit and overwrite it.
Overwriting characters to the right of the cursor
When entering Cost per Unit: the number of digits is fixed and there is a default entry
in the field. Use the control key to move the cursor to the left of the wrong digit and
then overwrite it.
Display
Icon
Meaning when pressed
Last number redial key: Open the list of the last 10 numbers you dialled.
OK key: confirm menu function or confirm an input and store.
Menu key: Activates the main menu when in standby.
Open a status-dependent menu while making a call.
Menu+ key: Open submenu, e. g. in input fields
Delete key: Delete input from right to left one character at a time.
Escape key: Go back one menu level, or cancel the operation.
Open email directory.
Þ
OK
à
Ð
Û
Ý
ä
Û
Û
13
Preparing to use the handset
S1_SL1 / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / starting.fm / 02.10.2003
Idle status
Display in idle status (example, Logo deactivated)
Reverting to idle status from anywhere in the menu:
Hold down call end key a for approx. 1 sec. or
Press no key: The display automatically reverts to the idle status after 1 minute.
Changes which you have not confirmed or saved by pressing ,
Yes, Save, Send or with
v Store will be lost.
Menu operation, with "Setting Handsfree Volume" as an example
(Date and time have already been set)
ÐV
Internal 11
20.09.03 09:45
SMS
Ð×V
Internal 11
20.09.03 09:45
SMS
Gigaset with answering
machine
Answering machine activated
Two lines with context dependent sys-
tem information
OK
OK
1.
v
Press right side of the control key. The menu opens.
2.
s
Keep pressing the lower part of the control key until you see Audio
Settings marked in the display (by the frame).
3.
v
Use the right side of the control key or the display key to con-
firm.
4. v Confirm the first display entry, Handset Volume, using the right
side of the control key or with the display key to confirm.
5.
r
Press the left or right side of the control key to select the volume
(1–5).
6.
[ RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR]
Save
Now press the display key to confirm the setting.
7.
a
Press and hold the "end call" key to return to the idle status.
OK
OK
OK
OK
14
Preparing to use the handset
S1_SL1 / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / starting.fm / 02.10.2003
Operating the base – Getting started wizard
A few settings are necessary before using your telephone. The Getting started wizard is
designed to help you with this. It can be opened anytime using your handset. The fol-
lowing settings can be set one after the other.
Date and time
Hide/show answering machine 1... 3 (on Gigaset with integrated answering
machine)
Find out/enter the MSN of your connection
Set the device type for the connected device
Set the incoming MSN
Set the outgoing MSN
Outside line code (when using a PABX)
What is an MSN?
MSN = Multiple Subscriber Number. You can apply for up to ten different telephone
numbers for one multiple ISDN connection. An MSN is one of the phone numbers
assigned to you without an area code.
You telephone uses the MSN entirely as you require. The following differentiation is
made:
Receive MSN: Phone numbers you may be called on. You can assign the receive
MSN's to specific internal users (terminals)(page 112). Incoming calls are only for-
warded to the terminals to which the relevant MSN has been assigned. Terminals
are, for instance, handsets or answering machines.
Send MSN: Phone numbers that are identified to the person you are calling. The net-
work operator calculates charges based on the send MSN's. You can assign a fixed
send MSN to each internal user (page 113).
Potential internal parties:
Depending on the scope of function of the base, you can assign internal phone numbers
to the following internal users. The operating instructions for the base will indicate
which internal phone numbers are available.
Handsets
Base station (CX203isdn, CX253isdn, SX303isdn, SX353isdn)
Analogue devices (SX205isdn, SX255isdn, SX303isdn, SX353isdn)
PC via a USB connection (SX205isdn, SX255isdn, SX303isdn, SX353isdn)
Bluetooth devices (SX303isdn, SX353isdn)
Data modules
Answering machine integrated in the base
15
Preparing to use the handset
S1_SL1 / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / starting.fm / 02.10.2003
Example of how to assign an MSN:
You have applied for four MSN's, two for business use (MSN1, MSN2) and two for private
purposes (MSN3, MSN4). Four handsets are connected to a base. Two handsets (Int.11
and 12) and the answering machine AM 91 are intended for business use, and two
handsets (Int.13 and 14) and the answering machine AM 92 are intended for private
use.
The following applies to Comfort handsets S1, SL1:
Because internal 11 and internal 12 handsets are assigned two (receiving) MSNs each,
they can use the MSN next call performance feature (page 113). They can change to
(sending) MSN2 during each outgoing external call. The internal 13 and 14 handsets
cannot do this.
Launching the Getting started wizard and setting the basic settings
Launching the Getting started wizard:
Internal users Use Receive MSN Send MSN
Handsets Int.11 , 12 Business
MSN1, MSN2 MSN1
Answering
machine
AM 91
MSN1, MSN2 ---
Handset Int.13 Private MSN3 MSN3
Handset Int.14 MSN4 MSN4
Answering
machine
AM 92
MSN3, MSN4 ---
v
Open the menu.
s Base Settings
Select the menu item and confirm.
s Installation
Select the menu item and confirm.
[RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR]
YES
Press the display key to launch the Getting started
wizard.
If you already have set a system PIN (not 0000)
(page 91), you will be asked to enter it.
~
If required, enter the system PIN and confirm.
OK
OK
OK
i
The Getting started wizard cannot be used simultaneously by multiple
handsets.
If there is already settings data (factory default or previous settings),
this data is shown at the appropriate positions in the display and can
be modified there.
To cancel the Getting started wizard, press the end call key and hold.
All changes you have already saved using Save entry
§§OK§§ are
retained. The handset returns to idle status.
To skip a setting, press the display key §§NO§§.
16
Preparing to use the handset
S1_SL1 / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / starting.fm / 02.10.2003
Setting the date and time:
Depending on the network provider, the date and time are adopted automatically from
the telephone network during the first outgoing call.
The display shows: Enter time?
If the time should be displayed in 12-hour mode, you can modify the setting later
(page 94).
Hiding/showing answering machine
The following answering machines AM1, AM2, and AM3 are available. You can use the
answering machine when it is shown. By factory default, only AM1 is shown (only AM1
is displayed in the menus).
The display shows: Suppress display of AM1?
Respond with
YES, if you want to hide AM1,
with NO, if you want to use AM1.
This sequence will then be repeated for AM2 and AM3.
Finding your phone numbers (MSN):
This function must be supported by your network provider.
The display shows: Find own numbers (MSN)?
Several phone numbers (MSN) were provided by the network provider when you
received your ISDN connection confirmation. You can store up to 10 phone numbers. If
an MSN has not been entered on your telephone, you can retrieve the phone numbers
from the telephone exchange.
[ RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR]
YES
Press the display key to set the date and time.
~
Enter the date (6-digit) and time (4-digit in 24-hour
mode) in series,
e.g. 200903 0945 for 9/29/03 9:45 a.m..
Press the display key to open the submenu.
s Save entry
Select the menu item and confirm.
Ð
OK
On the base:
SX150isdn CX253isdn SX255isdn SX353isdn
i
An answering machine can only be hidden if there are no messages/
memos stored in it (page 82).
17
Preparing to use the handset
S1_SL1 / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / starting.fm / 02.10.2003
Confirm the prompt with
YES.
If your MSNs can be found, the number of MSNs found will be shown on the display
and the MSNs entered.
If your MSNs cannot be found (e.g., because MSNs are already entered or the net-
work provider does not support this function), a message about this will be dis-
played. You must enter the MSNs manually (see next section).
Entering your phone numbers (MSNs) manually and entering names for the MSNs:
The display shows: Find own numbers (MSN)?
The MSNs entered will automatically be assigned to all registered handsets as incoming
and outgoing MSNs.
This sequence will then be repeated for MSN2 to MSN10.
Setting the device type:
If your base offers the option of connecting an analogue terminal, you must set the
device type (see operating instructions for the base).
The display shows: Setting the device type?
If you have connected an analogue device to your base, select
YES.
The display shows: Set device type for internal 21?, select
YES.
Select the applicable entry and confirm with ( = on). The operating instructions
for the base will indicate which settings are possible.
Briefly press the menu exit key j
to continue.
[RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR]
YES
Press the display key to confirm the prompt.
[RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR]
YES
Press the display key to confirm the prompt.
~
Enter name. Entering a name for an MSN is optional.
s~
If necessary, scroll to the line <Number> and enter
the MSN
. If the MSNs were found automatically, the
numbers will already be entered.
Í
Press the display key to open the submenu.
s Save entry
Select the menu item and confirm.
OK
On the base:
SX205isdn SX255isdn SX303isdn SX353isdn
OK
18
Preparing to use the handset
S1_SL1 / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / starting.fm / 02.10.2003
Setting the incoming MSN
The display shows: Set incoming MSN?
The incoming MSN is used to answer incoming calls. The MSNs allocated to your ISDN
connection can be allocated to various terminals according to your preferences. You can
assign a terminal multiple incoming MSNs.
This sequence will be repeated for all handsets registered for your telephone and for the
integrated answering machine (on Gigaset with integrated answering machine).
Setting the outgoing MSN:
The display shows: Set outgoing MSN?
Each internal party can be assigned exactly one of the available outgoing MSNs. It is
identified to the person called and the network provider bills the call charges to this
MSN. You can assign an MSN as an outgoing MSN to multiple terminals, but each termi-
nal is only assigned one outgoing MSN.
This sequence will be repeated for all handsets registered for your telephone.
[ RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR]
YES
Press the display key to confirm the prompt.
[ RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR]
YES
Press the display key to confirm the Set allocation
Internal 11 ? prompt.
The list of entered MSNs is displayed.
s MSN 1:12345678
Select the MSN which should be assigned to this ter-
minal, and confirm.
Repeat this sequence for all MSNs which should be
assigned to this terminal as an incoming MSN.
Press the display key to end this assignment for this
terminal.
OK
Ý
i
When setting the incoming MSN for an answering machine, only the
MSNs are offered in the MSN list which have not yet been assigned to
another answering machine.
[ RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR]
YES
Press the display key to confirm the prompt.
[ RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR]
YES
Press the display key to confirm the Set allocation
Internal 11? prompt.
The list of entered MSNs is displayed.
s MSN 1:12345678
Select the MSN which should be assigned to this ter-
minal, and confirm.
Press the display key to end this assignment for this
terminal.
OK
Ý
19
Preparing to use the handset
S1_SL1 / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / starting.fm / 02.10.2003
Using with a PABX:
Only carry out the following steps if you want to connect your telephone to a private
PABX (thus not directly to a NTBA). In this case, you must enter an access code (outside
line code) for external calls when getting started the first time, depending on the PABX.
See the operating instructions for your PABX. You can enter a one to four-digit access
code.
The display shows: Operate behind PABX?
The display shows Installation completed. Press the end call key a, to return to the
idle status of the handset.
[RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR]
YES
Press the display key to confirm the prompt.
[RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR]
YES
Press the display key to confirm the prompt Set
access code?.
~
Enter the access code (outside line code).
Í
Press the display key to open the submenu.
s Save entry
Select the menu item and confirm. The Getting
started wizard is closed.
OK
20
Registering/de-registering handsets
S1_SL1 / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / registering_hs.fm / 02.10.2003
Registering/de-registering handsets
On a few bases, the registration of your Gigaset S1 handset is done automatically. You
can also register your Gigaset S1 handset manually. You must register your Gigaset SL1
handset manually.
Your handset can be registered on up to four bases.
Automatic registration: Gigaset S1 handset
To register for the first time, place the deactivated handset in the base with the display
facing upwards. Registration takes around 1 minute. The handset automatically
receives the lowest free internal number from the range Int.11 to Int.16. This will
appear in the display after registration is complete.
If all internal numbers on your phone have already been assigned for wireless terminals,
please de-register another handset you no longer require before registering a new one
(page 21).
Manual registration: Gigaset S1 and SL1
If all internal numbers on your phone have already been assigned for wireless terminals,
please de-register another handset you no longer require before registering a new one
(page 21).
You must initiate handset registration on the handset and on the base.
1. Prepare the base for registration (see operating instructions for the base).
2. On the handset (within 30 sec.)
After registration the handset reverts to idle status. The handset's internal number is
shown in the display.
On the base:
CX100isdn CX150isdn SX100isdn SX150isdn
v
Open the menu.
s Settings
Select the menu item and confirm.
s Register H/Set
Select the menu item and confirm.
s Base 1
Select base (1–4) and confirm, e.g. Base 1.
~ Enter the system PIN of the base (the default is 0000)
and confirm. Regstr.Procedure appears in the dis-
play along with the name of the base e.g. Base 1.
Once the handset has located the base, the list of
free internal numbers is shown in the display.
s Int.11
Select internal number and confirm, e.g. Int.11 .
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
i
The handset interrupts the base search after 60 seconds. If registration
has not been completed within this time, repeat the procedure.
21
Registering/de-registering handsets
S1_SL1 / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / registering_hs.fm / 02.10.2003
De-registering handsets
You can de-register any registered handset from any registered Gigaset S1 or
SL1 handset.
Changing the base
The following settings may be made if your handset is registered with more than one
base:
Set to one specific base, e.g. the base at home or the base at the office.
Set to the base with the best reception: Best Base. This setting will automatically
select whichever base has the best reception.
v
Open the menu.
s Base Settings
Select the menu item and confirm.
s Settings
Select the menu item and confirm.
~
Enter system PIN if required (page 91).
s Setup user
Select the menu item and confirm.
s De-reg. device
Select the menu item and confirm.
s Int.18
Select the handset that you wish to de-register and
confirm, e.g. Int.18.
a
Long press (back to idle status).
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
v
Open the menu.
s Settings
Select the menu item and confirm.
s Select Base
Select the menu item and confirm.
s Select one of the registered bases or Best Base and
confirm.
a
Long press (back to idle status).
OK
OK
OK
22
Making calls
S1_SL1 / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / telephony.fm / 02.10.2003
Making calls
Making external calls and ending a call
External calls are calls using the public telephone network. Two external calls can be
made at the same time on your base.
Making internal calls
Internal calls are calls between different handsets that are registered with the same
base. They are toll-free. Three internal calls can be made at the same time on your base.
You can either call a specific handset or call all the internal users at the same time
("group call").
Calling a specific handset
~c
Enter the phone number and press the talk key. The
phone number is dialled.
End the call:
a
Press end call key.
i
You can also press the talk key c first (you hear the dialling tone)
and then enter the number.
You can use the end call key a to cancel the dialling operation.
You can also end a conversation by placing the handset in the base.
i
If you receive a call during an internal call or group call, the call is not
interrupted. You will hear a call waiting tone.
u
Open Internal call.
either ...
~
Enter the number of the internal party you want.
or ...
[ RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR]
LIST
Press the display key.
s Int.11
Select internal number and confirm, e.g. Int.11 .
OK
23
Making calls
S1_SL1 / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / telephony.fm / 02.10.2003
Starting a group call to all internal users
You can make a group call from any handset to all other registered internal parties
entered for group calls (page 120). By factory default, this option is activated.
The first internal user to pick up the call is connected with you.
Accepting a call
Your handset rings, the call is displayed on the screen and the handsfree key d flashes.
Press the talk key c or the handsfree key d to accept the call. If the handset is in the
base/charger and the Auto Answer function is activated (page 102), then you just need
to lift the handset out of the base/charger to take the call.
Withholding Calling Line Identification
Precondition: The "Withhold Calling Line Identification" service is supported by your
network provider.
When supplied, your phone number is displayed on the phone of the person you are
calling (CLIP for outgoing connections) and a caller's phone number is displayed on
your handset (COLP for incoming connections).
You can withhold this Calling Line Identification (CLIR for outgoing connections,
COLR – for incoming connections). CLIP/CLIR are paired with COLP/COLR: if you withhold
Calling Line Identification both CLIR and COLR are activated.
u
Open Internal call.
either ...
[RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR]
LIST
Press the display key.
s Collective call
Select the menu item and confirm.
or ...
P
Press the star key.
OK
CLIP Calling Line Identification Presentation = display of phone number for outgo-
ing connections
CLIR Calling Line Identity Restriction = suppress the display of the phone number for
outgoing connections
COLP Connected Line Identity Presentation = display of phone number for incoming
connections
COLR Connected Line Identity Restriction = suppress the display of the phone
number for incoming connections
24
Making calls
S1_SL1 / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / telephony.fm / 02.10.2003
Displaying caller's phone number
Precondition: Calling Line Identification is activated for the caller.
Screen display with CLIP
With Calling Line Identification, the caller's telephone number is displayed on the hand-
set screen. If you have stored an entry for this number in your directory, then that entry
will be displayed instead of the number, e.g. "Anna".
Unavailable is displayed on the screen if the caller's phone number is not identified.
Withholding phone number identification
If you do not wish your phone number to be revealed to the person you are speaking to
You can withhold identification of your phone number specifically for the next call or
else for all calls. If set for all calls, the phone number is withheld both for outgoing calls
(CLIR) and for incoming calls (COLR).
Withholding transfer of the phone number only for the next call:
Withholding or permitting identification of your phone number for all calls:
By factory default, Withhold no.
is not activated.
Telephone number or 'Anna'
ÐV
Ext. call from
0891234567
for private
REJECT RNG OFF
Receive MSN that is being called
v
Open the menu.
s Base Settings
Select the menu item and confirm.
s Call preparat.
Select the menu item and confirm.
s Temp.withhold
Select the menu item and confirm (= activated).
a
Hold down (return to idle status).
OK
OK
OK
i
After the call, the setting is reset again. Your phone number will be iden-
tified to your next caller. When you call the selected phone number from
the last number redial list again, this call is also not anonymous.
v
Open the menu.
s Base Settings
Select the menu item and confirm.
s Settings
Select the menu item and confirm.
s ISDN settings
Select the menu item and confirm.
s Withhold no.
Select the menu item and confirm (= activated).
a
Hold down (return to idle status).
OK
OK
OK
OK
25
Making calls
S1_SL1 / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / telephony.fm / 02.10.2003
Handsfree
Activating/deactivating handsfree
As soon as you terminate the handsfree mode you switch to "earpiece mode" and con-
tinue the call on the handset.
Adjusting the volume while in handsfree mode
A call is in progress and handsfree d is activated.
Picking up a call during ring delay (Call PickUp)
You can pick up a call despite any set ring delay (page 121).
Preconditions:
The party picking up must be authorised with at least Incoming only status
(page 92).
Both parties must be assigned the same incoming MSN (page 112).
Activate while dialling:
~ d
Enter the phone number and press the handsfree key
(instead of the talk key c).
Activate during a call:
d
Press the handsfree key.
Deactivate handsfree:
c
Press the talk key.
i
If you wish to place the handset in the base during a call you must press
the handsfree key d and hold it down while you position the handset in
the base.
d
Press the handsfree key again.
r
Decrease or increase the volume.
[RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR]
Save
Press the display key to save the setting.
c
Press the talk key. Annehmen? is shown.
[RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR]
YES
Confirm to pick up the call.
26
Making calls
S1_SL1 / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / telephony.fm / 02.10.2003
Rejecting a call
You get an external call or you are making a call and receive an external call. The call is
signalled acoustically as well as is shown in the display on all handsets of this MSN
group. You can reject this external call.
Press the display key
REJECT.
Depending on the setting (page 115) the call is only rejected on the handset rejecting
the call (handsets with the same incoming MSN continue to ring) or is rejected for the
entire MSN group (the caller hears the busy tone).
Reserving a line
Your ISDN connection offers you 2 simultaneously usable telephone lines (B channels).
Precondition: You want to make calls externally, but both telephone lines of your con-
nection are busy (used by other internal parties).
Press the display key
CALLBCK. The next available free line will be reserved for you.
You handset rings as soon as an external line is free.
Defining the outgoing MSN for the next call
Even if you have defined an individual outgoing MSN for the handset (page 112), you
can select another MSN as outgoing MSN before each call, e.g. for individual recording
of charges.
Make sure that the outgoing/incoming MSN corresponds to the phone number regis-
tered at your SMS centre (page 54).
By factory default, MSN next call
is not activated for an MSN.
either ...
Use a free line:
c
Press the talk key. You can now enter the phone
number as usual.
or ...
Delete the reservation:
[ RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR]
DELETE
Press the display key. The reservation is cancelled.
i
If the reservation is neither accepted or deleted, it will be deleted auto-
matically after 30 sec.
v
Open the menu.
s Base Settings
Select the menu item and confirm.
s Call preparat.
Select the menu item and confirm.
s MSN next call
Select the menu item and confirm.
s MSN
Select the MSN and confirm (= activated).
The next call uses this MSN.
a
Hold down (return to idle status).
OK
OK
OK
OK
27
Making calls
S1_SL1 / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / telephony.fm / 02.10.2003
You can set up your handset so that after pressing the Talk key c or the handsfree key
d a list of all available outgoing MSNs is displayed (page 113).
Ringback when busy (CCBS) / when the call is not answered (CCNR)
Precondition: The exchange supports this service.
Ringback when busy – CCBS (Completion of calls to busy subscriber)
The user you are calling is currently making a call. Automatic callback saves you making
repeated attempts to dial the number.
Callback when the call is not answered – CCNR (Completion of calls no reply)
If the user you are calling does not answer you can arrange automatic callback. As soon
as the user has finished a call and the line is free again you will be rung back. The call-
back request is automatically cancelled after about 2 hours (depending on the
exchange).
Activating callback
The number you are calling is busy or your call is not answered:
Accepting a callback
The handset rings with a special ring and the display shows the ringback number.
Checking and deleting a ringback
Deleting the ringback while it is incoming:
The handset rings and the display shows the ringback number.
i
The temporary outgoing MSN is transferred to the person called as phone
number information.
[RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR]
CALLBCK
Press the display key.
Wait for confirmation from the exchange.
c
Press the talk key. The connection is established.
[RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR]
DELETE
Press the display key. The callback function is can-
celled.
28
Making calls
S1_SL1 / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / telephony.fm / 02.10.2003
Checking or deleting the ringback before it is incoming:
Identify caller
Identify caller is used to identify annoying or threatening callers.
Precondition: You have applied for Identify caller with your network provider.
Activate this function during the call or immediately after the caller has hung up. You
must not end the call yourself.
The caller is identified in the telephone exchange and is recorded by phone number,
time and date. A printout of the list is sent later by your network provider.
v
Open the menu.
s Base Settings
Select the menu item and confirm.
s Status
Select the menu item and confirm. The status list is
displayed (
= activated).
s Callback
Select the menu item and confirm. The current call-
back number is shown on the screen.
either ...
Check:
[ RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR]
BACK
Press the display key. The ringback remains active.
or ...
Cancel:
[ RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR]
DELETE
Press the display key. The callback function is can-
celled.
OK
OK
OK
i
You must not press the end call key!
v
Open the menu.
s Identify caller
Select the menu item and confirm.
OK
29
Functions during a call
S1_SL1 / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / during.fm / 02.10.2003
Functions during a call
Muting the handset
You can mute your handset during a call, e.g. if you wish to talk confidentially to
another person in the room. Your party on the line cannot hear your conversation dur-
ing this time. But you can continue to hear him/her.
Making a call to several users
You initiate a call to several users through an enquiry call. You can then speak to the
other users either one at a time ("toggling", page 31) or at the same time ("conference
call", page 32).
External enquiry call
You wish to call another external user during an external or internal call.
Initiate enquiry call:
The call to the first user is now put on hold. If the connection is on hold internally
(page 122), the first party hears the set waiting melody (page 123).
[RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR]
MUTE
Press the display key. The call is "held".
To cancel muting:
[RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR]
AUDIBLE
Press the display key.
i
When redialling or when performing other functions such as an internal
enquiry call, the muting is cancelled.
i
The enquiry call from an external call to another external call can be set
so (page 122) that both ISDN lines are occupied (hold connection inter-
nally), or so that your second ISDN line remains free (hold connection
externally – HOLD).
either ...
v
Open the menu.
s Enquiry call
Select the menu item and confirm.
or ...
S
Press the recall key.
OK
30
Functions during a call
S1_SL1 / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / during.fm / 02.10.2003
Make a call to the second external user:
Internal enquiry call
You wish to call an internal user during an external call.
Initiate enquiry call:
The call to the first user is now put on hold. The first (external) party hears the set up
waiting melody (page 123), when the connection is on hold internally (page 122).
~
Enter the second user's telephone number.
You can also make a call via the directory or other
lists (page 36).
If the second external user you have dialled is
busy:
[ RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR]
BACK
Press the display key to return to the first party.
If the second external user rings:
either ...
Toggle (page 31):
ts
Swap between callers.
or ...
Conference call (page 32):
[ RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR]
CONF.
Press the display key to establish conference switch-
ing.
or ...
Transfer the call (page 33).
either ...
u
Open Internal call
or ...
[ RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR]
CONSULT
Press the display key.
u
Open Internal call.
or ...
S
Press the recall key.
u
Open Internal call.
31
Functions during a call
S1_SL1 / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / during.fm / 02.10.2003
Make a call to the internal user:
Toggling
Precondition: You have established an enquiry call (page 29 and page 30).
There is both an active call (the one established with an enquiry call) and a held call (the
first). You can speak to both callers one at a time.
Use ts
to swap between the two callers.
An external party hears the set-up waiting melody in a connection on hold (page 123)
when the connection is on hold internally (page 122). An internal party in a connection
on hold does not hear a waiting melody.
Ending an enquiry call/toggling:
either ...
~
Enter the number of the internal party you want.
or ...
[RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR]
LIST
Press the display key.
s Int.11
Select internal number, e.g. Int.11 and confirm.
The connection to the internal party is established.
The internal party dialled is busy:
[RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR]
BACK
Press the display key to return to the external party.
The internal party has answered:
either ...
Toggle (page 31):
ts
Swap between callers.
or ...
Conference call (page 32):
[RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR]
CONF.
Press the display key to establish conference switch-
ing.
or ...
Transfer the call (page 33).
OK
either ...
End the call that is currently active:
v
Open the menu.
s End
Select the menu item and confirm. You return to the
waiting caller.
or ...
a
Press end call key.
The active connection is ended. You will automati-
cally be called again by the person on hold.
OK
32
Functions during a call
S1_SL1 / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / during.fm / 02.10.2003
Conference call
Precondition: You have established an enquiry call (page 29 and page 30).
There is both an active call (the one established with an enquiry call) and a held call (the
first). In a conference call you can speak to both other callers at the same time.
It is possible to conduct two conference calls at the same time on one base.
Establishing a conference
You are making an enquiry call. The first caller is put on hold.
Press the display key
CONF. to establish conference switching.
Ending a conference
You have several options for ending a conference call:
Forwarding an incoming call – CD (Call Deflection)
CD enables an incoming call to be forwarded to any phone number while it is ringing,
without having to answer the call.
You can pre-set a forwarding destination (page 119), dial a phone number from the
directory or enter a new number.
i
You can make a conference call with
two external users or
with one internal user and one external user.
either ...
You end the conference:
a
Hold down (return to idle status).
or ...
You change the conference to an enquiry call:
[ RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR]
INDIV.
Press the display key to change the conference
switching to an enquiry call (page 29 or page 30).
The connection that was active immediately before
the conference was established becomes the active
call again.
v
Open the menu.
s Forward
Select the menu item and confirm.
The pre-set forwarding destination is dialled.
OK
33
Functions during a call
S1_SL1 / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / during.fm / 02.10.2003
Transferring calls
Transferring a call to an external number – ECT (Explicit Call Transfer)
Preconditions:
The service is supported by your network provider.
It is only possible to transfer a call if the exchange also supports ECT. If this is not the
case, then the external call is disconnected. The number cannot be called back.
To "hold" when making an enquiry call from an external call, Ext. enq. call must be
set (page 122).
You are making an external call and would like to transfer it to another external user.
Establish an external enquiry call (page 29) and press the end call key a (also before
notifying), to transfer the call.
Transferring a call to another handset
You are making an external call and would like to transfer it to another handset.
Establish an internal enquiry call (page 30) and press the end call key a (also before
notifying), to transfer the call.
Working with call waiting for an external call – CW (Call Waiting)
Precondition: CW (Call Waiting) set up, see page 122.
You hear the call waiting tone (short beep) if you receive an external call while conduct-
ing another call (internal or external). The caller's number or name will appear in the dis-
play if Calling Line Identification is enabled.
There are four ways to work with call waiting for an external call:
Accept the waiting call – enquiry call:
Press the display key
ACCEPT. You answer the call waiting call, and the first call is put on
hold. Both parties are shown on the display, the current one is marked.
To toggle between both callers see page 31, for a conference call see page 32.
Reject the waiting call
Press the display key
REJECT to reject a call on call waiting.
i
With some ISDN PABX systems, your two parties are not connected
together when you press the end call key during a transfer. In this case
you need to activate this function, see page 122.
i
If you reject the call waiting tone on your handset, it can still be heard on
other registered handsets.
34
Functions during a call
S1_SL1 / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / during.fm / 02.10.2003
Changing parties
Forward call waiting internally:
You can forward the call waiting call internally without answering the call.
Putting a call on hold (Call Hold)
Putting an external caller on hold:
You are conducting an external call.
Press the display key
INT. The external caller is put on hold. The waiting external party
hears the waiting melody (page 123), when the connection is on hold internally
(page 122). You can initiate an internal enquiry call (page 30).
Putting an internal caller on hold:
You are conducting an internal call.
Press the display key
CONSULT. The internal party is on hold.
a
End your current call. The waiting call becomes a
normal call.
c
Press the talk key to answer the call.
v
Open the menu.
s Forward
Select the menu item and confirm.
s Int.11
Select internal number and confirm, e.g. Int.11 .
either ...
The call waiting tone ceases. The call on call waiting
was successfully forwarded.
Continue the active call.
or ...
You continue to hear the call waiting tone. The call
on call waiting could not be forwarded.
OK
OK
i
Forwarding is only possible to internal parties who are not already being
called.
35
Functions during a call
S1_SL1 / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / during.fm / 02.10.2003
Parking/continuing a call
You are making an external call and would like to transfer this to another telephone of
your ISDN connection, for example.
"De-parking" a call before talking:
"De-parking" a call after talking:
v
Open the menu.
s Call park
Select the menu item and confirm.
~
Enter a one or two digit park number and confirm.
Wait for the positive response Call parked.
a
Hold down (return to idle status).
OK
OK
v
Open the menu.
s Base Settings
Select the menu item and confirm.
s Call preparat.
Select the menu item and confirm.
s Canc. call park
Select the menu item and confirm.
~
Enter previously assigned park number and confirm.
c
Press the talk key.
OK
OK
OK
OK
c
Press the talk key.
v
Open the menu.
s Canc. call park
Select the menu item and confirm.
~
Enter previously assigned park number and confirm.
OK
OK
36
Using the directory and other lists
S1_SL1 / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / directories.fm / 02.10.2003
Using the directory and other lists
Directory and speed dial list
You can store up to 200 numbers in the directory and the email directory.
You can store up to 10 phone numbers in the speed dial list.
The directory makes dialling easier for you. You open the directory in idle status using
the s key. You can store an anniversary/birthday for every directory entry and mark the
entry as "VIP".
The speed dial list is a special directory in which you can store particularly important
numbers such as private telephone numbers and prefixes of network providers (so-
called "call-by-call numbers"), etc.. You open the speed dial list with the C key.
You create the directory, email directory, and speed dial list for your individual handset.
You can send the lists/individual entries to the other handsets if you want them to be
available at other handsets as well (page 42).
The speed dial list is operated in just the same way as the directory, except for the way
in which entries are stored.
i
The EATONI predictive text helps you input names (page 155, this
feature is deactivated when you purchase your phone).
Please refer to the Character Set Chart (page 154) to see how to
enter text.
You can enter up to 32 digits for a number and up to 16 letters for a
name.
When entering a number you can insert the required pause with ,
s Insert Pause or by pressing S for about 2 seconds.
à
OK
37
Using the directory and other lists
S1_SL1 / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / directories.fm / 02.10.2003
Storing a telephone number in the directory
Storing a telephone number in the speed dial list
You can assign one of the digits 0, 2–9 to up to nine entries on your speed dial list.
Already assigned digits are no longer offered. When you press and hold one of these dig-
its with the handset in the idle status, then press the Talk key c, the phone number
assigned to that digit is dialled immediately.
The maximum number of entries in the speed dial list is dependent on the number of
entries in the directory and in the email address directory.
s
Open the directory.
New Entry
Confirm.
Create an entry:
~
Enter the telephone number.
s~
Scroll to the next line and enter the name.
either ...
Save the entry:
Press display key to open menu.
Store
Confirm. The entry is stored.
or ...
Before saving, enter the anniversary:
s
Scroll to the Annivers.: line to enter the anniversary
if necessary, as is described on page 42. Now:
[RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR]
Save
Press the display key to save the setting.
... then
a
Long press (back to idle status).
OK
à
OK
C Open the speed dial list.
New Entry
Confirm.
Create an entry:
~
Enter the telephone number.
s ~
Scroll to the line PublicKey: and enter the name.
either ...
Store a phone number:
Press display key to open menu.
Save Entry
Confirm. The entry is stored.
or ...
Store a speed dial digit:
sr Scroll to the Enter key: line and select a digit
(0, 2–9) for this phone number.
[RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR]
Save
Press the display key to save the setting.
... then
a
Long press (back to idle status).
OK
à
OK
38
Using the directory and other lists
S1_SL1 / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / directories.fm / 02.10.2003
Dialling with the directory/speed dial list
Defining the MSN for the next call:
You can select a valid outgoing MSN only for this call even when dialling from the direc-
tory. Precondition:
MSN next call must be activated (page 113). Select an entry and
open with the submenu. Using Dial number the list of MSNs is displayed.
Viewing and editing an entry in the directory/speed dial list
Proceed as described on page 37 (directory) or page 37 (speed dial list) under
"Create entry".
i
Already assigned speed dial digits are no longer offered.
Sorting order: entries with speed dial digits are at the beginning of the
list.
sC
Open the directory or speed dial list.
either ...
Scroll to the entry:
s
Select entry.
c
Press the talk key. The number is dialled.
or ...
Enter the first letter:
~
Enter the first letter of the name you want, such as
"N".
~
You can also enter the next few letters. In line
directly over the display keys (input field) is an "N".
Enter the 2nd letter, e.g., "i". The name having this
letter combination comes next and appears. In the
input field is now "Ni". Enter letters (max. 10) until
the name you are looking for appears.
c
Press the talk key. The number is dialled.
à
OK
sC
Open the directory or speed dial list.
R[RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR ]
s View
Select the entry and press the display key.
[ RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR]
Edit
Press the display key to initiate changes.
39
Using the directory and other lists
S1_SL1 / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / directories.fm / 02.10.2003
Copying and changing a directory entry
So that you do not have to enter a similar entry twice, you can create a copy and then
edit that entry.
s
Open the directory.
sv
Select an entry and open the menu.
s Copy and Edit
Select the menu item and confirm.
~ Change the phone number.
s~
Scroll to the next line and change the name.
either ...
Save the changes:
Press display key to open menu.
Store
Confirm. The entry is stored.
or ...
Before saving, change the anniversary:
R[RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR]
s Edit
Jump to the line Annivers.: and press the display
key.
~ Change the anniversary (page 42) and confirm.
[RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR]
Save
Press the display key to save the entry.
... then
[RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR]
Yes
If you do not change the phone number, you will see
a message telling you that the phone number
already exists. Press the display key to confirm the
prompt.
a Press key (return to idle status).
OK
à
OK
OK
i
Voice pattern and VIP settings are not copied.
40
Using the directory and other lists
S1_SL1 / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / directories.fm / 02.10.2003
Marking a directory entry as VIP
You can mark directory entries of callers who are particularly important to you as "VIP"
(Very Important Person). You can also assign a particular ringer melody to VIP numbers.
You can then tell who is calling you by the ringer. The VIP melody sounds after the first
ring tone.
Precondition: The phone number of the caller is transferred (page 23).
Deleting a single entry or directory/speed dial list
s
Open the directory.
sv
Select an entry and open the menu.
VIP Entry
Select the menu item and confirm.
r
In the VIP: line, activate the function.
sr
Move one line down. The current melody rings, their
digit is at the end of the line. Select a melody (1-10).
[ RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR]
Save
Now press the display key to confirm the setting.
a
Long press (back to idle status).
OK
sC
Open the directory or speed dial list.
sv
Select an entry and open the menu.
either ...
Delete a single entry:
s Delete Entry
Select the menu item and confirm.
or ...
Delete the entire directory/speed dial list:
s Delete Calls List
Select the menu item and confirm.
[ RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR]
Yes
Press the display key to confirm the prompt.
a
Long press (back to idle status).
OK
OK
41
Using the directory and other lists
S1_SL1 / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / directories.fm / 02.10.2003
Adding a displayed telephone number to the directory
When a telephone number appears in the display (CLIP) you can add it to your directory.
This can be done while dialling from the last number redial list, from the calls list/
answering machine list (on Gigaset with integrated answering machine) or during a
call ©.
Selecting a phone number from the directory
If you are prompted to enter an external phone number while you are operating your
telephone, you can use the directory of your handset to do this.
Precondition: The input field for external telephone numbers is displayed.
The phone number of the entry is added to the entry field.
v
Open the menu.
s Copy to Directory
Select the menu item and confirm.
s~ If you do not have a CNIP, scroll to the name line and
enter the name.
either ...
Save the entry:
Press display key to open menu.
Save Entry
Confirm. The entry is stored.
or ...
Enter the anniversary:
s
Scroll to the Annivers.: line to enter the anniversary
if necessary, as is described on page 42. Now:
[RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR]
Save
Press the display key to save the entry.
OK
à
OK
i
If you have CNIP (page 23) as well as CLIP, then the name that goes with
the telephone number will also be displayed (up to 16 characters long).
either ...
Press display key to open menu.
s Directory
Select the menu item and confirm.
s Select entry and confirm.
or ...
s
Open the directory.
s Select entry and confirm.
à
OK
OK
OK
42
Using the directory and other lists
S1_SL1 / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / directories.fm / 02.10.2003
Sending a single entry or complete list to a handset
You can send single entries or the complete list to another handset that is registered on
the same base. This avoids entering information twice. VIP settings, stored voice pat-
terns and speed dial digits are not sent.
After an entry has been sent you are asked if you want to send another entry. If you con-
firm with the display key
Yes you can select more entries to send; once you have finished
sending, press the display key
No to end it.
The successful transfer of data is confirmed with a message and with the confirmation
tone at the receiving handset. Existing entries in the receiving handset are retained.
Entries with identical numbers are not overwritten. The number of entries that are
stored in the receiving handset may therefore differ from the number of entries that you
have sent to it.
The transfer is cancelled if the phone rings or if the memory of the receiving handset is
full. The last entry to be transferred appears in the display.
Saving an anniversary to a phone number
You can save anniversaries, such as a birthday in the directory and be reminded of this
(reminder call). So that the anniversary can be signalled with a ringer melody, you must
enter a time.
Precondition: You have opened a directory entry (page 37).
sC
Open the directory or speed dial list.
sv
Select an entry and open the menu.
either ...
Send a single entry:
s Copy Entry
Select the menu item and confirm.
or ...
Send complete list:
s Copy List
Select the menu item and confirm.
... then
~ Enter the internal number of the receiving handset
and confirm. Sending is initiated.
OK
OK
OK
R[RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR ]
s Edit
Jump to the line Annivers.: and press the display
key.
~
In the Date: line, enter the day/month (4-digit).
s~
Scroll to the Time: line and enter the hour/minute
(4-digit) when the signalling (reminder) should take
place.
sr
Scroll to the Prompt: line and select a signal (melody
1–10 or "visual").
Confirm. The directory entry is displayed again. Now
save the entry as described on page 37.
OK
43
Using the directory and other lists
S1_SL1 / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / directories.fm / 02.10.2003
To delete an anniversary, press the display key
Edit in the field for the anniversary in
the directory entry, then when the display changes press the display key
Delete and
finally after another display change press
Save.
Anniversary reminder call:
The handset signals a reminder call with the selected ringer melody. The display shows
the directory entry with ‚ ‚ ‚.
Voice-activated dialling
With voice-activated dialling, you can dial a phone number by simply speaking the name
of the party in your handset you wish to call. First you have to create a directory entry
and say the name one time for this entry, i.e., a voice pattern of the name must be
stored in your handset.
The voice patterns are saved in voice directories. You can create up to four different,
user-specific voice directories. By factory default they are called user 1 to user 4. Each
user must record his own voice pattern and store it in his voice directory.
The voice directory contains all directory entries. Entries which already have a voice pat-
tern saved for the set user are marked with a ´.
You can save up to 29 voice patterns, distributed among users.
Recording a voice pattern for an existing directory entry
Record your voice pattern in quiet surroundings..
either ...
Switch off the reminder call ahead of time:
[RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR]
Silence
Press the display key.
or ...
Answer with an SMS:
[RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR]
SMS
Press the display key. You are immediately in the SMS
menu.
Step 1: Open the directory for voice-activated
dialling:
s
Open the directory.
R[RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR]
s Voice
Select the entry and press the display key.
s User 2
Select and confirm, e.g. User 2.
Step 2: Begin recording:
[RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR]
record.
Press the display key.
Confirm the display prompt. Speak the name when
prompted to do so by the display. Repeat the name
when prompted again to do so. Your recording is
stored automatically.
a
Long press (back to idle status).
OK
OK
44
Using the directory and other lists
S1_SL1 / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / directories.fm / 02.10.2003
To change the voice pattern, you must delete it (page 45) and record it again.
Using voice-activated dialling :
The display prompts you to speak. Speak the voice pattern, e.g. Anna. If the name
matches the recorded voice pattern, it is repeated. The phone number is dialled.
Announcing the caller's name
When you receive an external call, you hear the ringer and the telephone announces the
caller's name.
Precondition: Calling Line Identification is active (page 23) and you have recorded a
voice pattern for the incoming number (page 43).
Activating/deactivating the name announcement
Play the voice pattern
Open the directory for voice-activated dialling (see Step 1, page 43). Now:
i
If your two recordings are too different from each other, you will be
prompted to repeat them.
A message tells you if your speech pattern is too much like another
user's. Close this message with , go back to the start of the voice
pattern recording sequence and repeat the recording.
Ý
t
Hold down.
v
Open the menu.
s Audio Settings
Select the menu item and confirm.
s Ringer Settings
Select the menu item and confirm.
Ext. Calls
Confirm. You hear the current volume.
sr Scroll to the Announce line and activate/deactivate
the name announcement.
[ RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR]
Save
Now press the display key to confirm the setting.
a
Long press (back to idle status).
OK
OK
OK
s
Select the marked entry with ´.
[ RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR]
Play
Press the display key.
a
Long press (back to idle status).
45
Using the directory and other lists
S1_SL1 / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / directories.fm / 02.10.2003
Deleting the voice pattern
You can delete a particular user's voice pattern for an entry. This does not affect the
voice patterns of the other users.
Open the directory for voice-activated dialling (see Step 1, page 43). Now:
Changing a user name
You can change the user names (User 1 to User 4).
sv
Select an entry (marked with ´) and open the
menu.
s Delete Name
Select the menu item and confirm. The entry is dis-
played without ´.
a
Long press (back to idle status).
OK
i
Deleting a voice pattern for an entry does not affect its number or name
they are retained. The voice patterns of other users for the same entry are
also unaffected.
s
Open the directory.
R[RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR]
s Voice
Select an entry and press the display key.
s User 2
Select the user and confirm,
e.g. User 2.
[RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR]
Edit
Press the display key to initiate changes.
R[RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR]
~ Save
Enter the new name and save.
a
Long press (back to idle status).
OK
46
Using the directory and other lists
S1_SL1 / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / directories.fm / 02.10.2003
Email directory
You store email addresses in the email directory you need for sending SMS to email
addresses, for example. You can store a total of 200 entries in the e-mail directory, in the
directory and in the speed dial list.
Saving a new email address
Viewing and changing an email address
Precondition:You have opened an email directory (step1, page 46).
Step 1: Open the email directory:
s
Open the directory.
s Deleting
Select the menu item and confirm.
Step 2: Create an entry:
New Entry
Confirm.
~ Enter the address (for text input see page 154).
During entry …
Press display key to open menu.
either ...
Insert a period:
s Insert '.'
Select the menu item and confirm.
or ...
Insert an @:
s Insert '@'
Select the menu item and confirm.
or ...
Activate/deactivate predictive text (page 155):
s Predictive Text
Select the menu item and confirm.
... then
Save email address:
Press display key to open menu.
Save Entry
Confirm. The entry is stored.
a
Long press (back to idle status).
OK
OK
à
OK
OK
OK
à
OK
R[RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR ]
s View
Select the entry and press the display key.
The number is displayed.
Changing an entry:
[ RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR]
Edit
Press the display key.
~
Edit the address.
Press display key to open menu.
Save Entry
Confirm. The entry is stored.
a
Long press (back to idle status).
à
OK
47
Using the directory and other lists
S1_SL1 / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / directories.fm / 02.10.2003
Deleting or copying an email address
Precondition:You have opened an email directory.
Deleting the entire email directory
Precondition:You have opened an email directory.
Display available memory
The memory space is divided up between the directory, the speed dial list (page 36) and
the email directory (page 46). The available memory of all these lists is displayed.
sv
Select an entry and open the menu.
either ...
Delete the email address:
s Delete Entry
Select the menu item and confirm.
or ...
Copy the email address:
s Copy and Edit
Select the menu item and confirm.
~ Change the address as required.
Press display key to open menu.
Save Entry
Confirm. The entry is stored.
... then
a
Long press (back to idle status).
OK
OK
à
OK
sv
Select any entry and open the menu.
s Delete List
Select the menu item and confirm.
a
Long press (back to idle status).
OK
s
Open the directory.
sv
Select any entry and open the menu.
s Available Memory
Select the menu item and confirm.
a
Long press (back to idle status).
OK
48
Using the directory and other lists
S1_SL1 / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / directories.fm / 02.10.2003
Last number redial list
The last number redial list contains the ten last dialled numbers (on your handset). If
names have also been stored for these numbers in the directory, then these names will
be displayed. If there are several identical entries only the most recent will be displayed.
If the last number redial list is full, the oldest entry is deleted with the next call. You can
use the last number redial list to redial the telephone numbers.
Manual last number redial
Defining the MSN for the next call:
You can select a valid outgoing MSN only for this call even when dialling from the last
number redial list. Precondition: MSN next call must be activated (page 113). Select
an entry and open with the submenu. Using Dial number the list of MSNs is
displayed.
Automatic redial
With this function, the phone number of a party you have not reached will be dialled
automatically every 20 seconds. The Handsfree key flashes and "open listening" is acti-
vated. If the party answers, press the talk key c. "Open listening" remains activated. If
the caller does not answer, ringing stops after about 30 seconds. The function switches
itself off after twelve dialling attempts.
Preconditions:
The party cannot be reached.
To be able to use automatic redial from the last number redial list, MSN next call
must be deactivated for the handset (page 113).
Open the last number redial list.
sc
Select the entry and press the talk key.
The phone number is dialled.
i
To add or change the phone number, press , s Display
Number
.
When displaying a name, you can have the respective phone number
displayed by using the display key
View.
You can add the phone numbers to your directory from the last
number redial list (page 41).
Þ
à
OK
à
OK
a
Press end call key.
Open the last number redial list.
The party who could not be reached is selected.
v
Open the menu.
Automatic Redial
Confirm.
Þ
OK
49
Using the directory and other lists
S1_SL1 / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / directories.fm / 02.10.2003
To cancel automatic redial, press the display key
CANCEL or any key.
Deleting a single phone number or the entire last number redial list
Opening lists with the message key
Providing a new entry is present in the relevant list, you can open the following lists
using the message key f:
1. Incoming SMS message list Textmessage(SMS) (page 63)
2. List of missed calls Missed calls (page 50)
3. Answering machine lists AM1 , AM2 , AM3 (on Gigaset with answering machine,
page 141)
These lists display the calls, messages and text messages belonging to the receive MSN's
assigned to the handset.
As soon as a new entry (calls, messages on an integrated answering machine and/or
SMS) were received in one or more lists, the key f flashes and an advisory tone is
heard.
If the flashing key f is pressed, the following is displayed:
If only one list has new entries, you will see the first new entry in that list.
Open entry: s (Select entry)
OK
If several lists have new entries, those lists are offered for your selection.
Open entry: s (Select list)
OK, s (Select entry) OK
If the key f is pressed, and it is not blinking, the following is displayed:
The message No new messages is displayed. Then the list of missed calls are opened.
i
A call in the meantime deactivates the automatic redial. You must acti-
vate it again afterwards.
Open the last number redial list.
sv
Select an entry and open the menu.
either ...
Delete a single telephone number:
s Delete Entry
Select the menu item and confirm.
a
Long press (back to idle status).
or ...
Delete the entire last number redial list:
s Delete Calls List
Select the menu item and confirm.
Þ
OK
OK
50
Using the directory and other lists
S1_SL1 / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / directories.fm / 02.10.2003
Call lists
There are two call lists:
the list of missed calls
This contains all the calls that have not been accepted or have been rejected plus all
calls responded to by an answering machine for which there is no message
attached.
the list of accepted calls
This contains all the calls accepted by an internal user or answering machine.
The calls in these lists are displayed on a receive MSN assigned to the handset. In each
case the phone numbers for the last 20 calls are stored. The oldest entry is deleted if a
calls list is full and new entries are added. The most recent entry is at the top of the list
and the oldest at the bottom.
A caller is entered in the relevant calls list at the end of a call. If a caller's number has
been transferred and this phone number is entered in the directory, then the caller's
name is inserted. If there are several identical entries only the most recent will be dis-
played in the two lists. A caller can appear in both lists if one call he makes is answered
and another not. If an outgoing call is made to a caller who is entered in the list of
missed calls, then this entry is transferred to the last number redial list and deleted from
the list of missed calls.
The following is displayed for each entry:
the number of calls for this caller
the phone number of the caller or his name (if it exists as a directory entry) or
unknown, if the phone number was not transferred
the incoming MSN
the date and time of the last call
Opening call lists
You can open both call lists via the menu. The list of missed calls can also be opened
using the f-key, providing there is a new entry present (page 49). New entries in the
list of missed calls are signalled by the f key flashing and by a confirmation tone.
v
Open the menu.
s Base Settings
Select the menu item and confirm.
either ...
s Accepted calls
Select the menu item and confirm.
or ...
s Missed calls
Select the menu item and confirm.
OK
OK
OK
i
If another internal user has already opened a calls list you cannot open it.
51
Using the directory and other lists
S1_SL1 / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / directories.fm / 02.10.2003
Calling back a caller
Precondition: The caller's number has been identified (page 23).
Open the list of missed or accepted calls (page 51). Now:
Callback begins at once. The phone number is deleted from the calls list and entered in
the last number redial list.
Defining the MSN for the next call:
Even when dialling from the directory, you can
put the area code of the network provider before the phone number (page 72).
Select an entry and open with the submenu. Using
s NET list the net-
work provider list is displayed.
select a valid outgoing MSN only for this call. Precondition: MSN next call must be
activated (page 113).
Select an entry and open with the submenu. Using Dial number the list
of MSNs is displayed.
Displaying an entry
Open the list of missed or accepted calls (page 50). Now:
s
Select entry.
either ...
c
Press the talk key.
or ...
v
Open the menu.
Dial number
Confirm.
c
Press the talk key.
OK
i
To a PABX: The access code (outside line code) is automatically put before
the phone number (page 129).
à
OK
à
OK
s v
Select entry and open the submenu.
s Display entry
Select the menu item and confirm.
OK
52
Using the directory and other lists
S1_SL1 / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / directories.fm / 02.10.2003
Changing the caller's phone number
Open the list of missed or accepted calls (page 50). Now:
Adding an entry to the directory from the calls list
Open the list of missed or accepted calls (page 50). Now:
Deleting an entry from the calls list
Open the list of missed or accepted calls (page 50). Now:
s v
Select entry and open the submenu.
s Change number
Select the menu item and confirm. You will now see
the number.
~
Change the number.
Í
Press the display key to open the submenu.
Delete entry
Confirm.
OK
OK
s v
Select entry and open the submenu.
s Copy to dir.
Select the menu item and confirm.
s ~
Scroll to the line Name and enter the name (for text
entry see page 154).
Press display key to open menu.
Save Entry
Confirm. The entry is stored.
a
Long press (back to idle status).
OK
à
OK
either ...
Delete a single entry:
s v
Select entry and open the submenu.
s Delete entry
Select the menu item and confirm. The entry is
deleted.
or ...
Delete all entries:
v
Open the submenu.
s Delete list
Select the menu item and confirm.
[ RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR]
YES
Confirm the prompt.
a
Long press (back to idle status).
OK
OK
53
SMS (text messages)
S1_SL1 / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / sms.fm / 02.10.2003
SMS (text messages)
You can send and receive SMS text messages (Short Message Service) with your hand-
set. You can send an SMS to any fixed network or mobile phone network number. Your
SMS can be received as a text message by any device with SMS functionality (mobile
phone, PC, another telephone). If the recipient of your SMS does not have a phone with
SMS functionality, then the SMS is played back.
You can write, edit, read, delete or forward SMS text messages from any registered
handset that has SMS functionality and to which the same receive MSN has been
assigned. When several handsets with the same receive MSN are in use at any one time,
only one handset can access the SMS functions.
General
Text messages are exchanged between SMS centres that are operated by service provid-
ers. The telephone number of the SMS centres through which you wish to send and
receive text messages must be entered in your phone (page 55). Up to ten SMS centres
can be entered. You can change the telephone numbers of the SMS centres.
You can receive text messages via any of the SMS centres whose number you have
entered. Of course you must be registered to receive text messages with those SMS cen-
tres (page 57).
Your text message is sent through the SMS centre that is entered as the active send
service centre.
Before you can send and receive text messages
Calling Line Identification may not be permanently deactivated for the MSN used
(page 24).
To receive text messages you must be registered with your service provider
(page 57).
The handset must have Unrestricted authorisation to send an SMS. To receive an
SMS, Incoming only authorisation is adequate.
You must not allow the network provider to bar the phone numbers you have
entered for SMS centres.
It is currently not possible to send a text message if you have a call-by-call connection.
54
SMS (text messages)
S1_SL1 / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / sms.fm / 02.10.2003
If the fixed line recipient's phone is unable to receive an SMS, the text message is played
back automatically as a voice message. Between 7.00 and 22.00 hrs, these text mes-
sages are delivered immediately in the form of a telephone call. Text messages sent
after 22.00 hrs are stored and delivered the next day.
If you have concluded a preselection contract with a network provider, ask whether they
support the "Fixed network SMS" service. (Preselection means you are bound contractu-
ally to a network provider.)
In Switzerland the SMS function is not supported within the ISDN network (status: Sep-
tember 2003).
Ask your service provider,
what charges are billed for sending and receiving a text message,
which mobile phone operators you can send text messages to and which mobile
phone operators you can receive text messages from,
which functions your SMS service offers,
how you are registered with SMS centres for which your phone may already be pre-
configured – automatically by sending a message or by a special registration proce-
dure.
Managing SMS service centres
SMS messages are exchanged through SMS service centres. To send and receive a text
message, you require the phone number for your service provider's SMS centre. You
have to store this phone number in your telephone.
You may enter up to ten SMS centres in your telephone.
Sending an SMS – send centre
You must enter the phone number of the SMS centre via which you want to send the
SMS in your telephone and activate it as "send centre" (page 55 and page 56). This
phone number will be used for sending all SMS messages.
As supplied, the "Anny Way" SMS centre has already been entered (number 0190
01504) and activated as the send centre. This means that, in Germany, you may send
text messages immediately.
You can activate another SMS centre as the active send service centre. The send centre
that was activated previously is then automatically deactivated.
Receiving an SMS
You can receive an SMS message via any SMS centre you have entered provided you
have registered with these SMS centres as an SMS recipient (if registered, see page 57).
55
SMS (text messages)
S1_SL1 / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / sms.fm / 02.10.2003
Entering, editing or deleting phone numbers for SMS centres
You can enter up to ten SMS centres.
Before entering or editing the number, please obtain information about special features
and what the SMS service provider offers.
v
Open the menu.
s Base Settings
Select the menu item and confirm.
s Settings
Select the menu item and confirm.
s Service centres
Select the menu item and confirm. The phone
number list appears.
s
Select entry, e.g. <empty>.
v
Open the submenu.
either ...
Changing an entry:
Edit entry
Confirm.
~
Enter the phone number of the SMS centre.
Í
Press the display key to open the submenu.
Save entry
Confirm.
or ...
Delete an entry:
s Delete entry
Select the menu item and confirm.
a
Hold down (return to idle status).
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
i
If you delete the phone number of a send centre, then you must
activate another SMS centre to be the send centre in order to be able
to continue sending text messages.
If your telephone is connected to a PABX, you may have to prefix the
phone number with an access code (number with which you obtain
an exchange line, usually "0") (this depends on your PABX),
see page 70.
56
SMS (text messages)
S1_SL1 / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / sms.fm / 02.10.2003
Activating/deactivating SMS send centre
To send an SMS you must activate the phone number for the SMS centre as the send
centre. By doing this you determine via which SMS centre the text message is to be sent.
Text messages can be received via all SMS centres entered, as long as you have previ-
ously been through the registration procedure (see the next chapter) as an SMS-capable
connection.
v
Open the menu.
s Base Settings
Select the menu item and confirm.
s Settings
Select the menu item and confirm.
s Service centres
Select the menu item and confirm. You will now see
the phone number list.
s
Select the telephone number.
v
Open the submenu.
either ...
Activate SMS centre as the send centre:
s Serv.centre on?
Select the menu item and confirm. The display
changes to Serv.centre off? The SMS centre is acti-
vated as the send centre. In the list the phone
number of the SMS centre is marked with a
.
The previous send centre is automatically
deactivated.
or ...
Deactivate SMS centre:
s Serv.centre off?
Select the menu item and confirm. SMS centre is
deactivated.
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
i
When the Service centres phone number list is opened, the display
jumps immediately to the send centre.
If you have not activated an SMS send centre you will not be able to
send an SMS, but you will be able to receive text messages from all the
SMS centres you have entered.
57
SMS (text messages)
S1_SL1 / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / sms.fm / 02.10.2003
Registering/de-registering with an SMS centre
In order to be able to receive text messages on your phone you must first register your
phone number with an SMS service provider. You can find out from the service provider
concerned which information you need to send to register and de-register.
To register with an SMS service provider you must first enter the phone number of the
SMS centre concerned and activate it as the send centre.
After you have registered, remember to re-activate the SMS centre as the send centre
via which you wish to send text messages.
Memory
The number of text messages that can be stored in the base depends on the size of the
messages (about 11 text messages of up to 160 characters each). The memory is used
for the incoming and outgoing message list. If the memory is full, the message Text list
full! Please delete entries is displayed. Delete text messages you no longer require
from the incoming and outgoing message lists.
You can check how much capacity your SMS memory has left (in %).
i
Take care to register the phone number (MSN) that is assigned to the
handset as send MSN (page 113), and with which you are sending the
text message. If you also want to send and receive text messages via
other handsets with different MSN's, then you must also have these
phone numbers registered.
v
Open the menu.
SMS
Confirm.
s Available memory
Select the menu item and confirm. Available mem-
ory is display in %.
OK
OK
58
SMS (text messages)
S1_SL1 / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / sms.fm / 02.10.2003
Sending a text message and the outgoing message list
Notes on writing and sending an SMS message
If you are interrupted as you are writing (by a call, an incoming SMS or because the
handset changes to idle status because of prolonged inactivity), the SMS is automati-
cally stored in the outgoing message list. You can continue writing the SMS later
(page 60).
Text messages that cannot be sent are assigned an error status (page 70) and are placed
in the incoming message list.
Text messages are only stored automatically if sending is interrupted. If you wish to
store a message then you must do so before it is sent.
Writingtext messages
A single text message can be up to 160 characters long. If your text is longer, it will be
sent automatically as a linked message. Up to four messages with 153 characters each
can be linked. This means you can enter up to 612 characters. Bear in mind that linked
messages incur correspondingly higher charges.
Remember that the service provider cannot deliver a text message that contains Greek
or Cyrillic characters. Therefore you must select another input language.
When you have opened the input field for the text message, then press the display
key ©. From the menu, select Select Language and then press [ to confirm your
choice. Then select an input language and confirm the selection with [. Press the end
call key a twice briefly, to return to the input field. The setting of the input language
only applies to the current text message.
Write text messages as follows:
i
Remember that some service providers will bill you for a cancelled call
to the SMS centre.
v
Open the menu.
SMS
Confirm.
Write message
Confirm. The input field opens.
~
Input your text (for text input see page 154).
OK
OK
The counter displays how many characters you can still write. It
counts down from 612 characters (the max. allowed number of
characters with linked messages).
The number in parentheses indicates the message you are in (with
linked messages). Example: You are in the second message.
EATONI predictive text is activated.
470(2)_____Ç_____Abc
with tomorrow
Upper/lower case and digits.
59
SMS (text messages)
S1_SL1 / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / sms.fm / 02.10.2003
The EATONI (page 155) predictive text feature helps you write your message The
Ç icon
tells you if EATONI is activated (the default setting is: on). You can deactivate EATONI
anytime using , s
Predictive Text .
Saving text messages
Precondition: You have written a text message (page 58) and the input field is open.
The message is stored in the outgoing message list. It can be retrieved and sent at a
later time (page 60).
Sending a text message without saving it
Precondition: You have written a text message (page 58) and the input field is open.
i
Please refer to the Character Set Chart (page 154) to see how to
enter text.
Use 1 to insert a space, and P to toggle between upper case,
lower case and digits (page 154).
You can find out how to correct text on page 12.
If you receive a text message that is incomplete (e.g. because your
phone's memory is full), you will see a message.
à
OK
Press the display key to open the submenu.
s Save Entry
Select the menu item and confirm. You can then
send the text message (page 59).
à
OK
Press display key to open menu.
Send
Confirm.
either ...
~
Enter the recipient's number (with prefix).
or ...
Select a number from the directory:
s
Open the directory.
s
Select entry and confirm. The number appears in the
display.
... then
Í
Press the display key to open the submenu.
Send
Confirm.
à
OK
Dest.call no.
089123456
z {XÍ
OK
OK
60
SMS (text messages)
S1_SL1 / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / sms.fm / 02.10.2003
Examples of phone number inputs:
Opening the outgoing message list
The outgoing message list shows you:
Text messages which you saved before you sent them (page 59).
Text messages you could not send because, for example, you were interrupted by an
incoming call while you were writing the message.
However, the list only shows text messages that are assigned to the same send MSN as
the handset.
These messages are stored until you delete them.
Reading and deleting text messages in the outgoing message list
Precondition: You have opened the outgoing message list (page 60).
i
The recipient's number must always include the area code (prefix), even
if you are in that area.
08912345678 A national telephone number within the fixed
network
077x1234567 A number within the mobile phone network
v
Open the menu.
SMS
Confirm.
s Outbox 4
Select the menu item and confirm. The figure shown
indicates how many text messages are stored in the
outgoing message list.
Use q
to scroll in the list.
OK
OK
The total number of SMS saved
in the outgoing message list
Number of the text message
displayed
Saved 2/ 4
19.03.03 09:45
yx ”Í
i
When the memory is full, you are prompted to delete messages
(page 57).
q
Select SMS.
v
Open the menu.
either ...
Read SMS:
Read textmessage
Confirm. Use s to view the continuation of the text
message in the display.
OK
61
SMS (text messages)
S1_SL1 / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / sms.fm / 02.10.2003
Deleting the entire outgoing message list
This function deletes all the messages in the outgoing message list.
Precondition: You have opened the outgoing message list (page 60).
Sending or editing text messages in the outgoing message list
Precondition: You have opened a text message in the outgoing message list to read
(page 60).
You can now send the message as described on page 59.
Inserting pre-written text or an email address in an SMS
You can insert a text template or an emoticon anywhere in your SMS. The following are
available on your telephone:
3 Text templates: I am late, Let's meet , Congratulations
8 Emoticons: Happy :-), Sad :-(, Wink ;-), Serious :-|,
Sarcastic :->, Laughing :-D, Surprised :-o, Crying :'-(
You can also insert an email address if it is stored in your email directory (page 46). Text
templates, emoticons and email addresses are inserted wherever the cursor is.
or ...
Delete SMS:
q Delete textmess.
Select the menu item and confirm.
OK
v
Open the menu.
s Delete list
Confirm.
[RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR]
YES
Press the display key to confirm the prompt.
a
Short press (back to idle status).
OK
v
Open the menu.
either ...
Write and send a new text message :
Write Message
Confirm. The input field is opened (page 58). You
can write a new text message.
or ...
Edit and send a stored text message:
s Use Text
Select the menu item and confirm. The input field is
opened with the contents of the stored text mes-
sage. You can edit the text.
OK
OK
62
SMS (text messages)
S1_SL1 / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / sms.fm / 02.10.2003
Precondition: You are writing an SMS (page 58), and the input field is open.
Sending a text message to an e-mail address
You can send a text message to an e-mail address. To do this you should write the recip-
ient's e-mail address at the start of the text message and send this text message to the
call number of the e-mail service of your SMS send centre.
Entering the e-mail address at the start of the text message
Enter the recipient's e-mail address at the start of your text message. Use a space to sep-
arate the e-mail address from the message text or, if required for other providers, by
inserting a colon. As long as the text area is empty, you can copy the email address
from your email directory (page 46).
If the predictive text feature is deactivated enter the character "@" using the hash
key R (press 2 x ), the colon using the Q key (press 8 x) and the space character
using the 1 (press 1 x).
If predictive text is on, enter "@" by giving the hash key R 1 long and 1 short press.
With ©, s Save Entry you can save temporarily.
Precondition: You are writing a text message (page 58) and the input field is open.
Press the display key to open the submenu.
either ...
Inserting text templates:
s Insert Template
Select the menu item and confirm.
s Let's meet
Select a template and confirm, e.g. Let's meet .
or ...
Inserting an emoticon:
s Insert Smiley
Select the menu item and confirm.
s Laughing :-D
Select the emoticon and confirm.
or ...
Inserting an email address:
s Insert e-mail Adr.
Select the menu item and confirm. The email direc-
tory will be opened.
s Anna@...
Select an address and confirm.
à
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
either ...
Copying an address from the email directory:
Œ
Press the display key. It is displayed as long as the
input field is empty.
The email directory will be opened (page 46).
s Anna@...
Select an email address and confirm.
or ...
Entering an email address manually:
~
Enter the full e-mail address and end it with a space
or a colon.
OK
63
SMS (text messages)
S1_SL1 / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / sms.fm / 02.10.2003
Entering the text of the message
Sending a text message as an e-mail
You must send the text messages to the number for the e-mail service of your send
centre..
Receiving text messages, incoming message list
Notes on receiving a text message
New SMS are signalled by a message in the display, by flashing of the message key f
and by a confirmation tone for all handsets with the same incoming MSN. The date and
time (transferred from the SMS centre) are indicated for each SMS received.
The incoming message list contains only those text messages sent to a receive MSN to
which your handset is assigned. If no MSN's have been set up, then all text messages
received are shown on all handsets.
In the receiving list the new (unread) messages are before the old messages. New and
old messages are sorted according to their time of arrival: oldest new message, ... , new-
est message, oldest old message, ..., newest old message.
Linked text messages are displayed as one SMS. If an incoming linked message is too
long or has not transferred completely, it will be split into individual messages and
stored in the incoming message list.
~
Enter the SMS text.
Press display key to open menu.
Send
Confirm.
580(1)_____Ç_____Abc
p.mustermann@name.de
Hallo Peter
Email address, space, SMS
text (example)
à
OK
~
Enter the number of the e-mail service.
Press display key to open menu.
Send
Confirm.
Dest.call no.
6245
z {XÍ
à
OK
64
SMS (text messages)
S1_SL1 / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / sms.fm / 02.10.2003
Opening the incoming message list
The incoming message list shows you:
all received messages,
messages that could not be sent despite several attempts. These messages are all
stored with an error status (page 70).
The message list is displayed for example as follows
Opening with the message key
Precondition: There is at least one new message in the list.
Opening with the menu
A new text message is displayed, for example, as follows:
If the SMS memory is full and the SMS centre is unable to transfer any more, an appro-
priate message will appear on the screen. Press
OK to confirm and delete text messages
you no longer need from the incoming and outgoing message list (see also page 60 and
page 65). The SMS centre will then re-transmit the text message.
Inbox 2/ 5
Number of new text messages in the list
Number of old, read text messages in the list
f
Press the message key.
If there are no new calls/messages in the other lists,
then the first new text message is opened immedi-
ately. Otherwise:
s Inbox 2/ 5
If necessary, select and confirm. The incoming mes-
sage list is opened and the first new message is dis-
played.
OK
v
Open the menu.
SMS
Confirm.
s Inbox 2/ 5
Select the menu item and confirm.
OK
OK
Total number of new SMS
Number of the text
message displayed
New 01/02
1234567890
12.07.03 09:45
yx
Text message status:
New, Old, Error
Phone number of the sender
65
SMS (text messages)
S1_SL1 / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / sms.fm / 02.10.2003
Reading and deleting text messages in the incoming message list
Precondition: You have opened the incoming message list (page 64).
Once you have opened a new message it acquires the status Old.
Deleting the entire incoming message list
This function deletes all new and old text messages in the incoming message list.
Precondition: You have opened the incoming message list (page 64).
Replying to or forwarding text messages
While you read a text message you can use the following functions:
q
Select SMS.
v
Open the menu.
either ...
Read SMS:
Read textmessage
Confirm. Use s to view the continuation of the text
message in the display.
or ...
Delete SMS:
q Delete textmess.
Select the menu item and confirm.
a
Hold down (return to idle status).
OK
OK
v
Open the menu.
s Delete list
Select the menu item and confirm.
[RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR]
YES
Press the display key to confirm the prompt.
a
Long press (back to idle status).
OK
Press display key to open menu.
either ...
Reply to an incoming message:
Reply
Confirm. You can reply to the message immediately
in the input field.
or ...
Answer "Yes":
s Answer: Yes
Select the menu item and confirm.
or ...
Answer "No":
s Answer: No
Select the menu item and confirm.
à
OK
OK
OK
66
SMS (text messages)
S1_SL1 / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / sms.fm / 02.10.2003
To forward a text message, open the menu with © and select the Send option. Now
send the message as described on page 59.
When replaying, attachments (e.g. logo, melody) are not sent.
However, the attachments are sent when forwarding an SMS. Forwarding an SMS with
attachments is not permitted by some service providers and thus will be rejected. Select
the Use Text function to forward the SMS without attachments. Confirm the prompt
New SMS will not contain picture/ melody. Proceed?
Calling back the text message sender
Open the SMS incoming message list (page 64). Now:
or ...
Edit the incoming message and return it:
s Use Text
Select the menu item and confirm.
~
Edit text.
... then
Press display key to open menu.
Send
Confirm and then send the message as described on
page 59.
or ...
s Save Entry
Select and confirm to store the entry.
OK
à
OK
OK
s
Select entry.
either ...
c
Press the talk key.
or ...
v
Open the menu.
Dial number
Select.
or ...
Dial using network provider's prefix:
v
Open the menu.
s NET list
Open the speed dial list (network provider list).
s
Select entry and confirm. The network provider's
prefix is put in front of the phone number.
... then
s
If MSN next call is set for the handset(page 113),
select the outgoing MSN and confirm.
OK
OK
OK
OK
67
SMS (text messages)
S1_SL1 / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / sms.fm / 02.10.2003
Callback begins at once. The phone number is deleted from the calls list and entered in
the last number redial list.
Copying a phone number from the SMS text into the directory
You telephone can "detect" phone numbers in a received SMS. It displays these by high-
lighting the string of digits (max. 32 characters). If the SMS text contains multiple
strings of digits, the first string of digits is highlighted. Scrolling the SMS text with s
will automatically highlight the next string of digits etc..
Precondition: You have opened a text message in the incoming message list to read
(page 65).
Adding a text message sender's telephone number to the directory
Precondition: You have opened the incoming message list and selected a message
(page 64).
i
To a PABX: The access code (outside line code) is automatically put before
the phone number (page 129).
Hello Sabine, here is my
new number
1234567890
The string of digits is
highlighted in black.
Press display key to open menu.
s Copy to Directory
Select the menu item and confirm.
s~
Go to the Name line and enter the name
(max. 16-digits) (for entering text, see page 154).
Press display key to open menu.
Save Entry
Confirm. The entry is stored.
a
Long press (back to idle status).
à
OK
à
OK
i
The phone number must be stored in the directory together with its area
code (prefix) so that it can also be used for sending text messages.
v
Press display key to open menu.
s Copy to dir.
Select the menu item and confirm.
s~
Go to the Name line and enter the name
(max. 16-digits) (for entering text, see page 154).
Press display key to open menu.
Save Entry
Confirm. The entry is stored.
a
Long press (back to idle status).
OK
à
OK
68
SMS (text messages)
S1_SL1 / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / sms.fm / 02.10.2003
Opening an attachment to an SMS
You can open an included attachment such as a logo. You can recognise an attachment
because it is placed between "less than" and "greater than" symbols (e.g., <Logo>). For
installation see page 69.
Precondition: You have opened a text message with attachment to read (page 65).
Using new ringer tones and logos for the handset
You can install other melodies to use in addition to the one provided with the handset
and a logo (graphic) as well. For a selection of melodies and logos, browse these web
pages on the Internet: www.my-siemens.com/ringtones
(melodies) and
www.my-siemens.com/logos
(logos). The Internet pages will tell you which data is
available in your country.
You can use the following formats:
"iMelody" for melodies
Large Picture (32*32) and Small Picture (16*16) for logos
After you have ordered melodies and/or logos to be installed, you will receive one or
more SMS (in the incoming message list, page 63) with the data.
You can install a max. of five new melodies. Each new melody replaces one of the ten
melodies available in the handset, at most, the melodies 6–10.
The logo replaces the display in idle status(page 13), which could cover the date, time
and the name. You can installonly one logo.
The logo will disappear briefly under the following conditions:
Pressing any key,
a battery warning tone, an appointment, reminder, or wake-up call is signalled,
or you take the handset out of the base/charger or you return it there.
i
You can create a special directory for SMS within your directory by putting
an star (*) before the names.
s Move the cursor to the line containing the attach-
ment.
Press display key to open menu.
s View Content
Select the menu item and confirm.
a
Long press (back to idle status).
à
OK
i
An SMS can contain multiple attachments.
i
There are charges for installing data. Ask your service provider.
69
SMS (text messages)
S1_SL1 / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / sms.fm / 02.10.2003
Installing a new ringer tone or a logo
Precondition: You have opened the incoming message list (page 64).
If you don't like the melody/logo, press
No after Install. The installation is cancelled.
Activating/deactivating a logo
s
Scroll to the desired text message as necessary.
Read textmessage
Confirm. You can see in the title or icons that data for
installing the melodies/logos you have chosen has
been sent. You will hear the new melody or see a pre-
view of the logo.
If you like the melody/logo:
[RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR]
Install
Press the display key to initiate the installation.
[RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR]
Yes
Press the display key to install the new melody or
logo.
r
For a new melody: chose the number of the old
ringer melody you want to replace with the new mel-
ody. You will hear the old ringer melody to be sure it
is the one you want.
Confirm.
OK
OK
i
After installation, the melodies and logos will remain in the SMS
incoming message list until you delete the SMS (page 65).
Other handsets registered to the same base can also have the melody
or logo installed.
For more information about opening a logo or melody contained as
an attachment in an SMS, see page 68.
v
Open the menu.
s Settings
Select the menu item and confirm.
s Screen Picture
Select and confirm, in order to activate or deactivate
the logo ( = on).
a
Long press (back to idle status).
OK
OK
i
The logo is not displayed:
during a call,
if the room monitor or Walk and Talk mode is activated,
if you just received an SMS or a message on the answering machine
(on the Gigaset with integrated answering machine),
or when the handset has been deregistered.
70
SMS (text messages)
S1_SL1 / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / sms.fm / 02.10.2003
Text messages to a PABX
You can only receive a text message when the Calling Line Identification is for-
warded to the extension of the PABX (CLIP).
The CLIP of the phone number of the SMS centre is evaluated in your telephone.
If your phone is connected to a PABX, you may have to prefix the number of the SMS
centre with an access code (this depends on your PABX). You can store the access code
in your base (page 129).
If in doubt, you can test your PABX by sending a text message to your own number and
putting the access code before the number of the SMS centre. If you do not receive the
message, send another one, this time without the access code.
When you send messages, your sender number may be sent without your extension
number. The recipient cannot reply to you directly in this case.
Errors when sending and receiving a text message
Errors when sending a text message
Text messages that cannot be sent are assigned an error status FD error: and are
placed in the incoming message list.
The following error codes are displayed:
You can display information about the cause of errors on the screen.
Precondition: You have opened the incoming message list (page 64).
Error code Description
E0 Calling Line Identification is permanently deactivated (page 24).
FE Error occurred during message transfer.
FD Connection to SMS centre failed.
Text messages cannot be sent or received if the number of an SMS cen-
tre is missing or incorrectly stored. Check that the number of the SMS
centre has been stored.
C3 Wrong recipient phone number
s
Scroll to the text message you were unable to send.
Press display key to open menu.
s Error status
Select the menu item and confirm. The cause of the
error appears in the display.
[ RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR]
BACK
Now press the display key to return to the incoming
message list.
à
OK
71
SMS (text messages)
S1_SL1 / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / sms.fm / 02.10.2003
Errors when receiving a text message
A message appears on the screen if your phone cannot receive any more text messages.
You cannot receive text messages under the following conditions:
call forwarding has been activated with All Calls,
the memory (incoming and outgoing message lists) is full.
Self-help with error messages
Error Message Possible cause Remedy
You cannot send messages. The "Calling Line Identification"
(CLIP) is permanently withheld.
Permit "Calling Line
Identification" (CLIP) again
(page 24).
Message transfer was inter-
rupted (e.g. by an incoming
call).
Re-send the message.
No number or an invalid
number is entered for the SMS
centre activated as the send
centre.
Enter phone number
(page 55).
You receive a message whose
text is incomplete.
Your phone's memory is full. Delete some old messages
(page 65).
The message is played back. Your terminal is stored in the
database of your SMS provider
as having no fixed network
SMS functionality, i.e. you are
no longer registered with the
provider.
Register the terminal (again)
for SMS reception.
Messages are only received
during the day.
If your SMS network provider's
database does not yet know
that your terminal supports
fixed network SMS functional-
ity, then it will only attempt to
deliver messages during the
day.
Register the terminal (again)
for SMS reception to get it re-
assigned in the database.
72
Making cost-effective calls
S1_SL1 / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / charges.fm / 02.10.2003
Making cost-effective calls
Sign up with a network provider who offers particularly low-cost call rates (call-by-call)
or view the call charges on the handset. You can use the speed dial list to manage your
call-by-call numbers.
Linking a call-by-call number with a phone number
This function can be used to put a network provider's prefix in front of the telephone
number ("linking").
Displaying the call duration
When you are called, the call duration is automatically displayed in the display.
When you call someone, the call duration is displayed only until the display of the call
charges is established.
When the call is ended, the call duration display stops. It remains for
approximately 3 seconds before the handset goes into idle status.
i
You manage entries in the speed dial list in the same way as entries in the
directory by opening the speed dial list with the C key instead of the
directory. You will find instructions on storing, editing and deleting
entries starting on page 36.
C
Open the network access list.
s Select the entry and press the display key.
Display Number
Confirm.
either ...
Enter the telephone number:
~
Enter the telephone number.
or ...
Select a number from the directory:
ss
Open the directory, select an entry and confirm.
... then
c
Press the talk key. The number is dialled.
à
OK
OK
73
Making cost-effective calls
S1_SL1 / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / charges.fm / 02.10.2003
Displaying call charges
You can display the charges if you have requested this from your network provider.
You can check the ongoing units /total charges and the charges of the last call made
(depending on setting, see page 75) on each Comfort handset. The total charges
includes the charges accrued by this handset. If you don't receive any rate information
from your network provider, the call duration is displayed.
Setting up the charge calculation
Ask your network provider if the call charges are transferred as a rate unit or as an
amount. Set the account type Units cent.off. or Costs cent.off. accordingly.
If you have selected Costs cent.off., but only units are transmitted by the network pro-
vider, after the call, it will automatically switch to Units cent.off..
By factory default, Units cent.off. is pre-set.
Setting the account type
The No rate pre-set will display units.
v
Open the menu.
s Call Charges
Select the menu item and confirm.
s Type of calcul.
Select the menu item and confirm.
either ...
Set Costs cent.off.:
s Costs cent.off.
Select the menu item and confirm (= activated).
or ...
Set Units cent.off.:
s Units cent.off.
Select the menu item and confirm (= activated).
OK
OK
OK
OK
i
If you have also entered a factor (see "Entering the price per unit" section
below), the call charges are multiplied by this. You can also use a factor if
you want to charge higher call charges, otherwise switch off factor
(charges should be increased by a factor of 2);.
74
Making cost-effective calls
S1_SL1 / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / charges.fm / 02.10.2003
Entering the price per unit
In order for the invoice type Units cent.off. to be able to calculate charges, you must
define the currency and the price per unit (by factory default: No rate). For this charge
calculation, Units cent.off. must be set (factory default).
v
Open the menu.
s Call Charges
Select the menu item and confirm.
s Type of calcul.
Select the menu item and confirm.
either ...
s Rate --.--
Select the factor with a comma, and confirm.
or ...
s Rate ----
Select the factor without a comma, and confirm.
... then
~
Enter the factor (4-digit), e.g. 0019 for 0.19 Euro
If necessary, enter the currency (factory default:
EUR)
Í
Press the display key to open the submenu.
s
Select the currency (â, $, £) and confirm.
Saving the factor:
Í
Press the display key to open the submenu.
Save entry
Confirm.
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
75
Making cost-effective calls
S1_SL1 / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / charges.fm / 02.10.2003
Displaying and deleting the cost overview
Depending on the setting, call or charge units for each internal party, for each set-up
MSN, and for the entire system are displayed:
Activating/deactivating the charges of the last call
You can display the total charges and the charges of the last call for this handset on the
handset.
By factory default, Last charge
is deactivated.
After activating the function, the call charges are displayed on the handset when you
press the talk key c. If the connection was not successful, the charges are displayed
after ending the call.
v
Open the menu.
s Call Charges
Select the menu item and confirm.
Cost overview
Confirm. The total amount for all internal parties is
displayed.
s
Scroll to the accounts of the individual internal par-
ties or set-up MSNs.
If necessary, delete the amount from the cost
overview:
Í
Press the display key to open the submenu.
s Delete amount
Select the menu item and confirm.
OK
OK
OK
i
Total and individual charges must be deleted separately. I.e., if you delete
the amount of an MSN, the individual charges of the handsets are
retained, and must be deleted separately.
v
Open the menu.
s Call Charges
Select the menu item and confirm.
s Last charge
Select the menu item and confirm (= activated).
a
Press end call key.
OK
OK
76
Operating more than one handset
S1_SL1 / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / several_handsets.fm / 02.10.2003
Operating more than one handset
Using a handset as a room monitor
With this function, a previously stored internal or external number is called when a set
noise level in the room is reached (the baby cries). When you answer the call you hear
the noise in the baby's room. The room monitor remains activated on the handset even
after you hang up.
The handset should be between 1 and 2 metres away from the baby. The microphone
must be directed towards the baby.
When the room monitor is activated, incoming calls to the handset which is near the
baby are indicated without a ring tone, they are just shown on the display. The display
and the key pad are not illuminated.
When entering an external phone number, check the following:
the handset must have the authorisation Unrestricted (page 92).
the number where the room monitor call is forwarded must not be blocked by an
activated answering machine.
W
Always check the settings of the room monitor before you leave
home, e.g. sensitivity and phone line.
i
If you redirect your room monitor to an external number, then you
should tell that number's owner.
A room monitor stops calling an external number after around
90 seconds. A room monitor stops calling an internal number
(handset) after around 3 minutes.
After the room monitor makes a call, the room monitor is blocked for
2 minutes.
The room monitor function severely curtails the handset's operating
time. If possible, place any handset that is in the vicinity of a baby in
the charger. This ensures that the battery does not discharge.
The room monitor function can also be used in Walk and Talk mode
(page 80).
77
Operating more than one handset
S1_SL1 / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / several_handsets.fm / 02.10.2003
Activating the room monitor function and entering the "call to" number for
the first time
Once the room monitor is activated, switch directly to the room monitor setting with v
(open menu).
Step 1: Open input field for room monitor:
v
Open the menu.
s Add. Features
Select the menu item and confirm.
Room Monitor
Confirm. The input field is opened.
Step 2: Activate room monitor:
r
Go to the line Room M.: On.
Step 3: Enter the destination number:
R[RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR]
s Edit
Jump to the line Call to: and press the display key.
The input field for the phone number is opened.
either ...
Enter an internal number as the destination
number:
[RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR]
INT
Press the display key.
R[RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR]
~ Save
Enter the internal phone number and press the dis-
play key. If the room monitor should call all regis-
tered handsets, then enter P instead of an internal
phone number (group call).
or ...
Enter an external number as the destination
number:
~ Enter the telephone number.
Press the display key.
Save Entry
Confirm. The entry is stored.
... then
Step 4: Set the sensitivity:
sr
If required, jump to the line Level: and set the sensi-
tivity for the noise level (Low or High).
[RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR]
Save
Press the display key. The room monitor function is
now activated.
OK
OK
à
OK
i
If you want to copy the external phone number from the directory,
press the bottom of the control key s in the input field for the phone
number (open directory). Select an entry with
s
and confirm
with .
If you enter an external number as the destination number, only the
last 4 digits will appear in the input field.
OK
78
Operating more than one handset
S1_SL1 / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / several_handsets.fm / 02.10.2003
Changing previously set external "call to" numbers
Precondition: You currently have the input field open for the room monitor (Step 1,
page 77).
Continue as is described on page 77 starting with step 4.
Editing a previously set internal destination number
The previously set internal phone number must first be deleted.
Precondition: You currently have the input field open for the room monitor (Step 1,
page 77).
Continue as is described on page 77 starting with step 4.
R[RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR ]
s Edit
Jump to the line Call to: and press the display key.
X Delete existing phone number.
either ...
Enter the external destination number:
~ Enter the new telephone number.
Press display key to open menu.
Save Entry
Confirm. The entry is stored.
or ...
Enter the internal destination number:
[ RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR]
INT
Press the display key.
R[RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR ]
~ Save
Enter the internal phone number or P (hold down
= group call) and press the display key.
à
OK
R[RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR ]
s Edit
Jump to the line Call to: and press the display key.
Deleting the internal phone number:
[ RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR]
Delete
Press the display key to delete the phone number.
either ...
Enter a new external phone number:
[ RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR]
Save
Press the display key to confirm the delete.
[ RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR]
Edit
Press the display key.
~ Enter the telephone number.
Press display key to open menu.
Save Entry
Confirm. The entry is stored.
or ...
Enter the new internal phone number:
R[RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR ]
~ Save
Enter the new internal phone number and press the
display key.
à
OK
79
Operating more than one handset
S1_SL1 / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / several_handsets.fm / 02.10.2003
Deactivating the room monitor
Press the OFF display key on the room monitor handset to deactivate the room monitor
function.
Deactivating the room monitor remotely
You can deactivate the room monitor remotely. Take the call from the room monitor and
press the
9 ; keys. The room monitor function will deactivate around 90 seconds
after the call ends. After this, the room monitor will make no further calls. The other
room monitor functions on the handset (e.g. no ringer) will remain activated until you
press the display key
Off on the handset that is in the baby's room.
Setting the Walk and Talk mode
The Walk and Talk function allows two handsets to communicate with each other no
matter how far they are from the base.
Example: You go on holiday and take two handsets with Walk and Talk functionality
with you. Set the Walk and Talk function on both handsets. You can now communicate
using the handsets.
Precondition:
Both handsets have been registered to the same base or
Both handsets are registered to different bases and both are set to Best Base
(page 21) or
One of the handsets is not registered to any base and the registered handset is set
to Best Base or
Neither handset is registered to a base.
i
To reactivate the room monitor function with the same telephone
number, you must turn on the activation again and save with
Save.
i
In Walk and Talk mode
The maximum range between handsets is 300 metres outdoors,
The handsets cannot be reached by incoming calls.
Handset operating times are severely curtailed.
80
Operating more than one handset
S1_SL1 / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / several_handsets.fm / 02.10.2003
Activating/deactivating the Walk and Talk mode
If, when you are in Walk and Talk mode, you press the talk key c or the handsfree
key d, the call will go to all the handsets that are in Walk and Talk mode. The connec-
tion is made with the first handset to answer the Walk and Talk call.
Using a handset in Walk and Talk mode as a room monitor
You can also use the room monitor function in Walk and Talk mode.
The room monitor will call all the handsets that are in the Walk and Talk mode.
Press the display key
Off on the room monitor handset to deactivate the room monitor.
The handset returns to the normal Walk and Talk mode.
v
Open the menu.
s Add. Features
Select the menu item and confirm.
s Walk and Talk
Select the menu item and confirm.
Deactivate the Walk and Talk mode:
[ RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR]
Off
Press the display key.
OK
OK
i
"Selecting the ringer" (page 104), "Activating/deactivating ringer or
advisory tones" (page 108) and "Activating/deactivating keypad lock"
(page 10) are available in Walk and Talk mode.
To open the menu, press the display key ©.
The Walk and Talk mode is retained even when you switch your
handset off and back on.
Press the display key.
s Room Monitor
Select the menu item and confirm.
sr Jump to the line Room M.: and activate the room
monitor.
sr
If necessary, scroll to the Level: line and set the sen-
sitivity for the noise level (Low or High).
[ RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR]
Save
Press the display key. The room monitor function is
now activated.
à
OK
W
Always check the settings of the room monitor before you leave
home, e.g. sensitivity and phone line.
81
Setting the answering machine
S1_SL1 / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / answeringm_config.fm / 02.10.2003
Setting the answering machine
Once you have connected your telephone your answering machine is ready for use.
Answering machine AM1 is set to be shown and activated. It displays all messages (on
all receive MSN's). AM1 can be played back and set from all handsets (factory default).
All phrases in the answering machine are in English.
As supplied, AM2 and AM3 are hidden (page 82) and are deactivated. To use them, they
must be shown and all shown answering machines must be assigned their own incom-
ing MSN.
You can configure AM1, AM2 and AM3 separately.
Assigning a receive MSN
You can assign one or more receive MSN's to each (shown) answering machine (AM1,
AM2, AM3). However, each MSN can only be assigned to one answering machine (only
one recording can be running at any one time).
Once an answering machine has been assigned to a receive MSN it can only be set and
operated via handsets/terminals to which the same receive MSN is assigned.
On the base:
CX150isdn SX150isdn CX253isdn SX255isdn SX353isdn
v
Open the menu.
s Base Settings
Select the menu item and confirm.
s Settings
Select the menu item and confirm.
s Setup user
Select the menu item and confirm.
Setup device
Confirm.
s
Select answering machine, INT 91: AM 91 for AM1,
INT 92: AM 92 for AM2 or INT 93: AM 93 for AM3.
v
Open the submenu.
s Receive MSN
Select the menu item and confirm.
s
Select the receive MSN and confirm, e.g. MSN:
Anna. Only the MSN's that are still not assigned to
an answering machine are offered.
Repeat this process for all incoming MSNs you want
to assign to the answering machine.
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
82
Setting the answering machine
S1_SL1 / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / answeringm_config.fm / 02.10.2003
Hiding/showing an answering machine
If you only want to operate one or two answering machines for your connection you can
remove the other answering machine(s) from all displays and menus. When supplied,
AM1 is set to show, AM2 and AM3 are hidden.
When hidden there must be no messages or memos remaining in the answering
machine:
If there are new messages/memos you have not yet played back on the answering
machine, you will be notified when you try to hide it. The answering machine will
continue to be shown.
If, when you wish to hide an answering machine, it still contains old messages/
memos that have already been played back, you will be asked if you wish to delete
the old recordings. The answering machine is only hidden if you confirm with
YES .
When an activated answering machine is hidden it is deactivated. When it is set to show
again, the answering machine returns to the status it had before it was hidden.
v
Open the menu.
s Base Settings
Select the menu item and confirm.
s Settings
Select the menu item and confirm.
s Setup user
Select the menu item and confirm.
Setup device
Confirm. The list of internal numbers is displayed.
s
Select the internal numbers for the answering
machine (INT 91, INT 92 or INT 93).
v
Open the submenu.
either ...
Hide answering machine:
s Hide AM?
Select the menu item and confirm.
or ...
Show answering machine:
s Show AM?
Select the menu item and confirm.
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
83
Setting the answering machine
S1_SL1 / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / answeringm_config.fm / 02.10.2003
Specifying the number of rings before the answering machine
starts
You can set when you want the answering machine to activate (after how many rings).
The options are: 1 ring tone, 2 ring tone, ..., 9 ring tone. Instead of a set number of
rings, you can also set the charge saving setting Automatic 2/4 (factory default). In this
setting the answering machine activates automatically:
after 2 rings if there are new messages;
after 4 rings if there are no new messages.
Precondition: You have selected an answering machine (page 137).
Activating/deactivating voice announcement of date and time
You can have the recording date and -time (time stamp) announced when each mes-
sage/memo is played back (activated when supplied).
Precondition: You have selected an answering machine (page 137).
Setting the recording time and recording quality
You can set the maximum length of a message and its recording quality. The recording
quality determines the total recording time of your answering machine.
On the High quality setting the total recording time is up to 12 min, on Long record-
ing (standard quality, generally adequate) up to 25 min. When the phone is supplied
the recording quality Long recording and the recording time Maximum are set.
s Settings
Select the menu item and confirm.
s No. of rings
Select the menu item and confirm.
s Automatic 2/4
Select the number of rings or Automatic 2/4 and
confirm (
= set).
OK
OK
OK
s Settings
Select the menu item and confirm.
Message/Memo
Confirm.
s Time stamp
Select the menu item and confirm (= activated).
OK
OK
OK
i
The recording of a call ends:
after a pause in speaking lasting more than 8 seconds;
at the end of a call; the caller terminates the connection;
after the set maximum recording time has expired, on Maximum
setting, when the memory is full.
84
Setting the answering machine
S1_SL1 / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / answeringm_config.fm / 02.10.2003
Setting the recording time
You can limit the maximum length of a message to 1 minute, 2 minutes or 3 minutes.
If you set the recording time to Maximum (factory setting), it is "unlimited" (until the
memory is full).
Precondition: You have selected an answering machine (page 137).
Setting recording quality
Precondition: You have selected an answering machine (page 137).
Activating/deactivating automatic pause
If automatic pause is activated the answering machine switches to pause mode after
playing back a message or memo. The next message is played back when you press the
display key Æ.
When the phone is supplied automatic pause is deactivated.
Precondition: You have selected an answering machine (page 137).
s Settings
Select the menu item and confirm.
Message/Memo
Confirm.
Message length
Confirm.
s Maximum
Select the recording time and confirm,
e.g. Maximum (
= activated).
OK
OK
OK
OK
i
When the recording duration is reached, the concluding announcement
is played automatically, if recorded. Then the connection is closed down.
The recording duration does not apply to memos.
s Settings
Select the menu item and confirm.
s AM quality
Select the menu item and confirm.
either ...
Set high quality:
High quality
Confirm.
or ...
Set long recording:
s Long recording
Select the menu item and confirm.
OK
OK
OK
OK
s Settings
Select the menu item and confirm.
s Automatic pause
Select the menu item and confirm (= activated).
OK
OK
85
Setting the answering machine
S1_SL1 / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / answeringm_config.fm / 02.10.2003
Locking the answering machine, defining AM PIN
You can protect your answering machine against unauthorised access. To do this, define
an AM PIN (Personal Identification Number) and activate the AM lock. The settings may
then only be changed and the messages played back after the PIN has been entered.
Entering, changing the AM PIN
When supplied, the AM PIN is preconfigured to 0000.
Precondition: You have selected an answering machine (page 137).
If you made a typing error when entering the AM PIN, you can delete your entry using
the W key and enter it again.
Activating/deactivating the AM lock
When the phone is supplied the answering machine lock is deactivated.
Precondition: You have selected an answering machine (page 137).
Setting the time control
You can set the answering machine so that it is activated or deactivated depending on
the time of day, as well as using different announcements depending on the time of
day.
You can define (for the 24-hour day) up to four time sections with different settings for
the answering machine. You must specify a start time for each time section. The start
time of the 2nd time section is the end time of the 1st time section, etc.. The start time
of the 1st time section is the end time of the last defined time section. For each section,
you can set if the answering machine should be activated/deactivated and which
announcement or announcement only should be used.
You specify the time control for work days (Monday to Friday). On the weekend (Satur-
day and/or Sunday), either the time control of the work days can be used, or one of the
announcements is activated for the entire day, or the answering machine is deactivated
for the entire day.
i
The answering machine can only be controlled remotely if you have
defined an AM PIN.
s Settings
Select the menu item and confirm.
s Change AM-PIN
Select the menu item and confirm.
~
Enter new AM PIN (up to 8 digits) and confirm.
~
Repeat the new AM PIN and confirm.
OK
OK
OK
OK
s Settings
Select the menu item and confirm.
s AM lock
Select the menu item and confirm (= lock set).
OK
OK
86
Setting the answering machine
S1_SL1 / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / answeringm_config.fm / 02.10.2003
Example:
The answering machine of your office should be deactivated during normal office hours
(8:00 to 5:00 p.m.). Only during the lunch hour (12:00 to 3:00 p.m.) should the answer-
ing machine be activated using announcement 1. After office hours (5:00 to 8:00 p.m.)
the answering machine should use announcement only. The following time sections
must be defined:
1. Start time 08:00, AM off
2. Start time 12:00, announcement 1
3. Start time 13:00, AM off
4. Start time 5:00 p.m., announce only
Defining start times and announcements for Monday to Friday
Precondition: You have selected an answering machine (page 137).
s Settings
Select the menu item and confirm.
s Time control
Select the menu item and confirm.
s Mon - Fri
Select the menu item and confirm. = at least one
start time is entered.
s
Select entry for the time section,
e.g., **:** Announcement 1, and confirm.
s Select ann.
Select the menu item and confirm.
s Announcement 1
Select Announcement 1, Announcement 2,
Announcem. only or AM off and confirm.
Press the display key.
s Start time
Select the menu item and confirm.
~
Enter the start time (4-digit). The start time specifies
the end of the previous time section.
Í
Press the display key to open the submenu.
Save entry
Confirm.
a
Long press (back to idle status).
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
Ý
OK
OK
87
Setting the answering machine
S1_SL1 / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / answeringm_config.fm / 02.10.2003
Setting time control for Saturday or Sunday
By factory default, the time control for work days is used – As for Mon-Fri.
Precondition: You have selected an answering machine (page 137).
Activating/deactivating time control
By factory default, time control is deactivated.
Precondition: You have at least set a start time (page 86) and have selected an answer-
ing machine (page 137).
s Settings
Select the menu item and confirm.
s Time control
Select the menu item and confirm.
either ...
s Saturday
Select the menu item and confirm.
or ...
s Sunday
Select the menu item and confirm.
... then
s As for Mon-Fri
Select As for Mon-Fri, Ann. 1 24h, Ann. 2 24h,
Ann. only 24h or AM off and confirm.
a
Long press (back to idle status).
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
s Settings
Select the menu item and confirm.
s Time control
Select the menu item and confirm (= activated).
either ...
Activate time control:
Activate?
Confirm.
or ...
Deactivate time control:
Deactivate?
Select the menu item and confirm.
OK
OK
OK
OK
88
Setting the answering machine
S1_SL1 / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / answeringm_config.fm / 02.10.2003
Activating/deactivating automatic listen in on the handset
You can set your answering machine to switch a handset assigned to it automatically to
listen in when a message is recorded.
When supplied, automatic listen in is deactivated.
Assigning a handset
Only one handset may be assigned to an answering machine. You can choose a handset
to which one of the answering machine's receive MSN's is assigned. Only terminals that
support handsfree talking are displayed. Auto pickup (page 89) must be activated.
Precondition: You have selected an answering machine (page 137).
Activating/deactivating listen in
You can only activate the listen in function if a handset has been assigned to the answer-
ing machine.
Precondition: You have selected an answering machine (page 137).
s Settings
Select the menu item and confirm.
s Aut. listen in
Select the menu item and confirm.
s Select HS
Select the menu item and confirm.
s
Select the handset and confirm,
e.g. type for Int13: Anna.
OK
OK
OK
OK
s Settings
Select the menu item and confirm.
s Aut. listen in
Select the menu item and confirm.
either ...
Activate listen in:
Activate?
Confirm.
or ...
Deactivate listen in:
Deactivate?
Confirm.
OK
OK
OK
OK
89
Setting the answering machine
S1_SL1 / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / answeringm_config.fm / 02.10.2003
Activating/deactivating automatic pickup
With automatic pickup you can take a call directly from the answering machine
(announcement or recording is running) on any handset or by lifting a receiver (tele-
phone with cord) providing the same receive MSN is assigned to all devices. You just
need to press the talk key c on the handset. The recording of the call will then stop.
As supplied, automatic pickup is activated.
Preconditions:
To pick up a call, the handset requires at least the authorisation Incoming only
(page 92).
The same receive MSN is assigned to both the answering machine and the handset/
terminal.
Activating/deactivating automatic notification via text message
When you receive new messages on the answering machine your telephone can auto-
matically send a text message to you on an external phone number (e.g., to a mobile
phone). A text message of this kind will read, for example:
New message: 01712205625 for office at 18:27 hrs on TH, 19.07. You have
1 new AM message.
Automatic text message notification is not available in all countries.
i
If automatic listen in is activated for a handset (page 88) then the call can
only be taken on this handset.
v
Open the menu.
s Base Settings
Select the menu item and confirm.
s Settings
Select the menu item and confirm.
s System settings
Select the menu item and confirm.
s AM auto. pickup
Select the menu item and confirm (= activated).
OK
OK
OK
OK
i
To send the SMS, an SMS send centre must be entered (page 55).
90
Setting the answering machine
S1_SL1 / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / answeringm_config.fm / 02.10.2003
Entering destination phone number for a text message
No destination number has been stored.
Precondition: You have selected an answering machine (page 137).
Changing or deleting the destination number for a text message
Precondition: You have selected an answering machine (page 137).
Activating/deactivating text message notification
You can only activate text message notification if a destination number is stored.
Precondition: You have selected an answering machine (page 137).
s Settings
Select the menu item and confirm.
s SMS notificat.
Select the menu item and confirm.
~
Enter destination number (up to 20 digits).
Í
Press the display key to open the submenu.
Save entry
Confirm.
a
Long press (back to idle status).
OK
OK
OK
s Settings
Select the menu item and confirm.
s SMS notificat.
Select the menu item and confirm.
either ...
Enter or change the destination number:
Change number
Confirm.
~
Change the destination number.
Í
Press the display key to open the submenu.
Save entry
Confirm.
or ...
Delete the destination number:
s Delete number
Select the menu item and confirm.
a
Long press (back to idle status).
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
s Settings
Select the menu item and confirm.
s SMS notificat.
Select the menu item and confirm.
v
Open the submenu.
either ...
Activate text message notification:
s Activate?
Select the menu item and confirm.
or ...
Deactivate text message notification:
s Deactivate?
Select the menu item and confirm.
OK
OK
OK
OK
91
Security settings
S1_SL1 / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / security.fm / 02.10.2003
Security settings
Changing the system PIN
You can protect the following settings against unauthorised access using the system PIN
(Personal Identification Number):
Call charge settings (v / Call Charges)
Internal and external call forwarding
(v Base Settings/ Ext. call forw. or Int. call forw.)
SMS service centres, party configurations, security, ISDN, and system settings
(v /
Base Settings / Settings)
Getting started wizard (v / Base Settings / Installation)
The system PIN will not work with the number 0000.
When supplied, the system PIN is preconfigured to 0000.
v
Open the menu.
s Base Settings
Select the menu item and confirm.
s Settings
Select the menu item and confirm.
~
Providing you choose a number other than 0000:
Enter PIN and confirm.
Security
Confirm.
s Change PIN
Select the menu item and confirm.
~
Enter new system PIN (up to 8 digits, 0 to 9) and con-
firm.
~
Repeat the new system PIN and confirm.
a
Long press (back to idle status).
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
!
Memorise the new system PIN! If you forget it, the device will require
technical intervention. If this happens, contact the Siemens Hotline
(page 152).
92
Security settings
S1_SL1 / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / security.fm / 02.10.2003
Defining authorisation
You can set different authorisations for all registered devices:
Unrestricted (set as factory default)
All devices can answer incoming calls and make external/internal outgoing calls.
Incoming only
The devices can only answer incoming calls. External calls cannot be made. Internal
calls can be made. Emergency numbers can be dialled.
Internal only
The devices can only make and answer internal calls. Emergency numbers can be
dialled.
Emergency numbers
By default, the country-specific emergency numbers are entered. These cannot be
edited or deleted. You may enter five emergency numbers of your own choice.
Setting up, editing, reading and deleting personal emergency numbers
v
Open the menu.
s Base Settings
Select the menu item and confirm.
s Settings
Select the menu item and confirm.
~
If required, enter the PIN and confirm.
Security
Confirm.
s Authorisation
Select the menu item and confirm.
s Internal 11
Select the internal number, e.g., Internal 11.
Í
Press the display key to open the submenu.
s Internal Only
Select authorisation, e.g., Internal Only, and con-
firm. The set authorisation is marked with a
.
a
Long press (back to idle status).
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
i
The emergency number can also be dialled by a handset with restricted
authorisation (e.g., Internal only).
v
Open the menu.
s Base Settings
Select the menu item and confirm.
s Settings
Select the menu item and confirm.
~
If required, enter the PIN and confirm.
Security
Confirm.
s Emergency nos.
Select. The emergency numbers list is opened.
s <no entry>
Select list entry, e.g., <no entry>.
OK
OK
OK
OK
93
Security settings
S1_SL1 / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / security.fm / 02.10.2003
Dialling emergency numbers
Precondition: The handset is blocked for external dialling (page 92).
If the dialled number does not match the emergency number entered, the call is
rejected with the display "Number is not emergency no.".
Í
Press the display key to open the submenu.
either ...
Set up or edit emergency number:
Change number
Confirm.
~
Enter new emergency number (up to 32 digits) or
edit existing emergency number. You can also copy
the number from the directory s or speed dial
list C.
Í
Press the display key to open the submenu.
Save entry
Confirm.
or ...
View emergency number:
s Display number
Select the menu item and confirm.
or ...
Delete emergency number:
s Delete number
Select the menu item and confirm.
a
Long press (back to idle status).
OK
OK
OK
OK
i
If your phone is connected to a PABX you may have to enter the applicable
access code (outside line code, e.g. 0 ; see page 129) before the emer-
gency number. This also applies to emergency numbers you have pre-set
and for which you need to re-enter as an alternative, for example, "0110"
and "0112".
c
Press the talk key.
[RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR]
EMERG.
Press the display key.
... then
Dialling the emergency number.
~
Enter the emergency number.
94
Date and Time
S1_SL1 / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / time_calendar.fm / 02.10.2003
Date and Time
Setting the date and the time
The first time you make a call on your phone, the date and time are transmitted by the
exchange.
You can choose between the 12 hour and the 24 hour display (factory setting) for the
time (a.m. = 1st half of the day; p.m. = 2nd half of the day).
In 12-hour mode you can scroll to the Time: line and then use the display key
am/pm to
switch between am and pm.
Setting the alarm clock
You can use your handset as an alarm clock.
Precondition: You have set the date and time.
Activating and setting the alarm clock
If you want to use your handset as an alarm clock, you have to set the alarm time,
choose a melody and activate the alarm clock.
v
Open the menu.
s Calendar/Clock
Select the menu item and confirm.
s Date/Time
Select the menu item and confirm.
Enter the date:
~
In the Date: line, enter the day/month/year.
Enter the time:
s~
Scroll to the Time: line and enter the hours/minutes
in a 4-digit format
.
Select display mode:
sr
Scroll to the Time Mode: line if you want to choose
between 12-hour and 24 hour mode.
[ RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR]
Save
Press the display key to save the entry.
OK
OK
v
Open the menu.
s Calendar/Clock
Select the menu item and confirm.
s Alarm Clock
Select the menu item and confirm.
The current setting is displayed.
OK
OK
95
Date and Time
S1_SL1 / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / time_calendar.fm / 02.10.2003
Switching the alarm clock off
The alarm clock is set to a particular time but you do not want it to ring.
Deactivating the wake-up call
A wake-up call with deactivated ringer melody is signalled on the handset. The display
shows Alarm Clock. Press the display key
Silence or any key to turn off the wake-up call.
The wake-up call will ring for 30 seconds if it is not answered sooner.
Switching the alarm clock on:
r
In the Room M.: line, select On.
Enter the time for wake-up call:
s~
Scroll to the Time: line and enter the hours/minutes
in a 4-digit format,
e.g., QM15 for "7:15 a.m.".
[RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR]
am/pm
When in 12-hour mode (page 94):
press the display key if you want to switch between
am and pm.
[RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR]
Save
Press the display key to save the entry.
a
Long press (back to idle status). You will see the ¼
icon.
i
The alarm clock will only ring if the handset is in the idle status. The
alarm clock will not ring if the room monitor function is activated, a
call is being made, or during automatic redial.
How to change the volume and melody is explained starting on
(page 105).
v
Open the menu.
s Calendar/Clock
Select the menu item and confirm.
s Alarm Clock
Select the menu item and confirm.
r
In the Room M.: line, select Off.
[RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR]
Save
Now press the display key to confirm the setting.
a
Long press (back to idle status).
OK
OK
96
Date and Time
S1_SL1 / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / time_calendar.fm / 02.10.2003
Setting appointments
You can use your handset to remind yourself of up to five appointments. To do this, you
have to save the times.
Activating and setting appointments
v
Open the menu.
s Calendar/Clock
Select the menu item and confirm.
Set Appoints.
Confirm.
s Appoint. 2
Select the appointment (1-5) and confirm.
Activating the appointment:
r
In the Room M.: line, select On.
Enter the date:
s~
Scroll to the Date: line and enter the day/month in a
4-digit format.
Example: For 20.05. enter 2QQ5.
Enter the time:
s~
Scroll to the Time: line and enter the hours/minutes
in a 4-digit format.
Example: For 9:05 enter QOQ5.
[ RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR]
am/pm
If in 12-hour mode (page 94): you can switch
between am and pm.
Specifying the appointment:
R[RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR ]
s Edit
Scroll to the Notes: line and press the display key.
~
Enter a name (max. 16 characters) (for entering let-
ters and characters see page 154) and confirm.
[ RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR]
Save
Press the display key to save the entry.
a
Long press (back to idle status). You will see
the icon ¼.
OK
OK
OK
OK
i
If you do not enter a name, the display will then show
"Appointment
".
How to change the volume and melody is explained starting on
page 105.
An appointment will be displayed only if the handset is in idle status.
It will not be displayed if the room monitor function is activated, a call
is being made, or during automatic redial.
97
Date and Time
S1_SL1 / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / time_calendar.fm / 02.10.2003
Cancelling an appointment
Switching off or answering an appointment alarm
An appointment is signalled with the selected ringer melody (page 105). In the display
you will see for example Appoint. 2. Press the display key
Silence or SMS, to switch off the
appointment alarm. The appointment call will ring for 30 seconds if it is not answered
sooner.
Displaying missed appointments, and anniversaries
If you do not accept an appointment or anniversary alarm when it rings (page 42), it will
be saved in a list.
v
Open the menu.
s Calendar/Clock
Select the menu item and confirm.
Set Appoints.
Confirm.
s Appoint. 2
Select the appointment (1-5) and confirm.
r
Select setting Off.
[RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR]
Save
Now press the display key to confirm the setting.
OK
OK
OK
i
When an appointment is displayed, you can open the SMS menu with the
SMS display key and write and send an SMS.
v
Open the menu.
s Calendar/Clock
Select the menu item and confirm.
s Missed Dates
Select the menu item and confirm. The list of
appointments/anniversaries will open.
s
Select appointment/anniversary.
This will display information about the appointment/
anniversary. A missed appointment is marked with
¼, a missed anniversary with .
either ...
Closing the list:
[RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR]
Go Back
Press the display key.
or ...
Deleting an appointment/anniversary:
either ...
Closing the list:
a
Press briefly.
or ...
Deleting an appointment/anniversary:
[RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR]
Delete
Press the display key.
... then
a
Long press (back to idle status).
OK
OK
98
Date and Time
S1_SL1 / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / time_calendar.fm / 02.10.2003
Night service
You can set up call forwarding for each incoming MSN which forwards all incoming calls
to an external phone number, to another internal party, or with a Gigaset with inte-
grated answering machine to an answering machine. This can be done daily for a spec-
ified period of time (Start time to End time) and on weekends (Sat/Sun all day) auto-
matically. For example, when a business might normally be closed (from 6:00 p.m. to
8:00 a.m.) all calls from the office could be forwarded to a private number.
When forwarding a call externally, only the MSN which is assigned to the handset as the
incoming MSN can be forwarded from the handset.
By factory default, Night service is deactivated. To switch on Night service, first the for-
ward destination must be defined.
i
If there is a new appointment/anniversary in the list, the display
shows
Appoint. You can also use this display key to open the list of
appointments/anniversaries. Once you have looked at all the new
appointments, Appoint will disappear from the display.
If the handset is deactivated at the time of an appointment/anniver-
sary, the appointment/anniversary will be saved in the list.
If the list doesn't contain any appointments/anniversaries, you can
close it with
Go Back .
i
If external call forwarding to an external phone number is activated using
Immediately (page 116) at the time when Night service is supposed to
start, the following applies:
The call is forwarded to another phone number: call forwarding
remains active until it is explicitly deactivated.
The call is forwarded to the same phone number: call forwarding is
deactivated until the end time of Night service is reached.
The same applies when call forwarding is set up during Night service.
99
Date and Time
S1_SL1 / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / time_calendar.fm / 02.10.2003
Setting the forward destination
Precondition: Night service is deactivated (page 101).
v
Open the menu.
s Base Settings
Select the menu item and confirm.
s Night service
Select the menu item and confirm ( = Night serv-
ice is activated). The list of MSNs is displayed.
s
Select and confirm MSN, e.g. MSN1: Anna.
s Forward. dest.
Select the menu item and confirm.
either ...
Set the external forward destination:
s External
Select the menu item and confirm.
~
Enter the external destination phone number.
or ...
Set the internal forward destination:
s Internal
Select the menu item and confirm.
s Internal 11
Select the internal number, e.g., Internal 11.
or ...
Select an answering machine (on Gigaset with
integrated answering machine):
s Answering mach.
Select the menu item and confirm.
s AM2
Select the answering machine you would like e.g.,
AM2 . The calls are forwarded to the selected answer-
ing machine.
... then
Í
Press the display key to open the submenu.
Save entry
Confirm.
a
Long press (back to idle status).
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
i
Night service, internal: If the internal party is not registered or cannot
be reached (e.g. handset deactivated), the call is not signalled and the
caller receives the busy signal.
Night service to an answering machine: Even if the answering
machine is deactivated, a call is signalled to the answering machine
and the answering machine takes the call after the set number of
rings (page 83).
100
Date and Time
S1_SL1 / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / time_calendar.fm / 02.10.2003
Entering the start and end time for Night service
By factory default, the Start time is pre-set to 20:00 or 8:00 pm, and 08:00 or 8:00 am
for the
End time.
Activating/deactivating Saturday/Sunday all day Night service:
If Sat/Sun all day is set, then Night service is active between the indicated start and
end times from M-F, and all day on weekends. If Sat/Sun all day
is deactivated, then
calls are forwarded on the weekend between the set start and end time.
By factory default, Sat/Sun all day is activated.
v
Open the menu.
s Base Settings
Select the menu item and confirm.
s Night service
Select the menu item and confirm.
s
Select and confirm MSN, e.g. MSN1: Anna.
either ...
Enter the start time:
s Start time
Select the menu item and confirm.
~
Enter the start time (4-digit).
or ...
Enter the end time:
s End time
Select the menu item and confirm.
~
Enter the end time (4-digit).
... then
Í
Press the display key to open the submenu.
Save entry
Confirm.
a
Long press (back to idle status).
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
v
Open the menu.
s Base Settings
Select the menu item and confirm.
s Night service
Select the menu item and confirm.
s
Select and confirm MSN, e.g. MSN1: Anna.
s Sat/Sun all day
Select the menu item and confirm ( = On).
a
Long press (back to idle status).
OK
OK
OK
OK
101
Date and Time
S1_SL1 / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / time_calendar.fm / 02.10.2003
Activating/deactivating Night service
You can only activate Night service when you have entered a forward destination for the
incoming MSN and when there is no forward destination currently activated for it.
If Night service is activated for an MSN, Night service is marked with .
v
Open the menu.
s Base Settings
Select the menu item and confirm.
s Night service
Select the menu item and confirm.
s
Select and confirm MSN, e.g. MSN1: Anna.
either ...
Activating Night service:
s Activate?
Select the menu item and confirm.
or ...
Deactivating Night service:
s Deactivate?
Select the menu item and confirm.
a
Long press (back to idle status).
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
102
Individual handset settings
S1_SL1 / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / settings_hs.fm / 02.10.2003
Individual handset settings
Your handset has default settings. You can change these settings individually.
Changing the display language
You can view the display texts in different languages.
Activating/deactivating Auto Answer
If you have activated this function, when you get a call you can simply lift the handset
out of its base or the charger without having to press the Talk key c (the default set-
ting is on).
v
Open the menu.
s Settings
Select the menu item and confirm.
s Language
Select the menu item and confirm. The current lan-
guage is checked (the default setting is English).
s Select a language and confirm.
a
Long press (back to idle status).
OK
OK
OK
i
If you set the wrong language in error, press v M 2.
Now select the correct language with s and confirm with .
When you change the display language the character set can change
too, e.g. for Russian.
OK
v
Open the menu.
s Settings
Select the menu item and confirm.
Auto Answer
Confirm to deactivate or activate the function
( = On).
a
Long press (back to idle status).
OK
OK
103
Individual handset settings
S1_SL1 / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / settings_hs.fm / 02.10.2003
Changing the name of the base
The names "Base 1" to "Base 4" are assigned automatically. You can change the name of
your base.
Adjusting the loudspeaker volume
You can adjust the handsfree volume to five levels and the earpiece volume to three
levels – even while an external call is in progress.
Ringer echo
In certain situations, the sound quality could be less than what you are used to. You can
enhance the sound quality of the long ringer melodies (4–10).
i
The name of the base is handset-specific, i.e. the base receives the name
which was assigned by the handset. The same base can have different
name on different handsets.
v
Open the menu.
s Settings
Select the menu item and confirm.
s Select Base
Select the menu item and confirm.
R[RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR]
s Edit
Select the base and press the display key.
~ Enter a new name (up to 16-characters)
(for inputting text see page 154).
[RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR]
Save
Now press the display key to confirm the setting.
OK
OK
v
Open the menu.
s Audio Settings
Select the menu item and confirm.
Handset Volume
Confirm. You hear the current volume setting for
handsfree talking.
r
Set the volume for handsfree talking (1-5) in the
input field.
sr Scroll one line lower and set the earpiece volume
(1–3).
[RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR]
Save
Press the display key to save the setting.
a
Long press (back to idle status).
OK
OK
v
Open the menu.
s Audio Settings
Select the menu item and confirm.
Ringer Echo
Confirm ( = activated).
a
Long press (back to idle status).
OK
OK
104
Individual handset settings
S1_SL1 / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / settings_hs.fm / 02.10.2003
Changing the ringer tone
A range of options is available:
Gigaset S1:
Six volume levels:
Five volume levels (1–5; e.g. volume level 2 = ˆ),
"Crescendo" call (6; the volume increases with each ring = ).
Ten melodies (1–10; melodies 1–3 are the "classic ringer tones").
Gigaset SL1:
Six volume levels:
Five volume levels (1–5; e.g. volume level 2 = ˆ),
"Crescendo" call (6; the volume increases with each ring = ).
Max. 26 melodies:
Max. 16 polyphonic melodies (polyphonic melodies must have first been saved
using Sound Manager,page 107)
Ten melodies (1–10; melodies 1–3 are the "classic ringer tones").
Settings for external calls, time control and name announcement
Set the volume and melody depending on the type of ringing. You can also set the vol-
ume of a call to be dependent on the time it is received (e.g., nights quieter as during
the day).
i
Setting the ringer melody on the handset is only effective, if the external
ringer MT is set instead of a ringer melody(page 114) for the incoming
MSN of the handset.
v
Open the menu.
s Audio Settings
Select the menu item and confirm.
s Ringer Settings
Select the menu item and confirm.
Setting the melody and volume:
Ext. Calls
Confirm. You hear the current volume.
r Select the volume in the input field.
If necessary, activate time control:
[ RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR]
Time C.
Press the display key.
r
In the Time ctrl: line, select On.
s~
Scroll to the From: line and enter the beginning of
the time period (4-digit format).
OK
OK
OK
On or off status
Ringer volume
Period of time for "On"
Time ctrl:
On
g
From: 20:00
Until: 08:00
Ö‡
Save
105
Individual handset settings
S1_SL1 / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / settings_hs.fm / 02.10.2003
Individual settings for internal calls, wake-up and appointments
You can set the ringer individually for an internal call, wake-up call, or appointment. You
can also set all calls the same.
s~
Scroll to the Until: line and enter the end of the time
period (4-digit format).
s~ Scroll to the next line and set the ringer volume for
this time period.
[RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR]
Save
Press the display key to save the time control.
[RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR]
Save
Now press the display key to confirm the setting.
... then
a
Long press (back to idle status).
v
Open the menu.
s Audio Settings
Select the menu item and confirm.
s Ringer Settings
Select the menu item and confirm.
either ...
For internal calls:
s Internal Calls
Select the menu item and confirm.
or ...
For set appointments (page 96):
s Appointments
Select the menu item and confirm.
or ...
For a pre-set wake-up call (page 94):
s Alarm
Select the menu item and confirm.
or ...
To set all functions to ring the same:
s All
Select the menu item and confirm.
... then
r Set the volume (1-6) in the input field.
sr Scroll to the next line and select the ringer melody.
The current melody rings, the digits at the end of the
line indicate the current setting. Enter the melody
(1-10).
[RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR]
Save
Press the display key to save the setting.
[RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR]
Yes
For the setting All press the display key again to con-
firm the prompt.
... then
a
Long press (back to idle status).
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
106
Individual handset settings
S1_SL1 / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / settings_hs.fm / 02.10.2003
Activating/deactivating the ringer
All handsets ring when there is an incoming call. You can cancel the ringer on your
handset before you answer a call or when the handset is in idle status; the ringer can be
cancelled permanently or just for the current call.
Cancelling the ringer permanently:
To cancel the ringer in idle status, press the P key and hold until the
Ú icon appears.
The ringer cannot be re-activated while an external call is in progress.
Deactivating the ringer for the current call:
Activating/deactivating the alert tone
When you activate and deactivate the ringer you can activate an alert tone. When you
get a call, you will hear a short tone (beep) instead of the ring tone.
P
Press the star key and hold until the ringer cannot be
heard any longer. The ringer is now permanently
cancelled. The Ú icon appears in the display.
Re-activating the ringer:
P
Press the star key and hold.
[ RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR]
Silence
Press the display key.
P
Press and hold the star key and within 3 seconds:
[ RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR]
Beep on
Press the display key. A call is now signalled by one
brief alert tone. You will now see º in the display.
Deactivating the alert tone:
P
Press the star key and hold. The ringer is activated
again.
107
Individual handset settings
S1_SL1 / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / settings_hs.fm / 02.10.2003
Sound Manager
You can use Sound Manager to record polyphonic melodies (max. length 4 sec.) or
record using a data cable (max. 16 kb) (page 157). A maximum of 16 melodies can be
stored.
Play the melody, edit the entry.
On the MT:
SL1
v
Open the menu.
s Audio Settings
Select the menu item and confirm.
s Sound Manager
Select the menu item and confirm.
<New Sound>
Select the menu item and confirm.
[RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR]
End
Press the display key or wait 4 seconds to end the
recording.
The recording is repeated automatically for you to
check.
[RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR]
Save
Press the display key to save the recording.
Edit Entry
Enter name of the melody.
[RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR]
Save
Save name.
a
Long press (back to idle status).
OK
OK
OK
v
Open the menu.
s Audio Settings
Select the menu item and confirm.
s Sound Manager
Select the menu item and confirm.
s
Select a melody.
either ...
Play the melody:
[RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR]
Play
Press the display key.
or ...
Changing an entry:
Press the display key.
s
Scroll to the Volume line to change the volume.
s
Scroll to the Edit Entry line to change the name.
s
Scroll to the View Entry line to display the file
names.
s
Scroll to the Delete Entry line to delete the entry.
... then
a
Long press (back to idle status).
OK
OK
à
108
Individual handset settings
S1_SL1 / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / settings_hs.fm / 02.10.2003
Vibration alarm
Incoming calls and other messages are signalled by a vibration. This setting is independ-
ent of ringer settings.
Activating/deactivating advisory tones
Your handset uses 'advisory tones' to tell you about different activities and statuses. The
following advisory tones can be activated and deactivated individually (the default set-
ting is on).
Key click: Every key press is confirmed
Acknowledge tones:
Confirmation tone (rising tone sequence): at the end of an input/setting, when
the handset is placed in the base and when a text message or a new entry arrives
in the calls list or answering machine list (on Gigaset with integrated answering
machine)
Error tone (a descending tone sequence): with incorrect inputs
End of menu tone: when scrolling at the end of a menu
Battery tone: The batteries must be charged.
On the MT:
SL1
v
Open the menu.
s Audio Settings
Select the menu item and confirm.
Silent Alert
Select the menu item and confirm ( = activated).
a
Long press (back to idle status).
OK
OK
v
Open the menu.
s Audio Settings
Select the menu item and confirm.
s Advisory Tones
Select the menu item and confirm.
r
In the Key Tones: line, activate or deactivate the key
click.
sr Scroll to the Confirm.: line to activate or deactivate
the confirmation tones.
sr Scroll to the Battery: line and choose On, Off, or
in Verb.. The battery warning tone is activated or
deactivated or only rings during a call.
[ RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR]
Save
Press the display key to save the setting.
a
Long press (back to idle status).
OK
OK
109
Individual handset settings
S1_SL1 / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / settings_hs.fm / 02.10.2003
Resetting a handset to the factory setting
You can reset individual settings and changes you have made. This will not affect entries
in the directory, the calls list, the email directory or the speed dial list, the handset's reg-
istration to the base and logos and melodies that you have loaded.
Press a to cancel the reset.
Factory settings of the handset
v
Open the menu.
s Settings
Select the menu item and confirm.
s Reset Handset
Select the menu item and confirm.
[RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR]
Yes
Press the display key to confirm the prompt.
a
Long press (back to idle status).
OK
OK
Base selection "Best base" page 21
Earpiece volume 1 page 103
Handsfree volume 3 page 103
Ringer volume 5 page 104
Time control for ringer Deactivated page 104
Ringer melody 1 page 104
Name announcement Deactivated page 104
Auto answer Activated page 102
Battery tone/Key click/Confirmation tone Activated page 108
Display language country specific page 102
Character set standard page 154
Alarm clock/appointment Deactivated page 94/
page 96
Appointment name deleted page 96
Logo Deactivated page 68
Last number redial list empty page 48
Room monitor/room monitor sensitivity Deactivated/high page 77
110
System settings
S1_SL1 / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / settings_bs.fm / 02.10.2003
System settings
The abbreviations in brackets after the titles indicate the ISDN service concerned. Some
services may only be used if they have been authorised by the network provider (there
may be an extra charge).
All the settings for the base are made with a registered S 1 handset.
Changing the names for internal users
By factory default, all internal numbers are given the names Int.11 , Int.12 , etc., accord-
ing to their numbering. You can change these entries to suit your individual needs.
v
Open the menu.
s Base Settings
Select the menu item and confirm.
s Settings
Select the menu item and confirm.
~
Enter system PIN if required (page 91).
s Setup user
Select the menu item and confirm.
s Setup device
Select the menu item and confirm.
s Int.11
Select internal number, e.g. Int.11 .
v
Open the submenu.
s Name
Select the menu item and confirm.
~ Í
Change the name and open the menu.
s Save entry
Select the menu item and confirm. The name is now
shown in the internal list, including when an internal
call is made from this internal number.
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
i
Since names are saved in the base station, another name can be allocated
to a handset when registering to a different base. This makes it possible
to recognise which base the handset is currently connected to.
111
System settings
S1_SL1 / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / settings_bs.fm / 02.10.2003
Setting up/deleting ISDN phone numbers (MSN)
Your ISDN connection offers you 2 simultaneously usable telephone lines (B channels).
You can establish up to 10 separate phone numbers (MSN) on your base station.
Setting up an ISDN phone number (MSN) / changing the name
If you haven’t saved all the phone numbers with the Getting started wizard (page 14),
you can enter them now. All phone numbers that are stored retrospectively are
automatically assigned to all registered handsets.
Each newly set up phone number automatically gets its own ringer melody, which can
be changed to suit your individual requirements (page 114).
v
Open the menu.
s Base Settings
Select the menu item and confirm.
s Settings
Select the menu item and confirm.
~
Enter system PIN if required (page 91).
s ISDN settings
Select the menu item and confirm.
s Set up MSN
Select the menu item and confirm.
s
Select MSN, e.g. MSN1: Anna.
v
Open the submenu.
s Edit entry
Select the menu item and confirm.
~
Enter a name (up to 16 characters – optional) (for
inputting text see page 154).
s~
Scroll to the line <Number> and enter the phone
number.
v
Open the submenu.
s Save entry
Select the menu item and confirm.
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
112
System settings
S1_SL1 / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / settings_bs.fm / 02.10.2003
Cancelling ISDN phone numbers (MSN)
Assigning a phone number (MSN)
You can assign certain individual phone numbers (MSN) to registered terminals. When
doing this determine
which phone number makes a registered terminal ring (receive MSN),
under which number an internal user dials (send MSN).
Assigning a receive MSN
As supplied, a newly registered handset will ring whenever a phone number you have
set up is dialled.
If you want to assign the handset certain specific receive MSN's:
v
Open the menu.
s Base Settings
Select the menu item and confirm.
s Settings
Select the menu item and confirm.
~
Enter system PIN if required (page 91).
s ISDN settings
Select the menu item and confirm.
s Set up MSN
Select the menu item and confirm.
s
Select MSN, e.g. MSN1: Anna.
v
Open the submenu.
s Delete entry
Select the menu item and confirm.
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
i
If the MSN you have cancelled was the send MSN (page 113) of an inter-
nal user then a new send MSN (the MSN with the lowest ranked number)
will automatically be assigned to this internal user.
v
Open the menu.
s Base Settings
Select the menu item and confirm.
s Settings
Select the menu item and confirm.
~
Enter system PIN if required (page 91).
s Setup user
Select the menu item and confirm.
s Setup device
Select the menu item and confirm.
s Int.11
Select internal number for the handset, e.g. Int.11 .
v
Open the submenu.
s Receive MSN
Select the menu item and confirm.
s
Select and confirm MSN, e.g. MSN1: Anna.
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
113
System settings
S1_SL1 / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / settings_bs.fm / 02.10.2003
Assigning a send MSN
When the phone is supplied no send MSN has been entered. The telephone exchange
adds the outgoing MSN.
You can define one outgoing MSN per internal party. This MSN is shown to the person
you call and the call is also charged to this MSN.
Setting up the list of outgoing MSN for the next call
You can set up your handset so that after pressing the Talk key c or the handsfree key
d a list of all available outgoing MSNs is displayed.
By factory default, MSN next call is not activated.
v
Open the menu.
s Base Settings
Select the menu item and confirm.
s Settings
Select the menu item and confirm.
~
Enter system PIN if required (page 91).
s Setup user
Select the menu item and confirm.
s Setup device
Select the menu item and confirm.
s Int.11
Select internal number, e.g. Int.11 .
v
Open the submenu.
s Send MSN
Select the menu item and confirm.
s
Select and confirm MSN, e.g. MSN1: Anna.
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
v
Open the menu.
s Base Settings
Select the menu item and confirm.
s Settings
Select the menu item and confirm.
~
Enter system PIN if required (page 91).
s Setup user
Select the menu item and confirm.
s Setup device
Select the menu item and confirm. The list of
entered internal numbers is displayed.
s Int.11
Select internal number and confirm, e.g. Int.11 .
Í
Press the display key to open the submenu.
MSN next call
Select the menu item and confirm (= activated).
a
Hold down (return to idle status).
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
114
System settings
S1_SL1 / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / settings_bs.fm / 02.10.2003
Setting up a busy signal when the MSN is being used (Busy on Busy)
This setting allows callers to get a busy signal immediately when an external call is
already being made on this MSN, independent of the setting Call waiting.
By factory default, the function is not set.
Assigning an MSN a ringer melody
Each incoming MSN is assigned a ringer melody when setting up. You can change this
assignment for each incoming MSN individually. For a receive MSN you can:
Select one of the available ringer melodies. This means that all handsets will use this
ringer melody to indicate an incoming call to a receive MSN.
Set External ringer MT. Then the handsets assigned to the receive MSN will use the
ringer melody set on the handset for external calls(page 104).
v
Open the menu.
s Base Settings
Select the menu item and confirm.
s Settings
Select the menu item and confirm.
~
Enter system PIN if required (page 91).
s ISDN settings
Select the menu item and confirm.
s Busy on busy
Select the menu item and confirm (= set).
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
v
Open the menu.
s Base Settings
Select the menu item and confirm.
s Settings
Select the menu item and confirm.
~
Enter system PIN if required (page 91).
s ISDN settings
Select the menu item and confirm.
s Set up MSN
Select the menu item and confirm.
s
Select MSN, e.g. MSN1: Anna.
v
Open the submenu.
r Ringer Melody: 5
Select melody and confirm, e.g. Ringer Melody: 5
(
= activated).
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
115
System settings
S1_SL1 / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / settings_bs.fm / 02.10.2003
Setting up rejecting for the entire MSN group
You can reject an external call not only on your handset, but for all members of an MSN
group. Pressing
REJECT will give the caller a busy signal instead of a ringing tone. The
entire group will no longer be called. Someone using call waiting can also be rejected
during a call. The call is added to the calls list.
By factory default, the function is not activated.
Forwarding calls
Forwarding internal calls
By factory default, internal call forwarding is deactivated.
Setting up the forwarding destination
v
Open the menu.
s Base Settings
Select the menu item and confirm.
s Settings
Select the menu item and confirm.
~
Enter system PIN if required (page 91).
s ISDN settings
Select the menu item and confirm.
s Reject all
Select the menu item and confirm. (= activated)
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
i
Only one forward destination can be selected for internal call
forwarding.
Only one single-stage call forwarding is supported: If you are
forwarding to a party who has activated internal call forwarding
himself, this will no longer work. The forwarded call will ring at the
party you forwarded it to.
v
Open the menu.
s Base Settings
Select the menu item and confirm.
s Forward. base
Select the menu item and confirm.
~
Enter system PIN if required (page 91).
s Forward. dest.
Select the menu item and confirm.
s Int.11
Select internal number, e.g. . Int.11 (= On).
OK
OK
OK
OK
116
System settings
S1_SL1 / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / settings_bs.fm / 02.10.2003
Activating/deactivating internal call forwarding
Precondition: Internal call forwarding can only be activated if the forward destination
is set up.
Defining the number of rings
When ring delay is used, the number of rings before the call is forwarded must be
defined. Between 0 (= immediate call forwarding) and 9 rings can be set. There are
5 seconds between rings.
The factory default setting is 0 rings (= immediate call forwarding).
Forwarding external calls – CF (Call Forwarding)
For each receive MSN you can store a destination number for each of the following con-
ditions:
Immediately – On busy – On no reply
Set up external call transfers are entered in a list. Active call transfers are identified in
this list.
When the phone is supplied external call forwarding is not set.
v
Open the menu.
s Base Settings
Select the menu item and confirm.
s Int. call forw.
Select the menu item and confirm.
~
Enter system PIN if required (page 91).
either ...
Activate:
Activate?
Confirm.
or ...
Deactivate:
Deactivate?
Select the menu item and confirm.
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
v
Open the menu.
s Base Settings
Select the menu item and confirm.
s Forward. base
Select the menu item and confirm.
~
Enter system PIN if required (page 91).
s No. of rings
Select the menu item and confirm.
~
Enter the number of rings and confirm.
a
Hold down (return to idle status).
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
i
If call forwarding is sent to the base station (internal) (page 119), the
condition On busy is not available.
All three conditions can be activated at the same time.
If Night service was set up for an incoming MSN (page 98), external
call forwarding cannot be set up or changed for this incoming MSN.
117
System settings
S1_SL1 / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / settings_bs.fm / 02.10.2003
Setting up the forwarding destination
Activating/deactivating external call forwarding
v
Open the menu.
s Base Settings
Select the menu item and confirm.
s Ext. call forw.
Select the menu item and confirm.
~
Enter system PIN if required (page 91). The list of set
up call transfers is displayed.
Í
Press the display key to open the menu.
s New entry
Select the menu item and confirm.
s
Select the receive MSN and confirm, e.g. MSN1:
Anna.
s Immediately
Select the condition and confirm, e.g. Immediately.
You will be notified if you have selected an MSN for
which another internal user has already set up call
forwarding. You can either return using BACK to
select another setting or use
NEXT to continue.
~ Í
Enter number and open the menu.
s Save entry
Select the menu item and confirm.
[RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR]
YES
Confirm to set up call forwarding.
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
v
Open the menu.
s Base Settings
Select the menu item and confirm.
s Ext. call forw.
Select the menu item and confirm.
~
Enter system PIN if required (page 91).
s
Select call forwarding, e.g. MSN1 to 22222.
v
Open the submenu.
either ...
Activate:
s Activate?
Select the menu item and confirm.
or ...
Deactivate:
s Deactivate?
Select the menu item and confirm.
You will be notified if you have selected call forward-
ing that another internal user has already set up. You
can either return using BACK to select another set-
ting or use NEXT to continue.
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
118
System settings
S1_SL1 / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / settings_bs.fm / 02.10.2003
Editing an entry
Deleting external call forwarding
v
Open the menu.
s Base Settings
Select the menu item and confirm.
s Ext. call forw.
Select the menu item and confirm.
~
Enter system PIN if required (page 91).
s
Select call forwarding, e.g. MSN1 to 22222.
v
Open the submenu.
s Edit entry
Select the menu item and confirm.
You will be notified if you have selected call forward-
ing that another internal user has already set up. You
can either return using BACK to select another set-
ting or use NEXT to continue.
~ Í
Enter the new number and open the menu.
s Save entry
Select the menu item and confirm.
[ RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR]
YES
Confirm to set up call forwarding.
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
v
Open the menu.
s Base Settings
Select the menu item and confirm.
s Ext. call forw.
Select the menu item and confirm.
~
Enter system PIN if required (page 91).
s
Select call forwarding, e.g. MSN1 to 22222.
v
Open the submenu.
s Delete entry
Select the menu item and confirm.
You will be notified if you have selected call forward-
ing that another internal user has already set up. You
can either return using BACK to select another set-
ting or use NEXT to continue.
OK
OK
OK
OK
119
System settings
S1_SL1 / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / settings_bs.fm / 02.10.2003
Switching external call forwarding internal/external
Your ISDN connection offers you 2 simultaneously usable telephone lines (B channels).
You can set up your telephone so that:
the call forwarding is done at the telephone exchange (external), so that your sec-
ond ISDN line remains free.
the call forwarding is done in your base (internal), so that both ISDN lines are used.
Any resulting connection charges will be charged to you.
By factory default, Forward. netw. is activated.
Pre-assigning the call deflection destination – CD (Call Deflection)
The call forwarding destination for incoming calls are pre-set here. This "call to" number
is offered as a pre-set when forwarding manually (page 32).
v
Open the menu.
s Base Settings
Select the menu item and confirm.
s Settings
Select the menu item and confirm.
~
Enter system PIN if required (page 91).
s ISDN settings
Select the menu item and confirm.
either ...
s Forward. base
Select the menu item and confirm (= set).
or ...
s Forward. netw.
Select the menu item and confirm (= set).
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
v
Open the menu.
s Base Settings
Select the menu item and confirm.
s Settings
Select the menu item and confirm.
~
Enter system PIN if required (page 91).
s ISDN settings
Select the menu item and confirm.
s Forward. dest.
Select the menu item and confirm.
~ Í
Enter "call to" number and confirm.
s Save entry
Select the menu item and confirm.
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
120
System settings
S1_SL1 / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / settings_bs.fm / 02.10.2003
Setting up automatic call forwarding when not reaching a handset
If your handset is out of the radio range of the base station, the battery is flat, or the
handset has been deactivated, a call will be forwarded to one of the external phone
numbers you specify (e.g. a mobile phone).
Preconditions:
You have exclusively assigned the handset its own incoming MSN (page 112). This
MSN must not be assigned as the incoming MSN for any other device, not even the
ISDN bus!
Call forwarding can only be set up for one incoming MSN on the base.
By factory default, automatic call forwarding is not set up.
The line set up for automatic call forwarding is marked in the list of set-up call forward-
ing lines.
Setting up an internal group call group
You can make a group call from any handset to all other registered internal party
(page 23).
In the basic settings, all registered parties of device type "telephone" or "neutral" are set
up in the group call group.
v
Open the menu.
s Base Settings
Select the menu item and confirm.
s Settings
Select the menu item and confirm.
~
Enter system PIN if required (page 91).
s ISDN settings
Select the menu item and confirm.
s Auto.forwarding
Select the menu item and confirm.
s
Select call fowarding line, e.g. MSN1: Anna.
v
Open the submenu.
~ Í
Enter "call to" number and confirm.
s Save entry
Select the menu item and confirm. Automatic call
forwarding is activated (
= on).
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
v
Open the menu.
s Base Settings
Select the menu item and confirm.
s Settings
Select the menu item and confirm.
~
Enter system PIN if required (page 91).
s Setup user
Select the menu item and confirm.
s Setup device
Confirm.
s Int.11
Select internal number, e.g. Int.11 .
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
121
System settings
S1_SL1 / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / settings_bs.fm / 02.10.2003
Setting up ring delay
Ring delay can be used to individually set up a party per incoming MSN to ring later. Dur-
ing this ring delay time, the handset can take the call using the function "Accept?" with-
out hearing a ring. The ring delay time is given in rings. There are 5 seconds between
rings.
The factory default setting is 0 rings (= not activated).
Take into account the reaction time of the answering machine when making this setting
(factory default: Automatic 2/4). If the set ring delay is longer than the setting for an
active answering machine, the phone will not ring, because the answering machine will
answer it first.
For each programmed MSN, at least one party must be able to be called immediately.
Therefore, a party set up for ring delay will be called immediately if he is the only one
on this incoming MSN, or no one else can be reached on this incoming MSN.
Picking up a call during ring delay see page 25.
v
Open the submenu.
s Hunt group
Select the menu item and confirm (= activated).
OK
v
Open the menu.
s Base Settings
Select the menu item and confirm.
s Settings
Select the menu item and confirm.
~
Enter system PIN if required (page 91).
s Setup user
Select the menu item and confirm.
s Setup device
Select the menu item and confirm.
s Int.11
Select internal number, e.g. Int.11 .
v
Open the submenu.
s Ring delay
Select the menu item and confirm.
s
Select incoming MSN, e.g. MSN11: Anna, and con-
firm.
~
No. of rings required.
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
122
System settings
S1_SL1 / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / settings_bs.fm / 02.10.2003
Activating/deactivating call waiting – CW
This function can be set up separately for each user. When call waiting is activated the
caller will hear the ringing tone if you are already making a call. This call is announced
both acoustically, and visually on your handset screen.
When call waiting is deactivated, the caller will hear the ringing tone if you are already
making a call and other phones are assigned to this MSN.
When call waiting is deactivated, the caller will hear the busy tone if you are already
making a call and yours is the only phone assigned to this MSN.
The function is activated when the phone is supplied. For call waiting with an external
call see page 33.
Setting an external/internal enquiry call
Your ISDN connection offers you 2 simultaneously usable telephone lines (B channels).
You can set up your telephone so that:
when an enquiry call is made during an external call to another external party, the
"hold" is done at the telephone exchange so that your second ISDN line remains free.
when an enquiry call is made during an external call to another external party, the
"hold" is done in your base, and both ISDN lines are used.
By factory default, Ext. enq. call is activated.
v
Open the menu.
s Base Settings
Select the menu item and confirm.
s Settings
Select the menu item and confirm.
~
Enter system PIN if required (page 91).
s Setup user
Select the menu item and confirm.
s Setup device
Select the menu item and confirm.
s Int.11
Select internal number, e.g. Int.11 .
v
Open the submenu.
s Call waiting
Select the menu item and confirm (= activated).
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
i
If Int. enq. call is set and the second B-channel is being used, the "Hold"
takes place automatically in the telephone exchange.
123
System settings
S1_SL1 / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / settings_bs.fm / 02.10.2003
Initiating a enquiry call see page 29 or page 30.
Setting up the waiting melody
An external party hears the set waiting melody when the connection is on hold in the
base (internal) (page 122). An external party whose connection is on hold in the tele-
phone exchange (external), and an internal party who is on hold, will not hear a waiting
melody.
The following settings can be chosen:
By factory default, Internal is activated.
v
Open the menu.
s Base Settings
Select the menu item and confirm.
s Settings
Select the menu item and confirm.
~
Enter system PIN if required (page 91).
s ISDN settings
Select the menu item and confirm.
either ...
Set Int. enq. call:
s Int. enq. call
Select the menu item and confirm (= activated).
or ...
Ext. enq. call is to be set:
s Ext. enq. call
Select the menu item and confirm (= activated).
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
Internal
The party on hold hears the waiting melody of the
base.
Off
When the waiting melody is deactivated, a setting
cannot be made.
v
Open the menu.
s Base Settings
Select the menu item and confirm.
s Settings
Select the menu item and confirm.
~
Enter system PIN if required (page 91).
s System settings
Select the menu item and confirm.
s Music on hold
Select the menu item and confirm.
s Internal
Select the setting and confirm,
e.g. Internal (
= on).
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
124
System settings
S1_SL1 / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / settings_bs.fm / 02.10.2003
Activate/deactivate Call beats data
Using Call beats data you can set if a call is rejected or signalled during data transmis-
sion.
Your ISDN connection offers you 2 simultaneously usable telephone lines (B channels).
Both channels are used at the same time to transmit data.
Call beats data off (factory setting):
Calls during data transmission are rejected. The caller hears the busy signal.
Call beats data on:
When there are calls during data transmission, the data connection is automatically
reduced to one B channel and the call is signalled.
Changing the long distance prefix
Long distance prefixes are the first few digits required when dialling another city
(national) or to another country (international). In Germany, the factory default is:
In other countries, different long distance prefixes could be used. In this case you need
to change this setting.
Otherwise, you wouldn't be able to make some calls, such as ringbacks, from the call
list.
On the base:
SX205isdn SX255isdn SX303isdn SX353isdn
v
Open the menu.
s Base Settings
Select the menu item and confirm.
s Settings
Select the menu item and confirm.
~
Enter system PIN if required (page 91).
s ISDN settings
Select the menu item and confirm.
s Call beats data
Select the menu item and confirm (= On).
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
0 For connections to other towns (national)
00 For connections abroad (international)
v
Open the menu.
s Base Settings
Select the menu item and confirm.
s Settings
Select the menu item and confirm.
~
Enter system PIN if required (page 91).
s ISDN settings
Select the menu item and confirm.
s Lg.-dist. code
Select the menu item and confirm.
s National : 0
Select type of long distance prefix,
e.g. National : 0.
v
Open the submenu.
s Change number
Select the menu item and confirm.
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
125
System settings
S1_SL1 / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / settings_bs.fm / 02.10.2003
Entering or changing the country code:
Phone numbers transferred from the GSM network always contain the international
country code, even when dialling within a country (e.g., +49 for Germany, +33 for
France, +39 for Italy, or +43 for Austria).
Therefore, a special setting for the country code is necessary if you have received a call
from the GSM network, this call was transferred into the directory or the calls list, and
you would like to call back from the directory or the calls list via the ISDN network.
Default settings: country code of each country (e.g., +49 in Germany).
Configuring the answering machine in the network for fast access
Precondition: You can only use the answering machine of your network provider in the
network if you have applied for it with your network provider.
As soon as the phone number of the answering machine has been entered in the net-
work, you can use fast access. You can dial the answering machine in the network
directly by holding down the key 1.
~ Í
Enter a new or changed long distance prefix and
open the menu.
s Save entry
Select the menu item and confirm.
OK
On the base:
SX303isdn SX353isdn
v
Open the menu.
s Base Settings
Select the menu item and confirm.
s Settings
Select the menu item and confirm.
~
Enter system PIN if required (page 91).
s ISDN settings
Select the menu item and confirm.
s Lg.-dist. code
Select the menu item and confirm.
s Code :
Select.
v
Open the submenu.
s Change number
Select the menu item and confirm.
~ Í
Enter the country code and open the menu.
s Save entry
Select the menu item and confirm.
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
On the base:
CX100isdn SX100isdn SX205isdn CX203isdn SX303isdn
126
System settings
S1_SL1 / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / settings_bs.fm / 02.10.2003
The answering machine in the network of the Deutschen Telekom is the network mail-
box.
The network mailbox is pre-set for fast access as the factory default for devices without
AM in Germany, i.e., the phone number of the network mailbox is entered. The phone
number of the network-mailbox is 0800 330 2424.
Entering/deleting a phone number in the network.
This setting is now valid for all registered handsets and the base.
Calling an answering machine in the network
Press 1 and hold. This connects you directly to the answering machine in the net-
work. If you now press the d handsfree key, you can 'open listen' to the announcement
of the answering machine in the network and operate the answering machine in the
network easily and conveniently.
Displaying/playing back a message from the answering machine in the
network
When a message arrives for you, you get a call from the answering machine in the net-
work. On the screen, the number, e.g., for the network mailbox 0800 330 2424, is dis-
played if you have applied for Calling Line Identification. If you accept the call, the new
messages are played back. If you do not accept the call, the number of the answering
machine in the network will be stored in the list of missed calls and the message key
flashes.
v
Open the menu.
s Base Settings
Select the menu item and confirm.
s Settings
Select the menu item and confirm.
~
Enter system PIN if required (page 91).
s System settings
Select the menu item and confirm.
s Network Mailb.
Select the menu item and confirm. The phone
number appears in the display if it has already been
stored.
v
Open the submenu.
either ...
Enter or change an entry:
Change number
Confirm.
~ Í
Enter or change the phone number of the answering
machine in the network and open the submenu.
Save entry
Confirm.
or ...
Delete a number:
s Delete number
Select the menu item and confirm.
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
127
System settings
S1_SL1 / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / settings_bs.fm / 02.10.2003
Restoring the factory setting
You can select which type of reset should be performed:
Operational – All MSNs and access code are deleted and the AM PIN (on Gigaset with
integrated answering machine) is set to 0000. The authorisations are reset to "dial and
answer".
Reset all – All functions are reset to their factory defaults. The system PIN is reset to
"0000". All entries (calls list, charges) are deleted.
Checking the status
The status of the following settings can be checked:
Callback
Unknown call
Call forwarding
External connections
AM1, AM2, AM3
i
The following applies to both functions: Before resetting, deactivate all
active call transfers! The handsets are still registered.
v
Open the menu.
s Base Settings
Select the menu item and confirm.
s Settings
Select the menu item and confirm.
~
Enter system PIN if required (page 91).
s System settings
Select the menu item and confirm.
s Spec. function
Select the menu item and confirm.
s Factory setting
Select the menu item and confirm.
either ...
Restore the functionality:
s Operational
Select the menu item and confirm.
or ...
Restore factory settings:
s Reset all
Select the menu item and confirm.
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
v
Open the menu.
s Base Settings
Select the menu item and confirm.
s Status
Select the menu item and confirm. The status list is
displayed (
= activated).
OK
OK
128
System settings
S1_SL1 / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / settings_bs.fm / 02.10.2003
Checking the software version
You can check the version of the software for the base:
v
Open the menu.
s Base Settings
Select the menu item and confirm.
s Settings
Select the menu item and confirm.
~
Enter system PIN if required (page 91).
s System settings
Select the menu item and confirm.
s Spec. function
Select the menu item and confirm.
s SW version
Select the menu item and confirm.
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
129
Operating when connected to a PABX
S1_SL1 / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / pabx.fm / 02.10.2003
Operating when connected to a PABX
Access code
Precondition: If your phone is connected to a PABX you may have
– depending on the PABX – to enter an access code (outside line code) for external calls
when getting started the first time. See the operating instructions for your PABX. You
can enter a one to four-digit access code.
For incoming calls, the access code is automatically placed in front of the caller's phone
number in the display and in the call lists, and likewise when copied to the directory. The
saved phone number can then be dialled directly from the calls list (page 50)
Activating/deactivating call transfer – ECT (Explicit Call Transfer)
Preconditions:
The service is supported by the exchange of your PABX.
With some ISDN PABX systems, your two parties are not connected together, when
you press the end call key during a call transfer (page 33). In this case you need to
activate this function. To do this, please refer to the operating instructions of your
PABX.
i
Pay attention to the special features for SMS on PABX systems (page 70).
v
Open the menu.
s Base Settings
Select the menu item and confirm.
s Settings
Select the menu item and confirm.
~
Enter system PIN if required (page 91).
s System settings
Select the menu item and confirm.
s Access code
Select the menu item and confirm.
~ Í
Enter access code and open the menu.
s Save entry
Confirm.
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
i
For manual dialling and entering directory, emergency and direct dial
numbers you must also enter the access code.
130
Operating when connected to a PABX
S1_SL1 / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / pabx.fm / 02.10.2003
By factory default, this function is deactivated.
Dialling options
The KEYPAD function allows you to control certain services by entering sequences of
characters and digits.
You should set the KEYPAD function if your telephone is connected to an ISDN PABX or
to an exchange (e.g. Centrex), which is controlled by means of KEYPAD protocol. The
digits/characters 0–9, *, # are sent as keypad information elements. Please inquire of
your service provider about which information and codes you can transmit.
If your telephone is integrated in a Centrex system, the following performance features
can be used.
Setting options
You ca switch between the settings Standard dial (factory setting), Auto keypad and
Dial * and #.
Standard dial
Once Standard dial has been activated, * and # are not transmitted during dialling, and
if * and # are entered it is not possible to switch to the keypad.
Auto keypad
Once * or # has been entered, this setting automatically transfers ringing during dialling
to the keypad. This automatic switchover is needed for giving commands to the
exchange or PABX.
v
Open the menu.
s Base Settings
Select the menu item and confirm.
s Settings
Select the menu item and confirm.
~
Enter system PIN if required (page 91).
s ISDN settings
Select the menu item and confirm.
s Transfer(ECT)
Select the menu item and confirm (= activated).
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
i
If you activate this function, it will automatically be switched to the Ext.
enq. call (= in the telephone exchange) (page 29).
Calling Name Identification
(CNI)
When you receive calls from other CENTREX subscrib-
ers, the caller's number and name are displayed on
the screen.
Message Waiting Indication
(MWI)
The display key J is offered on Comfort hand-
sets if new calls appear in the calls list. Calling up the
calls list deletes the display key J.
CENTREX call A CENTREX call is announced acoustically in the same
way as an internal call.
131
Operating when connected to a PABX
S1_SL1 / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / pabx.fm / 02.10.2003
Dial * and #
Once Dial * and # has been activated, the * and # characters are transmitted during dial-
ling as commands to the exchange or PABX.
Regardless of the setting options above, after dialling or during the conversation, the
phone switches automatically to tone dialling (DTMF), for instance for remote control
of an answering machine.
Activating/deactivating the keypad during a call
In addition to the ongoing settings described above, you can also switch over temporar-
ily to the keypad.
The setting is only applicable to the current external call and is automatically deacti-
vated after the call is ended.
Activating the keypad for the next connection
All dialling characters (0–9, *, #) will be sent as a string of keypad characters with the
next connection (dial and call). In the connection status, the keypad is retained and is
not automatically switched over to tone dialling (DTMF).
v
Open the menu.
s Base Settings
Select the menu item and confirm.
s Settings
Select the menu item and confirm.
~
Enter system PIN if required (page 91).
s System settings
Select the menu item and confirm.
s Spec. function
Select the menu item and confirm.
s Dial properties
Select the menu item and confirm.
s Standard dial
Select the setting and confirm, e.g. Standard dial
(
= activated).
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
v
Open the menu.
either ...
Activate the keypad:
s Keypad on?
Select the menu item and confirm.
~
Enter the keypad code.
or ...
Deactivate the keypad:
s Keypad off?
Select the menu item and confirm.
OK
OK
v
Open the menu.
s Base Settings
Select the menu item and confirm.
s Call preparat.
Select the menu item and confirm.
s Temp. keypad
Select the menu item and confirm (= activated).
OK
OK
OK
132
Operating with other devices
S1_SL1 / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / devices.fm / 02.10.2003
Operating with other devices
Defining device type
If your base offers the option of connecting an analogue terminal, you must set the
device type (see operating instructions for the base).
On the base:
SX205isdn SX255isdn SX303isdn SX353isdn
v
Open the menu.
s Base Settings
Select the menu item and confirm.
s Settings
Select the menu item and confirm.
~
Enter system PIN if required (page 91).
s Setup user
Select the menu item and confirm.
Setup device
Confirm.
s Intern 21
Select internal user, e.g. Intern 21.
©
Press the display key to open the submenu.
s Device type
Select the menu item and confirm.
s Fax
Select the device type desired and confirm, e.g. Fax
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
i
When changing a setting from one device type not requiring an incoming
MSN to a device type requiring an incoming MSN, all MSNs programmed
in the system are used as active incoming MSN for this internal user.
133
Operating with other devices
S1_SL1 / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / devices.fm / 02.10.2003
Making a call with devices on an analogue connection
(TAE connection)
Telephones with tone dialling (DTMF) can be used on analogue connections. Tele-
phones with DP (pulse dialling) are not supported.
Activating/deactivating automatic line seizure
The exchange line is occupied when the handset is lifted if automatic line seizure is acti-
vated. Normal internal dialling is thus no longer possible Using the S key, an internal
call can be made via an internal enquiry call.
Make calls externally
Internal dialling
On the base:
SX205isdn SX255isdn SX303isdn SX353isdn
i
Information about telephoning with devices on an analogue connection
can be found in the operating instructions of your base.
v
Open the menu.
s Base Settings
Select the menu item and confirm.
s Settings
Select the menu item and confirm.
~
Enter system PIN if required (page 91).
s Setup user
Select the menu item and confirm.
Setup device
Confirm.
s Intern 21
Select internal user, e.g. Intern 21.
©
Press the display key to open the submenu.
s Auto. seizure
Select the menu item and confirm.
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
Autom. line seizure is not active Autom. line seizure is active
c Q ~c~
Autom. line seizure is not active
c~
134
Operating with other devices
S1_SL1 / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / devices.fm / 02.10.2003
Make calls internally using the GAP handset
Group call to all internal users
A call on call waiting
You hear the call waiting tone during an external call.
Changing to the waiting caller – Toggling
Making an external enquiry call
Making an internal enquiry call
Autom. line seizure is not active
c~or
INT ~
Autom. line seizure is not active
cP/ for GAP
INT P
either ...
a Call is disconnected, wait for the
ring c
or ...
S Caller 1 is put on hold.
S
Caller 1 is put on hold.
S
Caller 2 is put on hold, etc.
S Q ~
S
Swap between callers, if necessary.
S~
Make an internal enquiry call.
S
Swap between callers, if necessary.
135
Operating with other devices
S1_SL1 / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / devices.fm / 02.10.2003
Transferring the call before/after answering
Activating/deactivating repeater mode
You can increase the range of your handsets with the Gigaset Repeater. You can operate
up to six repeaters on your base. To ensure the repeater is installed correctly, repeater
mode must be activated on the base.
You can use this function to activate and deactivate repeater mode.
By factory default, this repeater capability is deactivated.
either ...
Transferring before answering:
S~
a
Hold down (return to idle status).
or ...
Transferring after answering:
S~
Transfer the call after answering.
Make an enquiry call.
a
Hold down (return to idle status).
i
Information about telephoning with devices on an analogue connection
can be found in the operating instructions of your base.
v
Open the menu.
s Base Settings
Select the menu item and confirm.
s Settings
Select the menu item and confirm.
~
Enter system PIN if required (page 91).
s System settings
Select the menu item and confirm.
s Spec. function
Select the menu item and confirm.
s Repeater
Select the menu item and confirm.
[RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR]
NEXT
Press the display key to save the setting. The handset
goes off briefly (
= activated).
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
136
Operating the answering machine directly
S1_SL1 / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / answeringm_use.fm / 02.10.2003
Operating the answering machine directly
Your ISDN telephone has three answering machines (AM1, AM2, AM3), each of which
you can operate and set independently. You can operate the answering machines either
directly via a registered handset (via the menu) or by remote control (internal or exter-
nal call to the answering machine, see the operating instructions of the base).
Which answering machine you can operate directly using your handset depends on the
assignment of the receive MSN's:
There is no MSN assigned to the answering machines (factory setting):
AM1 answers all calls.
Each answering machine can be set, operated and played back from each handset/
terminal.
One or more MSN's are assigned to each answering machine:
Each answering machine can only be set and played back using handsets/terminals with
the same receive MSN.
Exception: If a receive MSN is assigned exclusively to one answering machine, and not
to any other handset/terminal, then this answering machine can be operated by all
internal users.
The date and time of arrival of each message is logged if you have previously set this
function (page 94).
You can hide answering machines you do not wish to use, see page 82.
Definitions of terms used below:
On the base:
CX150isdn SX150isdn CX253isdn SX255isdn SX353isdn
i
If an answering machine is currently being used by one user (directly or
by remote control), then no other user can access the answering machine
during this time.
Message Message that a caller leaves on the answering machine.
Memos "Spoken notes" that you can record on the answering machine for mem-
bers of your family or office colleagues, for example.
AM mode Answer and record or announce only.
Answer and record
mode
The caller hears an announcement and may then leave a message.
Announce only mode The caller hears the announcement but cannot leave a message.
137
Operating the answering machine directly
S1_SL1 / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / answeringm_use.fm / 02.10.2003
Selecting an answering machine
The list of answering machines AM1 , etc., is also opened if you press and hold the
number key 1. The list only contains the answering machines set to be shown on the
handset. If only one answering machine can be reached via the handset, or only one
answering machine is set to be shown, the list is skipped.
Activating/deactivating the answering machine
You can only activate/deactivate an answering machine when time control is not active
(page 85).
Precondition: You have selected an answering machine (page 137).
When the answering machine is activated the remaining memory in % is displayed on
the screen.
Which AM mode the answering machine assumes after activation (answer and record
mode or announce only mode) depends on the announcement selected (page 138).
You can only activate an answering machine in answer and record mode if there is mem-
ory still available. If the remaining memory is less than 60 seconds, you will be
prompted to delete old messages. If the remaining memory is less than 10 seconds the
answering machine is started in announce only mode.
If the answering machine assigned to a handset is activated, the × icon is shown on
the screen. The × flashes if a recording is in progress.
v
Open the menu.
s Answering mach.
Select the menu item and confirm.
s AM1
If necessary, select answering machine and
confirm, e.g. AM1 .
~
If AM lock is set (page 85): enter the answering
machine PIN and confirm.
OK
OK
OK
either ...
Activate the answering machine:
s Activate?
Select the menu item and confirm.
or ...
Deactivate the answering machine:
s Deactivate?
Select the menu item and confirm.
OK
OK
138
Operating the answering machine directly
S1_SL1 / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / answeringm_use.fm / 02.10.2003
Selecting announce only and AM mode
You can activate Announcement 1 , Announcement 2 or Announcem. only for each
answering machine. As supplied, the three announcements already contain pre-
recorded announcements. You can delete the pre-recorded announcement and record
your own announcement.
When you select an announcement you also determine in which AM mode the answer-
ing machine is to run (page 136).
Announcement 1 , Announcement 2: Recording mode.
Announcem. only: Announce only mode
In answer and record mode a Concl.announcem is given automatically at the end of a
recording providing you have recorded a concluding announcement.
When the phone is supplied Announcement 1 is selected. The Concl.announcem
contains nothing.
Precondition: You have selected an answering machine (page 137).
Recording/changing announcements
You can record the following announcements: Announcement 1 , Announcement 2,
Announcem. only and Concl.announcem.
Precondition: You have selected an answering machine (page 137).
s Announcements
Select the menu item and confirm.
s Announcement 2
Select announcement, e.g. Announcement 2
(
= set).
Í
Press the display key to open the submenu.
Select
Confirm. The announcement set previously is deac-
tivated automatically.
OK
OK
i
The answering machine switches automatically from answer and record
mode to announce only mode when the memory is full. As soon as mem-
ory space is made available (e.g. because you have deleted some mes-
sages) the answering machine automatically switches back to answer
and record mode.
s Announcements
Select the menu item and confirm.
s Announcement 2
Select announcement, e.g. Announcement 2
(
= currently activated).
Í
Press the display key to open the submenu.
s Record
Select the menu item and confirm.
[ RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR]
START
Press the display key to start recording.
Say the announcement message.
[ RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR]
STOP
Press the display key to end the recording. The
announcement is repeated for you to check.
OK
OK
139
Operating the answering machine directly
S1_SL1 / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / answeringm_use.fm / 02.10.2003
Recording is automatically terminated if:
you pause for more than 8 seconds when recording your announcement
the memory is full. Delete old messages or announcements you no longer require.
The announcement will not be stored if you press the end call key during the recording
or repeat playback.
Playing back/deleting announcements
Only recorded announcements can be deleted. The pre-recorded announcement
cannot be deleted.
Precondition: You have selected an answering machine (page 137).
Recording memos
Memos are "spoken notes" recorded, for example, for members of your family. A memo
is played back, saved and deleted in the same way as a message. If there is a new memo,
the message key f flashes on all handsets assigned to the answering machine.
You can also record memos when the answering machine is deactivated.
When the memory is full, and when there are pauses in the recording longer than 8 sec-
onds, the recording of the memo is cancelled automatically.
Precondition: You have selected an answering machine (page 137).
To cancel the recording, press the display key
BACK.
s Announcements
Select the menu item and confirm.
s Announcement 2
Select announcement, e.g. Announcement 2
(
= is activated).
Í
Press the display key to open the submenu.
either ...
Play back the announcement:
s Play back
Select the menu item and confirm.
or ...
Delete the announcement:
s Delete
Select the menu item and confirm.
[RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR]
YES
Press the display key to confirm the prompt.
OK
OK
OK
s Memos
Select the menu item and confirm.
s Record memo
Select the menu item and confirm.
[RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR]
START
Press the display key to start recording.
Say the memo message.
[RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR]
STOP
Press the display key to end the recording.
OK
OK
140
Operating the answering machine directly
S1_SL1 / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / answeringm_use.fm / 02.10.2003
Two-way recording
You can make a two-way recording of a call. The two-way recording can then be played
back or deleted like a message.
During a call:
Picking up a call during answering machine operation
You can pick up a call, even if the answering machine has already switched itself on (the
× icon flashes on the screen), or your announcement is still running, or the caller is
already leaving a message. When you pick up the call the recording stops.
Preconditions:
To pick up an answering machine call, the minimum authorisation "Answer only" is
required (page 92).
The same receive MSN is assigned to both the answering machine and the handset
picking up the call (page 81).
Automatic listen in is not activated on any other handset (page 88).
In order to call another external party while the answering machine is recording a call
you must deactivate the automatic pickup (page 89).
v
Open the menu.
s Record
Select the menu item and confirm.
s AM1
Select an answering machine and confirm,
e.g. AM1 . The two-way recording starts at once.
[ RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR]
STOP
Press the display key to end the two-way recording.
OK
OK
i
The two-way recording is also ended when the call ends or when the
memory is full. You should inform the person you are speaking to in
advance that you are making a two-way recording.
Automatic call pick up is activated (see page 89,
factory default):
cd
Press the talk or handsfree key. You pick up the call.
Automatic pickup is deactivated:
cd
Press the talk or handsfree key.
either ...
[ RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR]
OP.LIST
Press the display key to screen the call.
The caller cannot hear you.
or ...
[ RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR]
ACCEPT
Press the display key to pick up the call.
141
Operating the answering machine directly
S1_SL1 / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / answeringm_use.fm / 02.10.2003
Playing messages
New messages are displayed on the handset by the flashing message key f. Pressing
the messages key f gives you direct access to the new messages.
You can also open the lists of new and old messages via the menu.
Precondition: You have selected an answering machine (page 137).
Playback starts with the oldest message. When all the messages have been played back
you will be asked whether you wish to delete the messages.
The following is shown on the screen for each message:
If automatic pause is activated the answering machine switches to pause mode after
playing back a message. Press the display key Ï, to continue playback.
Jumping to the next or previous message during playback
Switching to pause mode during playback, ending pause mode
Messages
Confirm.
OK
Total number of messages in the list
Current number of message shown
12.09.03 09:45
1234567890
New mess.: 1/15
ÏÍ
s t
Message status:
Old mess.: or New mess.:
Caller's phone number
Date and time of call
s
Go to the next message.
t
Repeat the last 5 seconds of the current message. If
less than 5 seconds have elapsed, the current mes-
sage is played back from the beginning.
tt
Jump to the previous message.
v
Switch to pause mode.
Continue
Confirm. Continue playback.
OK
142
Operating the answering machine directly
S1_SL1 / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / answeringm_use.fm / 02.10.2003
Returning a call during playback
You can call back a caller immediately while a message is being played.
Precondition: The caller's number has been identified (page 24).
During playback:
Playing a message to another caller
During an external call you can play messages from the answering machine to the per-
son you are calling.
Precondition: The same receive MSN is assigned to the handset and the answering
machine.
During the call:
Í
Press the display key to open the submenu.
either ...
Call back:
s Call back
Select the menu item and confirm.
or ...
Call back using the network provider's phone
number:
s NET list
Select the menu item and confirm.
s
Select the network provider's number and confirm.
OK
OK
OK
Í
Press the display key to open the menu.
s Play message
Select the menu item and confirm.
s AM1
If necessary, select answering machine and
confirm, e.g.AM1 .
~
If AM lock is set (page 85): enter the answering
machine PIN and confirm.
Information about the oldest message is displayed
on the screen. The message is not played back.
s Í
Select message and open the submenu.
s Playback
Select the menu item and confirm. The playback
starts. The other party can hear the message being
played.
End playback:
Í
Press the display key to open the submenu.
s Exit
Select the menu item and confirm. The playback
stops. You can speak to the caller again.
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
143
Operating the answering machine directly
S1_SL1 / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / answeringm_use.fm / 02.10.2003
Playing back memos
Precondition: You have selected an answering machine (page 137).
Setting the playback speed
You can set the playback speed for messgaes/memos to four levels, Slow, Normal
speed, Fast or Very fast. When the phone is supplied Normal speed is set for all
answering machines.
During playback:
Playback continues at the new speed. All subsequent messages/memos are played back
at this speed until you make another change.
Deleting messages/memos
You can delete messages or memos individually or all together. Only messages and
memos that have been listened to for at least 3 seconds can be deleted. These record-
ings are then described as old.
Deleting single messages/memos
Precondition: You have selected an answering machine (page 137).
s Memos
Select the menu item and confirm.
s Play memo
Select the menu item and confirm.
st
Jump to the next or previous memo.
OK
OK
Í
Press display key to open menu.
s Speed
Select the menu item and confirm.
s Fast
Select the speed level and confirm,
e.g. Fast (
= set).
OK
OK
either ...
Delete a single message:
Messages
Confirm. Message playback begins.
s All messages
Select the menu item and confirm.
st
Select message.
Í
Press the display key to open the submenu.
s Delete message
Select the menu item and confirm. The current mes-
sage is deleted.
OK
OK
OK
144
Operating the answering machine directly
S1_SL1 / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / answeringm_use.fm / 02.10.2003
Deleting all old messages/memos
Precondition: You have selected an answering machine (page 137).
or ...
Delete a single memo:
s Memos
Select the menu item and confirm.
s All memos
Select the menu item and confirm.
st
Select memo.
Í
Press the display key to open the submenu.
s Delete curr.memo
Select the menu item and confirm. The current
memo is deleted.
OK
OK
OK
either ...
Delete all old messages:
Messages
Confirm. Message playback begins.
s All messages
Select the menu item and confirm.
Í
Press the display key to open the submenu.
s Del.old messages
Select the menu item and confirm.
[ RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR]
YES
Confirm.
or ...
Delete all old memos:
s Memos
Select the menu item and confirm.
s All memos
Select the menu item and confirm.
Í
Press the display key to open the submenu.
s Delete old memos
Select the menu item and confirm.
[ RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR]
YES
Confirm.
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
145
Operating the answering machine directly
S1_SL1 / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / answeringm_use.fm / 02.10.2003
Marking an old message or memo as "new"
You can mark messages/memos you have already played back as "new". This will display
this message/memo on the handset as a new entry by flashing the message key f or
by text in the display.
Pressing the messages key f gives you direct access to the message/memo once more.
During playback:
If other recordings are available, playback continues.
Adding a number to the directory
While a message is being played back you can display the caller's phone number and
store it in the directory.
Precondition: The caller's number has been identified.
During playback:
Í
Press the display key to open the submenu.
s Status to 'new'
Select the menu item and confirm. The current
recording is given the status "new".
OK
Í
Press the display key to open the submenu.
s Save number
Select the menu item and confirm.
~
Enter name.
Press the display key to open the submenu.
Store
Confirm.
OK
à
OK
146
Operating with a gate telephone
S1_SL1 / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / door_intercom.fm / 02.10.2003
Operating with a gate telephone
Assigning internal users to the gate telephone call group
If you have set up a gate telephone, all internal users registered on the base will be
assigned to the gate telephone call group. You can change the assignment.
Making calls with the gate telephone
Call from the gate telephone
In a call with the gate telephone, the following performance features are not available:
Putting a call on hold
Making an enquiry call from a call with the gate telephone
Toggling a user on the gate telephone
Conference with a user on the gate telephone
Forwarding or transferring a call from the gate telephone
The gate telephone calls internal users for 20 seconds. If call forwarding for the gate tel-
ephone is set up externally, the call time is extended to 60 seconds.
On the base:
SX205isdn SX255isdn SX303isdn SX353isdn
v
Open the menu.
s Base Settings
Select the menu item and confirm.
s Settings
Select the menu item and confirm.
~
Enter system PIN if required (page 91).
s Setup user
Select the menu item and confirm.
Setup device
Confirm.
s Int.11
Select internal user, e.g. Intern 11.
©
Open the submenu.
s Door call grp.
Select the menu item and confirm (= On).
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
c
Press the talk key. You are connected to the gate tel-
ephone. The message
Door appears in the display.
... then
a
Press end call key.
or ...
[ RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR]
OP DOOR
Press the display key to activate the door opener. The
door opener is activated. As confirmation, you
receive the screen display
Door is opening. The con-
nection to the gate telephone is automatically ended
after the door opens.
147
Operating with a gate telephone
S1_SL1 / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / door_intercom.fm / 02.10.2003
Call waiting for the gate telephone
The gate telephone calls internal users for 20 seconds. If call forwarding for the gate tel-
ephone is set up externally, the call time is extended to 60 seconds.
Accept call waiting
Press the display key
ACCEPT. You pick up the call on call waiting.
If the interrupted call is an internal call, this connection is interrupted by accepting the
call on call waiting.
If the interrupted call is an external call, this call is put on hold when accepting the call
on call waiting. Both parties are shown on the display, the current one is marked.
Changing parties
If the interrupted call is an internal call, you can change parties.
Internal calls with the gate telephone
You can call the gate telephone internally (page 22).
a
End your current call. The waiting call becomes a
normal call.
c
Press the talk key to answer the call.
148
Operating with a gate telephone
S1_SL1 / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / door_intercom.fm / 02.10.2003
Forwarding the gate telephone externally
The calls to the gate telephone can be forwarded to an external phone number. The
internal users of the gate telephone call group will continue to be called even with exter-
nal call forwarding set up.
The setting for the call forwarding destination for external call forwarding either in the
exchange or in your base (page 119) also affects the call forwarding for the gate tele-
phone.
Entering or changing the destination number for external call forwarding
On the base:
SX205isdn SX255isdn SX303isdn SX353isdn
v
Open the menu.
s Base Settings
Select the menu item and confirm.
s Settings
Select the menu item and confirm.
~
Enter system PIN if required (page 91).
s Setup user
Select the menu item and confirm.
Setup device
Confirm.
s Int.21
Select the set-up gate telephone (Int.21 or Int.22).
©
Press the display key to open the submenu.
s Türrufumleitung
Select the menu item and confirm.
©
Press the display key to display the destination
number. If a destination number has not been
recorded, the entry <empty> is shown.
©
Press the display key to open the submenu.
Change number
Confirm.
~
Enter a new or changed destination number.
©
Press the display key to open the submenu.
Save entry
Confirm.
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
149
Operating with a gate telephone
S1_SL1 / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / door_intercom.fm / 02.10.2003
Deleting the destination number for external call forwarding
Activating/deactivating call forwarding
v
Open the menu.
s Base Settings
Select the menu item and confirm.
s Settings
Select the menu item and confirm.
~
Enter system PIN if required (page 91).
s Setup user
Select the menu item and confirm.
Setup device
Confirm.
s Intern 21
Select the set-up gate telephone (Intern 21 or Intern
22).
©
Press the display key to open the submenu.
s Forw. door call
Select the menu item and confirm.
©
Press the display key to display the destination
number.
s Delete number
Select the menu item and confirm.
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
v
Open the menu.
s Base Settings
Select the menu item and confirm.
s Einstellungen
Select the menu item and confirm.
~
Enter system PIN if required (page 91).
s Setup user
Select the menu item and confirm.
Setup device
Confirm.
s Intern 21
Select the set-up gate telephone (Intern 21 or Intern
22).
©
Press the display key to open the submenu.
s Türrufumleitung
Select and confirm to display the destination
number.
©
Press the display key to open the submenu.
either ...
Activate call forwarding:
Activate?
Select the menu item and confirm.
or ...
Deactivate call forwarding:
Deactivate?
Select the menu item and confirm.
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
150
Appendix
S1_SL1 / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / appendix.fm / 02.10.2003
Appendix
Care
Wipe the handset with a damp cloth (use no solvent) or an antistatic cloth. Never use
a dry cloth. This can cause static.
Contact with liquid
If the handset should come into contact with liquid, on no account switch the device
on. Remove all batteries immediately.
Allow the liquid to drain out of the device, and then pat all parts of the device dry.
Keep the handset with the batteries removed in a warm, dry place for at least 72 hours.
In many cases, you will then be able to use it again.
Questions and Answers
If you have any questions about the use of your phone, you can contact us 24/7 at
www.my-siemens.com/custeromercare
. You will find the most frequently asked ques-
tions and answers below.
!
What has happened
when …
Possible cause Possible solution
… the display is blank? The handset is not switched on.
The batteries are flat.
Press the end call key a for
around 2 sec.
Charge or replace the batteries
(page 9).
… the handset fails to respond
to a key press?
The keypad lock is activated. Press the hash key
R
for
around 2 seconds to deacti-
vate the lock (page 10).
Base or Base Search
flashes in the display?
The handset is outside the range
of the base.
The handset is not registered.
The base is not switched on.
Move the handset nearer to the
base.
Register the handset (see
page 9 and page 20).
Check the power connector at
the base.
… the handset does not ring? The ringer is switched off.
Internal call forwarding is set to 0
rings (= immediate call forward-
ing).
Night service is active.
Activate the ringer of the hand-
set (page 106).
Increase the number of rings
for the internal call forwarding
(page 116).
Deactivate Night service
(page 98).
… the call units/charges are
not displayed?
There are no metering pulses.
Factor per unit = 0.
Ask your network provider to
transmit the metering pulses.
Set the factor per unit
(page 73).
… the incoming call number is
not displayed even though
CLIP is set?
Calling Line Identification is
blocked.
The caller must ask his network
provider to enable the identifi-
cation of his number (CLI).
… the calls list does not indi-
cate a time for a message?
Date/time are not set. Set the date/time (page 94).
151
Appendix
S1_SL1 / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / appendix.fm / 02.10.2003
… the answering machine
says "PIN is incorrect" during
remote operation?
The entered system PIN is incor-
rect or still set to 0000.
Enter the system PIN again or
set a PIN that is different from
0000 (page 91).
… the answering machine
does not record any messages
or has automatically switched
over to "announce only"?
Its memory is full. Delete old messages
Play back new messages and
delete.
… the handset does not ring
after the ISDN number (MSN)
has been set up?
The area prefix has been stored
with the MSN.
Store MSN without area prefix
(page 111).
… You don't hear anything? The
u key was pressed – the
microphone has been muted.
Press to return to the call.
… You can't dial a phone
number any longer?
The long distance prefix has
changed.
The telephone is blocked.
Check the long distance prefix
and correct it (page 124).
Check the status display,
unlock the telephone if neces-
sary (page 10).
… there are no incoming
calls?
Call forwarding Immediately
has been activated.
The MSN has not been assigned
to the internal user.
The authorisation Internal only
is set.
Deactivate call forwarding
Immediately(page 116).
Determine the receive MSN
(page 112).
Change the authorisation
(page 92).
… during call forwarding the
forwarding conditions are
not displayed?
Internal call forwarding is acti-
vated.
Activate external call forward-
ing (page 116).
Apply to have this activated by
the network provider.
… the telephone also rings for
fax-PC calls?
The phone number is in the
phone number list of the base
telephone.
Delete the corresponding
phone number (MSN) in the list
(page 112).
… the display shows no call
charges?
The call charge display is not set
or this performance feature is
not enabled by the network pro-
vider.
Activate the call charge display
(page 73).
Apply for the performance fea-
ture "charge transmission"
from the network provider.
… you cannot access the
answering machine?
The answering machine lock has
been activated.
Enter answering machine PIN
(page 85).
… you are unable to record
any new information or
announcements?
There is insufficient remaining
memory.
Delete old messages/informa-
tion (page 143).
Reduce the quality of the
recordings (page 83).
… you have a PABX and, after
dialling, the wrong connec-
tion or no connection is
made?
You have entered the wrong pre-
fix or no prefix.
Check and correct the prefix
(page 129).
the handset does not ring
as set?
There is a different setting for
the ringer melody for the MSN.
Change the ringer tone melody
(page 114).
… it is not possible to access
the answering machine from
the handset?
The handset is not assigned to
the receive MSN for the answer-
ing machine.
Check assignment (page 81).
… some of the ISDN func-
tions do not work as stated?
The ISDN function has not been
enabled.
Check with your network pro-
vider.
What has happened
when …
Possible cause Possible solution
152
Appendix
S1_SL1 / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / appendix.fm / 02.10.2003
Service (Customer Care)
You have access to straightforward support concerning with technical aspects of your
device and how to operate it through our Online Support on the Internet:
or you can refer to the section "Questions and Answers" on page 150.
If you have any trouble with the equipment, please contact the Siemens telephone
service:
The Siemens Service is only available to deal with device faults only. Your specialist
dealer will be able to help you with any questions about operating your device.
Please address any questions about the DSL or cable connection to your network
provider.
… another telephone on the
So bus does not ring?
The same MSN was assigned to
the telephones. One of the tele-
phones also has internal call for-
warding activated.
Deactivate internal call for-
warding or set external
call forwarding (page 115).
… the caller hears the phone
ringing although the MSN is
busy?
The MSN was saved in devices
also used on the ISDN connec-
tion.
The phone number which is
supposed to be used for call
protection during a call should
be deleted from the list of
phone numbers for each indi-
vidual additional device.
… the handset does not
receive an SMS as a text mes-
sage?
You are not registered with both
SMS centres.
Register with SMS centres
(page 57).
What has happened
when …
Possible cause Possible solution
www.my-siemens.com/customercare
United Kingdom 0 87 05 33 44 11
Ireland 18 50 77 72 77
153
Appendix
S1_SL1 / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / appendix.fm / 02.10.2003
Specifications
Recommended batteries
Nickel-metal-hydride (NiMH):
Sanyo Twicell 700
Sanyo Twicell 650
Panasonic 700 mAh
GP 700 mAh
YDT AAA SUPER 700
VARTA PhonePower AAA 700 mAh
Handset operating times/charging times
These operating and charging times apply only when using the recommended batteries.
General Specifications
Capacity
(mAh)
Standby time
(hours)
Calling time
(hours)
Charging time
(hours)
700 approx. 170 (7 days) approx. 13 approx. 5
Feature Value
DECT standard is supported
GAP standard is supported
No. of channels 60 duplex channels
Radio frequency range 1880–1900 MHz
Duplex method Time multiplex, 10 ms frame length
Channel grid 1728 kHz
Bit rate 1152 kbit/s
Modulation GFSK
Language code 32 kbit/s
Transmission power 10 mW, average power per channel
Range up to 300 m outdoors, up to 50 m indoors
Environmental conditions for operation +5 °C to +45 °C;
20 % to 75 % humidity
Dialling mode DTMF (tone dialling)/DP (dial pulsing)
Dimensions/Handset Gigaset S1: approx. 146 x 55 x 27 mm (L × W × H)
Gigaset SL1: approx. 143 x 118 x 50 mm (L x H x W)
Weight Gigaset S1: Handset with battery cells approx. 131 g
Gigaset SL1: Handset with battery cells: approx. 81 g
154
Appendix
S1_SL1 / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / appendix.fm / 02.10.2003
Character set chart
Standard characters
Press the relevant key repeatedly or hold it down:
Creating and editing text (without predictive text)
You can create and edit text in a number of ways:
The cursor is controlled with u v t s.
Characters (to the left of the cursor) are deleted with .
Characters are added to the left of the cursor (page 12).
To switch from upper case (first letter written in upper case, all other letters in lower
case) to lower case, press the P key before you key in the letter. Pressing the
P key again switches from lower case letters to digits. Press again to return to
upper case letters.
The first letter of the name of directory entries is automatically capitalised, followed
by lower case letters.
When you press a key and hold it, the characters of that key appear in the bottom
display line and are highlighted one after the other. When you release the key the
highlighted character is inserted into the input field.
You can see in the display whether upper case, lower case or digits are selected:
"A" or "a" appears on the bottom display line when you make an entry in the
directory.
"Abc", "abc" or "123" appears at the top right of the screen when a text message
is entered.
1 x 2 x3 x4 x5 x6 x7 x8 x9 x10 x11 x12 x13 x14 x
1
Space
1
â
£$¥¤
2 a bc2äáàâãç
I def3ëéèê
4 ghi4ïíìî
5 jkl5
L mno6öñóòôõ
M pqrs7ß
N t uv8üúùû
O wxyz9ÿýæøå
Q . ,?!0+-: ¿¡ " ; _
P
Abc-->
abc
abc -->
123
*
/()<=>%
R #@\&§
Û
155
Appendix
S1_SL1 / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / appendix.fm / 02.10.2003
Order of directory entries
As a rule, entries in the directory are arranged in alphabetical order, although blank
spaces and numerals (digits) take first priority. The order in which entries occur is as
follows:
1. Space (shown here as s)
2. Digits (0–9)
3. Letters (alphabetical)
4. Other characters
If you want to circumvent the alphabetical order of the entries in the directory, insert a
space before the name. This entry then goes to the first position (example: "sCarla").
You can also number the entries with digits (e.g. "1Jane", "2Mary", "3John").
Names prefixed with a star (e.g. "*Jane") appear at the end of the directory.
Predictive text
The EATONI predictive text helps you to write:
SMS
Names in the directory,
Names in the speed dial list,
Names in the email directory.
Each key between Q and O is assigned several letters and characters which all
appear on a selection line immediately beneath the text area (above the display icons)
as soon as you press a key. When you are entering letters, the letter you are most prob-
ably looking for is greyed. This letter is at the beginning of the selection line and is
transferred to the text area.
If this letter is the one you want, confirm it by pressing the next key. If the letter selected
by the predictive text is not the one you want, then press the hash key R repeatedly
until the required letter appears greyed in the display line and is transferred to the text
area.
Key function when predictive text is activated
The EATONI predictive text func-
tion is activated.
Text of the message
Selection line
470(2)_____Ç_____Abc
Hello Peter, I cannot come
today. Ic
hgi
Ψ
P
Press the star key briefly for about 2 seconds: Change from mode "abc" to "Abc",
from "Abc" to "123" and from "123" to "abc" (also applicable to the letters fol-
lowing).
R Goes to the next letter in the selection list (greyed).
156
Appendix
S1_SL1 / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / appendix.fm / 02.10.2003
Deactivating/activating predictive text
Predictive text is activated and deactivated according to specific functions. Even if you
have deactivated predictive text when entering a name in the directory for SL1
for instance, it is still available for writing text messages.
Precondition: You are in a text input field (SMS, name in the directory, speed dial list or
email directory).
v
Open the menu.
s Predictive Text
Select the menu item and confirm ( = On).
a
Press the "end call" key briefly to return to the text
area. Now enter your text.
OK
157
Appendix
S1_SL1 / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / appendix.fm / 02.10.2003
PC interface
The SL 1 handset can be connected to your computer using a Siemens data cable
(page 168). Your computer can communicate with your Gigaset SL 1 using the program
"Siemens Data Suite" (download free of charge at
http:\\www.my-siemens.com\mysiemens) and can access the following parameters and
lists of the handset:
Reading out parameters
SW version
Type
Manufacturer code
Read/write access to
the directory
the email directory
the network provider list
the list of appointments
the last number redial list
Read/write access to other parameters
Ringer settings
Volume settings
Loading screen savers
Loading melodies
Make phone calls and answer calls
Data transmission
Large quantities of data are transferred between the handset and an external device
with a few functions. In this case, the handset switches to the data transmission mode,
Data Transfer is displayed on the screen. In this mode, the keyboard cannot be used to
enter data and incoming calls are ignored.
In the following cases, the handset switches to the data transmission mode:
Read/write access to the directory
Read/write access to the email directory
Read/write access to the network provider list
Read/write access to the list of appointments
Read/write access to the last number redial list
Loading screen savers
Loading melodies
If an error occurs during transfer, the handset switches to idle status:
On the MT:
SL1
158
Appendix
S1_SL1 / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / appendix.fm / 02.10.2003
Make phone calls and answer calls
If you select a number from an external device or accept a call from there, the handset
behaves exactly as if you had executed these functions on the handset.
Game "Balloon Shooter"
Try to hit as many balloon as possible.
To move the crosshairs, press:
To shoot the balloon, press the
5 key.
On the MT:
SL1
v
Open the menu.
s Add. Features
Select the menu item and confirm.
s Balloon Shooter
Select the menu item and confirm.
either ...
Begin the game:
[ RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR]
Start
Press the display key.
or ...
Further options:
Press display key to open menu.
OK
OK
à
p
1
2
M
O
¢
¢
¢
¢
¢
¢
¢
¢
¢
or
I
L
N
4
159
Appendix
S1_SL1 / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / appendix.fm / 02.10.2003
Guarantee certificate (United Kingdom)
Without prejudice to any claim the user (customer) may have in relation to the dealer or
retailer, the customer shall be granted a manufacturer's Guarantee under the conditions
set out below:
In the case of new devices and their components exhibiting defects resulting from
manufacturing and/or material faults within 24 months of purchase, Siemens shall,
at its own option and free of charge, either replace the device with another device
reflecting the current state of the art, or repair the said device. In respect of parts
subject to wear and tear (including but not limited to, batteries, keypads, casing),
this warranty shall be valid for six months from the date of purchase.
This Guarantee shall be invalid if the device defect is attributable to improper treat-
ment and/or failure to comply with information contained in the user manuals.
This Guarantee shall not apply to or extend to services performed by the authorised
dealer or the customer themselves (e.g. installation, configuration, software down-
loads). User manuals and any software supplied on a separate data medium shall be
excluded from the Guarantee.
The purchase receipt, together with the date of purchase, shall be required as evi-
dence for invoking the Guarantee. Claims under the Guarantee must be submitted
within two months of the Guarantee default becoming evident.
Ownership of devices or components replaced by and returned to Siemens shall vest
in Siemens.
This Guarantee shall apply to new devices purchased in the European Union. The
Guarantee is issued by Siemens plc, Siemens House, Oldbury, Bracknell, Berkshire,
RG12 8FZ.
Any other claims resulting out of or in connection with the device shall be excluded
from this Guarantee. Nothing in this Guarantee shall attempt to limit or exclude a
Customers Statutory Rights, nor the manufacturer's liability for death or personal
injury resulting from its negligence.
The duration of the Guarantee shall not be extended by services rendered under the
terms of the Guarantee.
Insofar as no Guarantee default exists, Siemens reserves the right to charge the cus-
tomer for replacement or repair.
The above provisions does not imply a change in the burden of proof to the detri-
ment of the customer.
To invoke this Guarantee, please contact the Siemens telephone service. The relevant
number is to be found in the accompanying user guide.
Guarantee certificate (Ireland)
Scope
This equipment guarantee applies to end users ("customers"). This guarantee does
not in any way affect the customer's statutory rights.
The guarantee applies to the supplied devices and all their components but not to
their installation or configuration or to the services provided by the dealer. Manuals
and any software supplied on a separate data medium are excluded from the guar-
antee. This guarantee does not apply to decorative covers or any other personalised
160
Appendix
S1_SL1 / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / appendix.fm / 02.10.2003
parts or software not included in the scope of supply. The guarantee also does not
apply to decorative top or bottom shells for special editions.
The guarantee provides for devices or components that, despite proper care and
use, have demonstrably developed defects due to faulty workmanship and/or faulty
materials to be replaced or repaired at our discretion free of charge. The guarantee
does not cover normal wear and tear. Alternatively, we reserve the right to replace
the defective device with a successor model or reimburse the original purchase price
on return of the defective device. Our decision is final. Any legal claims are excluded.
Claims under the guarantee cannot be made if the defect or damage was caused by
improper care or use. Improper care or use includes the following:
Opening the device (this is classed as third-party intervention)
Manipulating components on the printed circuit board
Manipulating the software
Defects or damage caused by dropping, breaking, lightning or ingress of
moisture. This also applies if defects or damage were caused by mechanical,
chemical, radio interference or thermal factors (e.g. microwave, sauna, etc.).
Repairs or other work done by persons not authorised by us.
Devices fitted with accessories not authorised by Siemens.
Any further claims due to damage are excluded, such as damage arising outside the
device, provided this was not due to gross negligence and/or intent on our part.
Claims under the guarantee must be made as soon as the defect is noticed.
A till receipt showing the date of purchase must be presented as proof. Each claim
under the guarantee is accepted with the express reservation that subsequent inves-
tigations confirm the validity of the claim.
Any devices or components that are replaced become our property.
The costs of materials and labour will be borne by us, but not the costs of transport,
postage or freight.
We are entitled, at our discretion, to make technical changes (such as firmware
updates) beyond repair or replacement in order to upgrade the device to the latest
state of the art. There is no additional charge to the customer for this work. Our deci-
sion is final. Any legal claims are excluded.
The guarantee is valid in the country of purchase. It applies only if the device is oper-
ated in the relevant geographical area in accordance with the information on the
packaging and in the operating instructions.
Any further claims are excluded. Siemens is not liable in any circumstances for
downtime, loss of profits, loss of data or loss of any other information. The customer
alone is responsible for safeguarding such data and information.
Changes to this guarantee require prior approval by Siemens in writing.
Guarantee period
The guarantee applies in countries in the EU from 1 January 2002 for a period of 24
months.
In all other countries the guarantee period shall be the relevant minimum statutory
guarantee period, but no longer than 24 months.
The guarantee period starts on the day of purchase by the customer.
A successful claim under the guarantee does not extend the guarantee period.
Work under the guarantee is handled by our Customer Care Centres.
161
Menu Tree
S1_SL1 / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / menuetree.fm / 02.10.2003
Menu Tree
Main menu
Instead of scrolling to locate a menu function, you can also select a menu function faster
by opening the menu and keying in the digit combination ("shortcut").
Example: v524 for "set ringer for the alarm clock".
With the telephone in the idle status, press v (open menu):
1SMS Write message
Inbox 2/5
Outbox 2
3Add. Features3-1Room Monitor
3-2 Walk and Talk
4 Calendar/
Clock
4-1 Set Appoints.
4-2 Alarm Clock
4-3 Missed Dates
4-4 Date/Time
5 Audio Settings 5-1 Handset Volume
5-2 Ringer Settings 5-2-1 Ext. Calls
5-2-2 Internal Calls
5-2-3 Appointments
5-2-4 Alarm
5-2-5 All
5-3 Advisory Tones
5-4 Ringer Echo
6 Call Charges Cost overview
Type of calcul. Units cent.off.
Costs cent.off.
No rate
Rate --.--
Rate ----
Last charge
7 H/Set Settings 7-1 Auto Answer
7-2 Language
7-3 Register H/Set (List)
7-4 Select Base 7-4-1 Base 1
7-4- [to]
7-4-4 Base 4
7-4-5 Best Base
7-5 Screen Picture
7-6 Reset Handset
8Base Settings
For continuation see submenu Base
Settings (page 162)
162
Menu Tree
S1_SL1 / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / menuetree.fm / 02.10.2003
Submenu "Base Settings"
To begin: With the handset in idle status press v Base Settings OK or v N.
9Answer
Machine
AM1
AM2
AM3
For continuation see submenu
Answering machine (page 165)
Status Callback
= On
Withhold no.
Call forwarding
Ext.occupations
AM1 on
AM2 on
AM3 on
Missed calls (phone number list) -> Calls list menu (page 50)
Accepted calls (phone number list) -> Calls list menu (page 50)
Call preparat. Temp.withhold
MSN next call (select MSN)
Temp. keypad
Canc. call park
Ext. call forw.
List of external for-
warding
New entry
MSN list
Immediately
On busy
(only for call forwar-
ding in the telephone
exchange,
(see page 119)
On no reply
Activate? Deactivate? if
call forwarding is activated
Edit entry Immediately
On busy
(only for call
forwarding in the
exchange,
(see page 119)
On no reply
Delete entry
Int. call forw. Activate? or Deactivate? – if call forwarding is activated
Forward. dest. List of
Internal users
No. of rings (enter the number)
Night service
MSN list
Activate? or Deactivate?
if Night service is activated
Forward. dest. External Number editor
Internal List of handsets
Answering mach.
List of handsets
163
Menu Tree
S1_SL1 / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / menuetree.fm / 02.10.2003
Start time
End time
Sat/Sun all day
Settings Security Change PIN (Enter PIN)
Authorisation
List of internal users
Unrestricted
Incoming only
Internal only
Emergency nos. Emergency numbers
(preconfigured)
Emergency numbers
(personal)
Change number
Delete number
Display number
Setup user Setup device List of
internal numbers
Device type specific
submenu
De-reg. device
List of
Internal users
Select device
System settings Music on hold Internal
Off
Off
Date/time Set time
24 hours
12 hours
Date DD.MM
Date MM.DD
Access code
AM auto. pickup
Network Mailb.
Phone number is
displayed
Change number
Delete number
Spec. function Factory setting Operational
Reset all
Dial properties Standard dial
Auto keypad
Dial * and #
Repeater
SW version
Ext.room monit.
(Destination number
display)
Change number
Delete number
ISDN settings Set up MSN
List of all
set up MSNs
Edit entry
Ringer melody
Delete entry
Display entry
Withhold no.
Forward. dest. (Enter phone number)
= On
164
Menu Tree
S1_SL1 / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / menuetree.fm / 02.10.2003
Lg.-dist. code National : 0 Change number
Internat.: 00 Delete number
Code : Change number
Int. enq. call
Ext. enq. call
Transfer(ECT)
Forward. base
Forward. netw.
Reject all
Busy on busy
Auto.forwarding
List of all
set up MSNs
Call beats data
Service centres (List of SMS serv-
ice centres)
Edit entry
Serv.centre on?or
Serv.centre off?
Delete entry
Installation
PC-Service
165
Menu Tree
S1_SL1 / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / menuetree.fm / 02.10.2003
Submenu "Answer Machine"
To begin: With the handset in idle status press v Answer Machine OK or v O, select
an answering machine, e.g., AM1 , and confirm with
OK.
Messages
List of all
messages AMx
Continue
Delete message
Call back
NET list
Repeat
Del.old mes-
sages
Display
Status to 'new'
Save number
Speed Slow
Normal speed
Fast
Very fast
Exit
Memos All memos
Memo list AMx
Continue
New memos Delete
curr.memo
Repeat
Delete old
memos
Status to 'new'
Speed Slow
Normal speed
Fast
Very fast
Exit
Record memo
Announce-
ments
Announcement 1
Announcement 2 Select
Announcem. only Record
Play back
Delete
Concl.announce
m
Record
Play back
Delete
166
Menu Tree
S1_SL1 / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / menuetree.fm / 02.10.2003
Settings Message/Memo Message length 1 minute
2 minutes
3 minutes
Maximum
Time stamp
Time control Activate? or Deactivate? – if time control is activated
Mon - Fri List of four
adjustable
Select ann. Announce-
ment 1
time periods
Announce-
ment 2
Announcem.
only
AM off
Start time
Saturday As for Mon-Fri
Sunday Ann. 1 24h
Ann. 2 24h
Ann. only 24h
AM off
No. of rings Automatic 2/4
1 ring tone
to
9 ring tone
Automatic pause
Remote options Remote control
Remote delete
Change AM-PIN
AM lock
AM quality High quality
Long recording
Aut. listen in Activate? or Deactivate? – if activated
Select HS
SMS notificat. Activate? or Deactivate? – if activated
Change number
Delete number
Activate? or Deactivate? – if currently activated
167
Menu Tree
S1_SL1 / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / menuetree.fm / 02.10.2003
Directory key and speed dial list key
Press the directory key s or the speed dial list key C, select an entry with s and
press v to open the required list. The following menu functions are available:
Display Number
Edit Entry
Delete Entry
VIP Entry For the directory only (
s)
Copy and Edit For the directory only (
s)
Copy Entry
Delete List
Copy List
Available Memory
168
Accessories
S1_SL1 / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / SAG_Accessories.fm / 02.10.2003
Accessories
MP Accessory
MP accessories of the S55 mobile phone can also be used.
Carrying cord
The carrying cord can be used to carry the handset or wear it around your neck.
Table charger EDC-510 (Order No. L36880-N5601-A101)
The table charger allows convenient charging of the telephone as well as an addi-
tional battery.
Mobile handsfree set HHS-510 (Order No. L36880-N5601-A108)
with PTT key (Push To Talk).
DCA-500 data cable
To connect the telephone to the serial RS232 port of your computer.
All accessories and batteries are available from your mobile phone retailer. Or you can
order direct online from the my-siemens Online Shop: www.my-siemens.de/shop or
call: 0180 5333 225 (0.12 Euro/min.).
The Online Shop also has the latest product information.
Only use original accessories. This will avoid possible damage to health and
property and ensure that all relevant regulations are being observed.
With the mobile handsfree set you can make a call while
keeping your hands free.
In addition, conversations can be heard on the handset.
169
Index
S1_SL1 / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / S1_SL1_isdnSIX.fm / 02.10.2003
Index
A
Accepting a call. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Access code
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Accessories
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
DCA-500 data cable
. . . . . . . . . . . 168
Handsfree set
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Table charger
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Accessories handsfree set
. . . . . . . . 168
Acknowledge tones
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Activate
Advisory tones
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Alarm clock
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Alert tone
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Answer
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Answering machine
. . . . . . . . . . . 137
Appointment
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Call waiting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Handset
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Keypad
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Logo (SMS)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Night service
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Predictive text
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Repeater
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Ringer
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Room monitor
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Walk and Talk mode
. . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Activating
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Automatic pause, answering
machine
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Listening in on the answering
machine
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Pickup from AM
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
SMS notification
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Voice announcement, answering
machine
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Activating automatic pause
. . . . . . . . 84
Activating Identify caller
. . . . . . . . . . 28
Activating/deactivating advisory
tones
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Activating/deactivating keypad
protection
. . . . . . . . . . . 10
Adjusting the loudspeaker volume
. . 103
Alarm clock
Activate
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Deactivate
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Setting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Alert tone
Activate
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Deactivate
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
AM1
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
AM3
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Analogue
Making a call with analogue
devices
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Anniversary
Clear
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Missed
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Saving
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Anniversary reminder call
. . . . . . . . . . 43
Announce only (answering
machine)
. . . . . . . . . . . 136
Announcement (answering
machine)
. . . . . . . . . . . 136
Answer
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Activate
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Deactivate
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Answer and record
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Answer and record, answering
machine
. . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Answering machine
. . . . . . . . . . . 2, 136
Activate
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Activating automatic pause
. . . . . . . 84
Activating/deactivating lock
. . . . . . . 85
AM in the network
. . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Assigning a receive MSN
. . . . . . . . . 81
Automatic listen in
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Automatic pickup
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Changing an announcement
. . . . . 138
Charge saving function
. . . . . . . . . . 83
Connecting an analogue AM
. . . . . 132
Deactivate
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Defining PIN
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Delete announcement
. . . . . . . . . 139
Deleting memos
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Deleting messages
. . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Hide
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16, 82
Memos
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Messages
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Notification of SMS
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Operating
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Phone numbers in the directory
. . . 145
Play back messages
. . . . . . . . . . . . 141
170
Index
S1_SL1 / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / S1_SL1_isdnSIX.fm / 02.10.2003
Playback speed
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Playing back an announcement
. . 139
Playing back memos
. . . . . . . . . . . 143
Record memo
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Recording an announcement
. . . . 138
Returning a call during playback
. . 142
Selecting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Setting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Setting recording quality
. . . . . . . . 83
Setting recording time
. . . . . . . . . . 83
Setting the time control
. . . . . . . . . 85
Show
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16, 82
Specifying the rings before AM
starts
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Spoken date/time
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Two-way recording
. . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Answering machine see also
Network mailbox
Answering machine/mail box
Configuring for fast access
. . . . . . 125
Viewing message
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Appointment
Activate
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Cancelling
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Clear
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Missed
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Setting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Setting the ringer
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Area code
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Area prefix, see area code
Assign
Phone number (MSN)
. . . . . . . . . . 112
Receive MSN
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Ringer melody for MSN
. . . . . . . . . 114
Send MSN
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Assigning the ringer melody
. . . . . . 114
Automatic
Answer
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Last number redial
. . . . . . . . . . 12, 48
Line seizure
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
B
Balloon Shooter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Barging in, joining a call
. . . . . . . . . . 32
Base
Change
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Changing the name
. . . . . . . . . . . 103
Preparing to use
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Setting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Setting up
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7
Batteries
Charging
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9
Charging status display
. . . . . . .1, 2, 9
Display
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9
Inserting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9
Recommended
. . . . . . . . . . . . .7, 153
Battery charging status display
. . . . . . .9
Battery tone
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108
Belt clip
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10
Busy on Busy
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114
C
Call
Accept
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1, 2, 23
Continuing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
Ending
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1, 2, 22
Forward
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
Parking
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
Rejecting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
Setting the ringer
. . . . . . . . . . . . .105
Transfer
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .129
Transfer internally (connect)
. . . . . .22
Transferring
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
Two-way recording
. . . . . . . . . . . .140
Call costs, see Charges
Call forwarding
Activate/deactivate internally
. . . . .116
Defining number of rings
. . . . . . .116
External
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117
Gate telephone
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148
Switching
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119
Call group for gate telephone
. . . . . .146
Call Hold
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
Call PickUp
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
Call waiting
Activate
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122
Deactivate
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122
Callback
Accept
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
Activating
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
Checking the
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
Clear
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
When the call is not answered
. . . . .27
When the number is busy
. . . . . . . .27
Call-by-Call numbers
. . . . . . . . . .36, 72
Calling
External
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
Internal
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
171
Index
S1_SL1 / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / S1_SL1_isdnSIX.fm / 02.10.2003
Calling back a caller
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Calling back an SMS sender
. . . . . . . . 66
Calling back from calls list
. . . . . . . . . 51
Calling data
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Calling Line Identification
Withholding
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Calls
Forwarding
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Setting (external)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Calls list
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Delete an entry
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Opening the
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Cancel
Function
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1, 2
Process
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Cancel function
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1, 2
Care of the telephone
. . . . . . . . . . . 150
Carrying clip
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
CCBS
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
CCNR
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
CD
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
CF
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Change
Announcement for answering
machine
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Base name
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Display language
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Email address
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Long distance prefix
. . . . . . . . . . . 124
Loudspeaker volume
. . . . . . . . . . 103
Name for internal user
. . . . . . . . . 110
Ringer
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
SMS in the outgoing message list
. . 61
System PIN
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
User name for voice pattern
. . . . . . 45
Volume in handsfree mode
. . . . . . 25
Changing a user name
(voice pattern)
. . . . . . . . 45
Changing the display language
. . . . 102
Changing the long distance prefix
. . 124
Changing the name of the base
. . . . 103
Changing the system PIN
. . . . . . . . . . 91
Character set chart
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Charge status of the batteries
. . . . . 1, 2
Charges for the last call
. . . . . . . . . . . 75
Charging the batteries
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Check
Software version
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Status of the settings
. . . . . . . . . . 127
Check status
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Checking the software version
. . . . . 128
CLIP
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
CLIR
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
CNIP
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
COLP
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
COLR
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Conference call
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Confirmation tone
. . . . . . . . 10, 12, 108
Control key
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1, 2, 11
Copying
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Copying an email address
. . . . . . . . . . 47
Correcting wrong inputs
. . . . . . . . . . . 12
Cost overview
Clear
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
View
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Cost, see Charges
Cursor, see cursor
CW
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33, 122
D
Data cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Data transmission
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Answering a call
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Date and time
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Date setting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16, 94
Date/time
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
DCA-500 data cable
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Deactivate
Advisory tones
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Alarm clock
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Alert tone
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Answer
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Answering machine
. . . . . . . . . . . 137
Appointment call
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Appointment, cancelling
. . . . . . . . . 97
Call waiting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Handset
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Keypad
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Listening in on the answering
machine
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Logo (SMS)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Night service
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Notification of SMS on AM
. . . . . . . 89
Pickup on AM
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Predictive text
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Repeater
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Ringer
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Room monitor
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
172
Index
S1_SL1 / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / S1_SL1_isdnSIX.fm / 02.10.2003
Voice announcement, answering
machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Wake-up call
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Walk and Talk mode
. . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Deactivate SMS send centre
. . . . . . . . 56
Default settings
Handset
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Restore
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Defining authorisation
. . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Defining device type
. . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Delete
Anniversary
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Announcement for answering
machine
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Appointment
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Characters
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Cost overview
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Directory entry
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Email address
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Email directory
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Entry in speed dial list
. . . . . . . . . . 40
ISDN phone numbers
. . . . . . . . . . 112
Memos (answering machine)
. . . . 143
Messages (answering machine)
. . 143
SMS entry
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
SMS incoming message list
. . . . . . . 65
SMS outgoing message list
. . . . . . . 61
Voice patterns
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Delete key
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
De-registering
From SMS centre
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Handset
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Device type
Setting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Devices
Making a call with analogue
devices
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Dialling
Cancel
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
With the directory
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
With the speed dial list
. . . . . . . . . . 38
Dialling emergency numbers
. . . . . . . 93
Dialling pause
Enter
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1, 2
Directory
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Adding telephone number
to the directory
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Adding the phone number of an SMS
message sender
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Copying an entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39
Delete an entry
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
Dialling
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38
Display and edit an entry
. . . . . . . . .38
Key
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167
Marking an entry as VIP
. . . . . . . . . .40
Opening the
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .1, 2, 11
Order of entries
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .155
Phone numbers from SMS text
. . . .67
Selecting a phone number
. . . .41, 145
Selecting a telephone number
from the directory
. . . . . . . . . . . . .41
Send
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
Send an entry to a handset
. . . . . . .42
Storing a number
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .37
Use to input telephone number
. . . .41
Display
12/24 hour display
. . . . . . . . . . . . .94
Call charges
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73
Call duration
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72
Caller's phone number
. . . . . . . . . .24
Changing language
. . . . . . . . . . . .102
Cost overview
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75
Display keys
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11
In idle status
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13
Memory
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
Missed anniversaries
. . . . . . . . . . . .97
Missed appointments
. . . . . . . . . . .97
Network mailbox message
. . . . . . .126
Phone number (CLI/CLIP)
. . . . . . . . .23
Removing protective film
. . . . . . . . . .9
Display keys
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1, 2
Displaying call charges
. . . . . . . . . . . .73
Displaying the call duration
. . . . . . . .72
Door call forwarding
. . . . . . . . . . . . .149
E
Earpiece mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1, 2, 25
EATONI (predictive text)
. . . . . . .58, 155
ECT
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33, 129
Email address
Changing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46
Clear
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
Copying
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
Saving
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46
Viewing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46
Email directory
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46
Clear
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
Opening the
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
173
Index
S1_SL1 / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / S1_SL1_isdnSIX.fm / 02.10.2003
Emergency numbers
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Emoticon, see SMS
Enable
SMS send centre
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
End call key
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1, 2, 22
Enquiry call
External
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Internal
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Setting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Enter
Dialling pause
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1, 2
MSN
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Entry (directory)
Clear
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Display and edit
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Find and dial
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Error message, see SMS
Error tone
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12, 108
Errors when
Receiving an SMS
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Sending an SMS
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Escape key
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Exit
Call
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1, 2, 22
F
Fast access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Answering machine/mail box
. . . . 125
Finding an MSN
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
For access code, see
Forwarding a text message
. . . . . . . . 65
Forwarding calls
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
G
Game
Balloon Shooter
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Gate telephone
Call group
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Forwarding
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Making calls
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Getting started wizard
. . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Answering machine
. . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Device type
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Launching
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
MSN
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16, 17
PABX
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Receive MSN
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Send MSN
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Group call to internal users
. . . . . . . . 23
H
Handset
Activate
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1, 2, 10
As room monitor
(Walk and Talk mode)
. . . . . . . . . . 80
Belt clip
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Brief overview
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1, 2
Call
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Change for best reception
. . . . . . . . 21
Change to another base
. . . . . . . . . 21
Charging time
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Deactivate
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1, 2, 10
Default settings
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
De-register
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
GAP
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Idle status
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
List
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Muting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Operating
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Operating time
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Preparing to use
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Register on another base
. . . . . . . . . 21
Registering
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Restore factory settings
. . . . . . . . . 109
Settings (individual)
. . . . . . . . . . . 102
Transferring a call
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Use as room monitor
. . . . . . . . . . . 76
Using several
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Walk and Talk mode
. . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Handset charging times
. . . . . . . . . . 153
Handset idle status
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Handsfree
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Activate/deactivate
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Adjust volume
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 13, 25
Handsfree key
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1, 2
Handsfree set
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Hash key
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1, 2
Hearing aids
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Hide answering machine
. . . . . . . 16, 82
Hold the line
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
I
Incoming message list (SMS) . . . . 58, 63
Clear
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Opening the
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Initiate dialling
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1, 2
Initiate enquiry call
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Input language (SMS)
. . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Inserting the batteries
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
174
Index
S1_SL1 / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / S1_SL1_isdnSIX.fm / 02.10.2003
Internal
Call with a gate telephone . . . . . . 147
Enquiry calls
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Link up
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Making calls
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Internal user, changing name
. . . . . . 110
ISDN phone numbers (MSN)
Clear
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Setting up
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
K
Key 1 (answering machine) . . . . . . . 1, 2
Key click
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Key press (confirmation tone)
. . . . . 108
Keypad
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Activate
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Deactivate
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Keys
Control key
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1, 2, 11
Delete key
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Directory key
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Display keys
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1, 2, 11
End call key
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1, 2
Escape key
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Handsfree key
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1, 2
Hash key
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1, 2
Key 1 (answering machine)
. . . . . 1, 2
Last number redial key
. . . . . . . . . . 12
Menu key
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Menu+ key
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Message key
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1, 2
OK key
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
On/Off key
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1, 2
Recall key
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1, 2
Speed dial list key
. . . . . . . . . 1, 2, 167
Star key
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1, 2
Talk key
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1, 2, 22
L
Last number redial . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1, 2
Automatic
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Delete list
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Key
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Manually
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Last number redial key
. . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Last number redial list
. . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Launching the Getting started wizard
. 15
Line authorisation
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Linking, see SMS
Liquid, contact with . . . . . . . . . . . . .150
List
Delete last number redial list
. . . . . .49
Email directory
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46
Handsets
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11
Opening
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49
Speed dial list
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36
Listening in on the answering
machine
. . . . . . . . . . . . .88
Locking, activating/deactivating
keypad protection
. . . . . .10
Logo, see SMS
Loudspeaker volume
. . . . . . . . . . . .103
M
Making calls
Answering a call
. . . . . . . . . . . .23, 25
External
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
Handsfree
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
Identify caller
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28
Making an external call
. . . . . . . . . .22
Making an internal call
. . . . . . . . . .22
Rejecting a call
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
To several users
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
With the gate telephone
. . . . . . . .146
Manual last number redial
. . . . . . . . .48
Medical appliances
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7
Melody
Polyphonic
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107
Melody (ringer tone)
. . . . . . . . . . . .104
Memory
Answering machine
. . . . . . . . . . .138
Listen
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
SMS
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57
Memos, see Answering Machine
Menu
Back one menu level
. . . . . . . . . . . .12
End tone
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108
Key
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
Menu management
. . . . . . . . . . . .11
Opening the
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .1, 2, 11
Tree
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .161
Menu Tree
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .161
Menu+ key
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
Message key
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1, 2
Open list
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64
Opening lists
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49
Messages, see Answering Machine
Microphone
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1, 2
175
Index
S1_SL1 / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / S1_SL1_isdnSIX.fm / 02.10.2003
Missed
Anniversary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Appointment
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Move cursor
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
MP Accessory
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
MSN
Assigning the ringer melody
. . . . . 114
Enter
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Finding
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Receive MSN
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Send MSN
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Muting the handset
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
N
Navigating the input field . . . . . . . . 1, 2
Navigation in the input field
. . . . . . 1, 2
Network provider (numbers list)
. . . . 36
Night service
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Activate
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Deactivate
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Entering the start and end time
. . 100
Notes (spoken) see Memo
Number, see Phone number or Entry
O
OK key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
On/Off key
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1, 2
Open
Battery compartment
. . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Calls list
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Directory
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1, 2, 11
Email directory
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Internal list
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1, 2
Menu
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1, 2, 11
SMS attachment
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
SMS incoming message list
. . . . . . 64
Open the internal list
. . . . . . . . . . . 1, 2
Opening an attachment, see SMS
Opening the battery compartment
. . . 9
Operating time
Of the handset
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Operating time for handset
In room monitor mode
. . . . . . . . . . 76
In Walk and Talk mode
. . . . . . . . . . 79
Order in directory
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Outgoing message list
. . . . . . . . . 58, 60
P
PABX
Enter access code
. . . . . . . . . . 19, 129
Handset Service
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Text messages to the PABX
. . . . . . . 70
Parking
Call
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
PC interface
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Pickup
On answering machine
. . . . . . . . . . 89
Play back
Announcement for answering
machine
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Voice patterns
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Playback speed
Answering machine
. . . . . . . . . . . 143
Polyphonic melodies
. . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Predictive text
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62, 155
Activate/deactivate
. . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Prefix, see area code
Preparing the telephone
Handset
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Pre-setting the call forwarding
destination
. . . . . . . . . . 119
PTT key (Push To Talk).
. . . . . . . . . . . 168
Putting a call on hold
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Q
Questions and answers . . . . . . . . . . 150
R
Reading an SMS entry . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Recall key
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1, 2
Receive MSN
Assigning
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Assigning for answering machine
. . 81
Setting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Receiving an SMS
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 53, 63
Record
Announcement for answering
machine
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Call
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Memo for answering machine
. . . . 139
Voice patterns
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Recording quality
Answering machine
. . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Recording time
Answering machine
. . . . . . . . . . . . 84
176
Index
S1_SL1 / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / S1_SL1_isdnSIX.fm / 02.10.2003
Registering
Handsets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
SMS centre
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Registering/de-registering with an
SMS centre
. . . . . . . . . . . 57
Rejecting
Call
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Entire MSN group
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Removing protective film (display)
. . . . 9
Repeater
Activate
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Deactivate
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Repeater, see
Replying to a text message
. . . . . . . . 65
Reserving a line
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Reset, see Factory settings
Restoring factory settings
Handset
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Return to idle state
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Ring delay
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Setting up
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Ringer
Activate
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Changing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Deactivate
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Set volume
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Setting a melody
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Time control for volume
. . . . . . . . 104
Ringer on/off
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Room monitor
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Activate
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Deactivate
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Deactivating from an external
phone
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Setting the noise level
. . . . . . . . . . 77
Using in Walk and Talk mode
. . . . . 80
S
Safety precautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Security settings
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Select option (menu)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Selecting a menu entry
. . . . . . . . . . . 11
Send
Directory entry to a handset
. . . . . . 42
Directory to a handset
. . . . . . . . . . 42
SMS
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53, 58, 59
SMS in the outgoing
message list
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Send an e-mail, see SMS
Send centre, see SMS
Send MSN
Assigning
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113
Defining
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
Setting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
Setting up the list
. . . . . . . . . . . . .113
Service provider
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53
Set
Authorisation
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92
Recording quality
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .84
Recording time
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84
Send MSN
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
Set time by
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16, 94
Setting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81
Alarm clock
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94
AM playback speed
. . . . . . . . . . . .143
Appointment
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96
Base
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
Date
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16, 94
Display language
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .102
Enquiry call
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122
External calls
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104
Forward destination
. . . . . . . . . . . .99
Handset (individual)
. . . . . . . . . . .102
Loudspeaker volume
. . . . . . . . . . .103
Melody
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104
Name announcement
. . . . . . . . . .104
Noise level in room
monitor mode
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77
Receive MSN
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
Ringer for appointment
. . . . . . . . .105
Ringer for call
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .105
Ringer for wake-up call
. . . . . . . . .105
Ringer melody
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104
Ringer volume
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104
Send MSN
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
System
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110
Time
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16, 94
Time control
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104
Time control, answering machine
. .85
Volume
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104
Walk and Talk mode
. . . . . . . . . . . .79
Setting the forward destination
. . . . .99
Setting the name announcement
. . .104
Setting the noise level
(room monitor)
. . . . . . . .77
Setting up
Busy signal
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114
Group call group
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .120
177
Index
S1_SL1 / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / S1_SL1_isdnSIX.fm / 02.10.2003
ISDN phone numbers
. . . . . . . . . . 111
Rejecting for the MSN group
. . . . . 115
Ring delay
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Wait melody
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Setting up a group call group
. . . . . . 120
Setting up the busy signal
. . . . . . . . 114
Setting up the charge calculation
. . . . 73
Settings
Check status
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Checking the software version
. . . 128
Short Message Service, see SMS
Shortcut
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Show answering machine
. . . . . . . . . 82
Signal strength
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1, 2
Signal tone, see Advisory tones
SMS
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Activate send centre
. . . . . . . . . . . 56
Activating a logo
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Calling back message sender
. . . . . 66
Clear
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Copying an email address
. . . . . . . . 61
Deactivating a logo
. . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Deactivating send centre
. . . . . . . . 56
Delete incoming message list
. . . . . 65
Deleting the outgoing message list
. 61
Editing in the outgoing
messages list
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Emoticon
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Entering e-mail address
. . . . . . . . . 62
Errors when receiving
. . . . . . . . . . 71
Errors when sending
. . . . . . . . . . . 70
Forward
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Incoming message list
. . . . . . . . . . 63
Input language
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Installing a logo
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Installing a ringer tone
. . . . . . . . . . 69
Linking
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Managing SMS service centres
. . . . 54
Opening an attachment
. . . . . . . . . 68
Opening the incoming message list
64
Outgoing message list
. . . . . . . . . . 60
Phone numbers from SMS text
. . . . 67
Phone numbers in the directory
. . . 67
Read
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Receiving
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53, 63
Reply to
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Saving
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Self-help with error messages
. . . . . 71
Send
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53, 58, 59
Send centre . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Send e-mail
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Sending as an e-mail
. . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Sending messages in the outgoing
message list
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Sending to a PABX
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Storage capacity
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Text templates
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Writing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
SMS centres, managing phone
numbers
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
SMS notification
From answering machine
. . . . . . . . 89
Sound Manager
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Specifications
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Speed dial list
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Delete a single entry
. . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Dialling
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Edit a single entry
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Storing a number
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
View a single entry
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Speed dial list key
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1, 2
Standard characters
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Star key
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1, 2
Storage capacity, see SMS
Store entry (network mailbox)
. . . . . 126
Storing
Anniversary
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Email address
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Phone number in the speed
dial list
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
SMS
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Telephone number in the
directory
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Switch off, see Deactivate
Switching off an appointment
alarm
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
System settings
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
T
Table charger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Talk key
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1, 2, 22
Telephone
Care
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Contact with liquid
. . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Telephone number
Adding to the directory
. . . . . . . . . . 41
Assigning (MSN)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Display caller's (CLIP)
. . . . . . . . . . . . 23
178
Index
S1_SL1 / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / S1_SL1_isdnSIX.fm / 02.10.2003
Enter number of network
mailbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Finding your own
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
From the SMS text into the
directory
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Input from directory
. . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Into the directory (answering
machine)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Into the directory (SMS)
. . . . . . . . . 67
Managing numbers for
SMS centres
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Pick from directory
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Storing in the directory
. . . . . . . . . . 37
Storing in the speed dial list
. . . . . . 37
Withhold identification
. . . . . . . . . . 24
Text area (empty), see SMS
Text message, see SMS
Text templates, see SMS
Time control
Ringer volume
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Setting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Time control, answering machine
. . . 85
Toggling
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Tone
Battery tone
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Confirmation tone
. . . . . . . . . 10, 108
End of menu tone
. . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Error tone
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12, 108
Two-way recording
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
V
Vibration alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Viewing a message from the network
mailbox
. . . . . . . . . . . . 126
VIP phone number
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Voice patterns
Clear
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Playing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Recording
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Voice-activated dialling
. . . . . . . . 11, 43
Dialling
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Navigation in the input field
. . . . . 1, 2
Volume
Adjust in handsfree mode
. . . . . . . . 25
Loudspeaker volume
. . . . . . . . . . 103
Ringer volume
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Setting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
W
Wait melody
setting up
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123
Wake-up call
Deactivate
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95
Setting the ringer
. . . . . . . . . . . . .105
Walk and Talk mode
Activate/deactivate
. . . . . . . . . . . . .80
Using a handset as a room
monitor
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80
Warning tone, see advisory tones
Writing a text message
. . . . . . . . . . . .58
Wrong inputs (correcting)
. . . . . . . . . .12
1
C1: The handset at a glance
C1-C2 isdn / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / SAG_covers_I-II.fm / 02.10.2003
C1: The handset at a glance
End call and
On/Off key
End call
Cancel function
Return to idle state
(hold down)
Handset on/off
(in idle status,
hold down)
MENU
vuÛ
U
Speed dial list key
Open the speed dial list
Message key
Access to text messages,
caller list, answering
machine list (on Gigaset
with answering machine)
Handsfree key:
Switch from "earpiece"
to handsfree mode
Lights up: handsfree is
activated
Flashes: incoming call
Star key
Ringer on/off
(long press)
When texting: toggles
between upper/lower
case and digits
Charge status
= flat U fully
charged
= flashes: battery is
almost flat or is charging
Current functions and
display keys
The display keys give you
access to the functions
shown in the display
K
ey 1
A
nswering machine
(
long press)
Microphone
Hash key
Keypad lock on/off
(long press)
Recall key
Initiate enquiry call
Talk/directory key:
Top half:
Answer a call
Initiate dialling
Switch from handsfree
to "earpiece" mode
Bottom half:
Open directory
2
C2: The handset at a glance
C1-C2 isdn / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / SAG_covers_I-II.fm / 02.10.2003
C2: The handset at a glance
End call and
On/Off key
End call
Cancel function
Return to idle state
(hold down)
Handset on/off
(in idle status,
hold down)
MENU
vuÛ
U
Speed dial list key
Open the speed dial list
Message key
A
ccess to text messages,
c
aller list, answering
machine list (on Gigaset
w
ith answering machine)
D
irectory key:
O
pen directory
Star key
Ringer on/off
(long press)
When texting: toggles
between upper/lower
case and digits
Charge status
= flat U fully
charged
= flashes: battery is
almost flat or is charging
Current functions and
display keys
The display keys give you
access to the functions
shown in the display
Key 1
Answering machine
(long press)
Microphone
Hash key
Keypad lock on/off
(long press)
Recall key
Initiate enquiry call
Talk/Handsfree key:
Top half:
Answer a call
Initiate dialling
Switch from handsfree
to "earpiece" mode
Bottom half:
Switch from "earpiece"
to handsfree mode
Lights up: handsfree is
activated
Flashes: incoming call
3
Contents
C1-C2 isdn / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / C1_C2_isdnIVZ.fm / 19.11.2003
Contents
C1: The handset at a glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
C2: The handset at a glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Safety precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Representation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Preparing to use the handset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Rocker key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Correcting wrong inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Idle status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Menu operation, using "Setting Handsfree Volume" as an example . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Base station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Registering/de-registering handsets . . . . . . . . . . 14
Changing the base . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Making calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Making external calls and ending a call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Making an internal call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Answering a call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Withholding Calling Line Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Handsfree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Callback when the number is busy (CCBS) / when the call is not answered (CCNR) . 19
Functions during a call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Making a call to several users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Transferring calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Dealing with a waiting external call – Call Waiting (CW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Putting a call on hold (Call Hold) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Using the directory and other lists . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Directory and speed dial list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Last number redial list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Opening lists with the message key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Calls lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Making cost-effective calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Linking a call-by-call number with a phone number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
4
Contents
C1-C2 isdn / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / C1_C2_isdnIVZ.fm / 19.11.2003
SMS (text messages) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Before you can send and receive text messages from SMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Managing SMS service centres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Entering, editing or deleting phone numbers for SMS centres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Activating/deactivating SMS send centre . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Registering/de-registering with an SMS centre . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Sending a text message and the outgoing message list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Sending a text message to an e-mail address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Receiving text messages, incoming message list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Text messages to a PABX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Errors when sending and receiving a text message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Operating the answering machine directly . . . . . 52
Selecting an answering machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Activating/deactivating the answering machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Selecting announce only and AM mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Recording/changing announcements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Playing back/deleting announcements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Recording memos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Two-way recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Picking up a call while the answering machine is responding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Playing messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Returning a call during playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Playing a message to another caller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Playing back memos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Deleting messages/memos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Marking an old message or memo as "new" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Adding a number to the directory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Checking messages/memos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Setting the answering machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Assigning a receive MSN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Hiding/showing an answering machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Specifying the number of rings before the answering machine starts . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Activating/deactivating voice announcement of date and time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Setting the recording time and recording quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Activating/deactivating automatic pause . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Locking the answering machine, defining AM PIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Activating/deactivating automatic listen in on the handset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Activating/deactivating automatic pickup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Activating/deactivating automatic notification via text message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
5
Contents
C1-C2 isdn / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / C1_C2_isdnIVZ.fm / 19.11.2003
Using several handsets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Using a handset as a room monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Setting the Walk and Talk mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Date and Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Setting the date and the time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Changing the time mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Setting the alarm clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Setting an appointment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Security settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Changing the system PIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Emergency numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
System settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Changing the name for an internal party . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Setting up/deleting an ISDN phone number (MSN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Assigning a phone number (MSN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Assigning an MSN a ringer melody . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Forwarding external calls – Call Forwarding (CF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Activating/deactivating Call Waiting – (CW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Configuring the answering machine on the network for fast access . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Restoring the factory setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Individual handset settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Changing the display language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Activating/deactivating Auto Answer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Adjusting the loudspeaker volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Changing the ringer tone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Activating/deactivating advisory tones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Resetting a handset to the factory setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Operating with other devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Setting device type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Making calls with devices on the analogue connection (TAE connection) . . . . . . . . 95
Activating/deactivating repeater mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Operating when connected to a PABX . . . . . . . . . 97
Access code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Dialling options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Making calls with the door subscriber station . . 99
6
Contents
C1-C2 isdn / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / C1_C2_isdnIVZ.fm / 19.11.2003
Appendix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Contact with liquid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Questions and answers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Service (Customer Care) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Character set chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Guarantee certificate (United Kingdom) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Guarantee certificate (Ireland) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Predictive text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Menu Tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Main menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
"Base Settings" submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
"Voice Mail" submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Directory key and speed dial list key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
7
Safety precautions
C1-C2 isdn / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / sec_hints.fm / 19.11.2003
Safety precautions
!
Fit only the recommended rechargeable batteries (page 104) and of the
same type! Use no other types of batteries or non-rechargeable batteries, as
they could damage health and cause personal injury.
Ensure correct polarity when fitting rechargeable batteries, and use the bat-
tery type according to these instructions (you will see polarity symbols in the
handset's
battery compartments)
.
The operation of medical appliances may be affected. Be aware of the techni-
cal conditions within the particular environment (e.g. doctor's practice).
The handset may cause an intrusive "hum" in hearing aids.
Do not install the base in bathrooms or shower rooms (page 101). The hand-
set and base are not watertight.
Do not use the phone in environments subject to explosion hazard
(e.g. auto paint shops).
If you give your Gigaset to someone else, make sure you also give them the
operating manual.
Dispose of the batteries and phone in accordance with environmental regula-
tions.
Œ
ƒ
i
Not all of the functions described in these instructions are available in all
countries.
8
Representation
C1-C2 isdn / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / sec_hints.fm / 19.11.2003
Representation
Representation of the keys
Since the layouts of the keys on the C1 and C2 handsets described in this guide are dif-
ferent (page 11), a simplified representation has been chosen for the
Talk key: c
Directory key: h
Handsfree key: d
Gigaset C1:
Gigaset C2:
A table under a heading
A table under a heading indicates the bases or the handset on which this function is
available.
Example: A function associated with bases that have an answering machine:
Example: The room monitor on the Gigaset C2:
at the base:
CX150isdn SX150isdn CX253isdn SX255isdn SX353isdn
on handset:
C2
Rocker key:
Top half of the key =
Talk key
Bottom half of the key =
Directory key
Handsfree key
Rocker key:
Top half of the key =
Talk key
Bottom half of the key =
Handsfree key
Directory key
9
Preparing to use the handset
C1-C2 isdn / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / starting.fm / 19.11.2003
Preparing to use the handset
Removing protective film
Inserting the batteries
Insert the batteries ensuring correct polarity (see figure on left).
Place the cover on the battery compartment about 3 mm down from the latch and
push it up until it clicks into position.
Opening the battery compartment
Press on the ribbed section of the cover and push the cover downwards.
Charging batteries
1. The charging is indicated in the upper right of the display where the charging status
V flashes:
The display is protected by a plastic film.
Please remove the protective film!
W
Gigaset C2:
Use only the rechargeable batteries recommended by Siemens on
page 104! i. e. never use conventional (non-rechargeable) batteries or
other battery types as this may cause significant damage to health and
property. For example, the jacket of the battery could be destroyed (haz-
ardous). The phone could also malfunction or be damaged.
= Batteries (almost) flat V Batteries
2
/
3
charged
e Batteries
1
/
3
charged U Batteries fully charged
i
To register additional handsets, refer to page 14.
10
Preparing to use the handset
C1-C2 isdn / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / starting.fm / 19.11.2003
Attaching the belt clip
Push the belt clip onto the back of the handset until the lugs click into the recesses on
either side of the handset.
Activating/deactivating the handset
To activate the handset, press the end call key a and hold. You will hear a confirma-
tion tone (rising tone sequence).
To deactivate the handset, press the end call key
a again in the idle status and hold
(confirmation tone).
Activate/deactivate key block
You can lock the handset keypad if, for example, you are carrying the handset. This pro-
tects the keypad against inadvertent activation.
Press and hold the hash key R. You will hear a confirmation tone and the symbol Ø
will appear in the display.
To deactivate the keypad lock, press the hash key
R again and hold (confirmation
tone).
on handset:
C2
i
The deactivated handset activates automatically when placed in the base
or charger.
i
The keypad lock deactivates automatically when you receive a call. It
re-activates when the call is finished.
When the keypad lock is active, you cannot even call emergency num-
bers.
11
Preparing to use the handset
C1-C2 isdn / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / starting.fm / 19.11.2003
Rocker key
Gigaset C1: Talk/directory key
The talk/directory key is a rocker key that has two functions. You press the top half of
this key to initiate a call. You press the bottom half of the key to open the directory.
Gigaset C2: Talk/Handsfree key
The talk/handsfree key is a rocker key that has two functions. You press the top half of
this key to initiate a call. When you press the bottom half you initiate a call and the
handsfree function activates automatically.
Display keys
The display keys are the horizontal rocker keys just below the display. Their function
changes depending on the particular operating situation. The current function is shown
in the display directly above the key to which it relates.
Example:
The various display symbols have the following meanings:
Rocker key:
Top half of the key = Talk key
Bottom half of the key = Directory key
Rocker key:
Top half of the key = Talk key
Bottom half of the key = Handsfree key
Display keys
MENU
vuÛ
Display key functions
Display icon Meaning when pressed
Þ
Last number redial key: Opens the list of the last 10 numbers you dialled.
OK
OK key: Confirms menu function or confirm an input and store.
MENU
Menu key: Activates the main menu when in standby.
Open a status-dependent menu while making a call.
INT
INT key: Dials internally to make a call to other handsets connected to the same
base.
ts
Scrolls up / down.
uv
Moves cursor left / right.
Û
Delete key: Deletes input from right to left one character at a time.
12
Preparing to use the handset
C1-C2 isdn / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / starting.fm / 19.11.2003
Correcting wrong inputs
After a correct input you will hear a confirmation tone (rising tone sequence). An incor-
rect input is indicated by an error tone (descending tone sequence). You can repeat the
input.
If you have entered the wrong characters when entering figures or text you can correct
this as follows:
Deleting characters to the left of the cursor with
Û
To correct a telephone number or text, use the display keys uv to move the cursor
to the right of the incorrect character. Now press the display key
Û. The character is
deleted. Now enter the correct character.
Inserting characters to the right of the cursor
If you have omitted a character, use the display keys
uv to go to the place where
you want to insert the character, and key it in.
Overwriting characters
The number of digits for entering the date or time is predetermined and the field is pre-
configured. Using the display keys
uv, position the cursor on the digit that is to be
changed and overwrite it.
Idle status
Display in idle status (example)
Gigaset C1:
Gigaset C2:
Reverting to idle status from anywhere in the menu:
Press the end call key a and hold or
Press no key: The display automatically reverts to the idle status after 1 minute.
Changes which you have not confirmed/stored by pressing
OK will be rejected.
Only available with Gigaset with
answering machine: answering
machine activated
×V
12:50
12.04.03
INT Þ MENU
×V
12:50
12.04.03
INT
Þ¼ MENU
Only available with Gigaset with
answering machine: answering
machine activated
13
Preparing to use the handset
C1-C2 isdn / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / starting.fm / 19.11.2003
Menu operation, using "Setting Handsfree Volume" as an example
Base station
A few more settings are required to operate your phone:
Date and time unless set by the phone network (page 74)
On Gigaset with integrated answering machine: Hiding/showing answering
machine 1 … 3 (page 63)
Enter MSNs for your phone connection (page 81)
Set type of device for the devices connected (page 95)
Set receive MSN (page 83)
Outside line code (when using a PABX page 97).
You can make the settings with the C1 and C2 handsets, and also with other handsets.
1. MENU Press the display key. The menu opens.
2.
s
Press the display key repeatedly until Audio Settings appears on the
screen.
3. OK Confirm with the display key.
4.
s
Press the display key repeatedly until Handsfree Volume appears on the
screen.
5. OK Confirm with the display key.
6. uv Press the left or right display key to select the volume (1–5).
7. OK Now press the display key to confirm the setting.
8.
a
Press and hold the end call key to return to the idle status.
14
Registering/de-registering handsets
C1-C2 isdn / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / registering_hs.fm / 19.11.2003
Registering/de-registering handsets
On some bases, your Gigaset C1 or C2 handset is registered automatically. In any event,
you can register your Gigaset C1 or C2 handset manually.
Your C2 Gigaset handset can be registered on up to four bases.
Automatic registration
To register for the first time, place the deactivated handset in the base with the display
facing upwards. The registration procedure takes about 1 minute. The handset auto-
matically receives the lowest free internal number from the range Int.11 to Int.16.
If all the internal numbers for wireless terminals have already been assigned on your
phone, please de-register another handset that you no longer require before registering
a new one (page 15).
Manual registration
If all the internal numbers for wireless terminals have already been assigned on your
phone, please de-register another handset that you no longer require before registering
a new one (page 15).
You must initiate handset registration on the handset and on the base.
1. Preparing the base for registration (see operating instructions for the base).
2. On the handset (within 30 sec.)
After registration the handset reverts to idle status.
at the base:
CX100isdn CX150isdn SX100isdn SX150isdn
MENU
Open the menu.
s Handset Settings OK
Select the menu item and confirm.
s Register Handset OK
Select the menu item and confirm.
s Base 1 OK
Select base (1–4) and confirm, e. g. Base 1.
~ OK
Enter system PIN of the base (set at the factory:
0000) and confirm. Registering appears in the dis-
play along with the name of the base
e. g. Base 1.
Once the handset has located the base, the list of
free internal numbers is shown in the display.
s Int.11 OK
Select internal number and confirm, e. g. Int.11.
i
The handset interrupts the base search after 60 seconds. If registration
has not been completed within this time, repeat the procedure.
15
Registering/de-registering handsets
C1-C2 isdn / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / registering_hs.fm / 19.11.2003
De-registering handsets
You can de-register any registered handset from any registered Gigaset C1 or C2
handset.
Changing the base
The following settings may be made if your handset is registered with more than one
base:
Set to one specific base, e.g. the base at home or the base at the office.
Set to the base with the best reception (Best Base). This setting will automatically
select whichever base has the best reception.
MENU
Open the menu.
s Base Settings OK
Select the menu item and confirm.
s Handset Settings OK
Select the menu item and confirm.
~ OK
Enter system PIN if required (page 78).
s Setup user OK
Select the menu item and confirm.
s De-reg. device OK
Select the menu item and confirm.
s Int.16 OK
Select the handset that you wish to de-register and
confirm, e. g. Int.16.
a
Hold down (return to idle status).
on handset:
C2
MENU
Press display key to open menu.
s Handset Settings OK
Select the menu item and confirm.
s Select Base OK
Select the menu item and confirm.
s OK
Select one of the registered bases or Best Base and
confirm.
16
Making calls
C1-C2 isdn / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / telephony.fm / 11.09.2003
Making calls
Making external calls and ending a call
External calls are calls using the public telephone network.
Making an internal call
Internal calls are calls between handsets that are registered with the same base. These
calls are free.
You can either call a specific handset or all registered internal users at the same time
("group call").
Calling a specific handset
~c
Enter the phone number and press the talk key. The
phone number is dialled.
End the call:
a
Press end call key.
i
You can also press the talk key c first (you hear the dialling tone)
and then enter the number.
You can use the end call key a to cancel the dialling operation.
You can also end a conversation by placing the handset in the base.
i
If you receive a call during an internal call or group call, the call is not
interrupted. You will hear a call waiting tone.
INT
Open Internal call.
either ...
~
Enter the number of the internal party you want.
or ...
MENU
Open the menu.
s Int.11 OK
Select and confirm the internal number you want,
e. g. Int.11.
17
Making calls
C1-C2 isdn / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / telephony.fm / 11.09.2003
Starting a group call to all internal users
You can make a group call to all other registered internal users from any handset. In the
supplied condition, this option is activated.
The first internal user to pick up the call is connected with you.
Answering a call
Your handset rings, the call is displayed on the screen and the handsfree key d flashes.
Press the talk key
c or the handsfree key d to accept the call.
If the handset is in the base/charger and the Auto Answer function is activated
(page 90), then you just need to lift the handset out of the base/charger to take the call.
Withholding Calling Line Identification
Precondition: The "Withhold Calling Line Identification" feature is supported by your
network provider.
When supplied, your phone number is displayed on the phone of the person you are
calling (CLIP – for outgoing connections) and the caller's phone number is displayed on
your handset (COLP – for incoming connections).
You can withhold this Calling Line Identification (CLIR – for outgoing connections,
COLR – for incoming connections). CLIP/CLIR are paired with COLP/COLR: If you with-
hold Calling Line Identification both – CLIR and COLR – are activated.
INT
Initiate an internal call.
either ...
P
Press the star key.
or ...
MENU
Open the menu.
s Collective call OK
Select the menu item and confirm.
either ...
c
Press the talk key.
or ...
d
Press the handsfree key.
CLIP Calling Line Identification Presentation = Display of the phone number in out-
going calls
CLIR Calling Line Identity Restriction = Withholding of the phone number display in
outgoing calls
COLP Calling Line Identification Presentation = Display of the phone number in
incoming calls
COLR Calling Line Identity Restriction = Withholding of the phone number display in
incoming calls
18
Making calls
C1-C2 isdn / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / telephony.fm / 11.09.2003
Displaying caller's phone number
Precondition: Calling Line Identification is activated for the caller.
Screen display with CLIP
With Calling Line Identification, the caller's telephone number is displayed on the hand-
set screen. If you have stored an entry for this number in your directory, the directory
entry will be displayed instead of the number, e. g. "Anna".
unknown is displayed on the screen if the caller's phone number is not identified.
Withholding phone number identification
If you do not wish your phone number to be revealed to the person you are speaking to
you can withhold identification of your phone number specifically for the next call or
else for all calls. If set for all calls, the phone number is withheld both for outgoing calls
(CLIR) and for incoming calls (COLR).
Withholding or permitting identification of your phone number for all calls
By factory default, Withhold no. is not activated.
Telephone number or "Anna"
U
1234567890
for private
MENU
Receive MSN that is being called
MENU
Open the menu.
s Base Settings OK
Select the menu item and confirm.
s Settings OK
Select the menu item and confirm.
s ISDN settings OK
Select the menu item and confirm.
s Withhold no. OK
Select the menu item and confirm ( = activated).
a
Long press (back to idle status).
19
Making calls
C1-C2 isdn / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / telephony.fm / 11.09.2003
Handsfree
Activating/deactivating handsfree
As soon as you terminate the handsfree mode you switch to "earpiece mode" and con-
tinue the call on the handset.
Adjusting the volume while in handsfree mode
A call is in progress and handsfree is activated.
Callback when the number is busy (CCBS) / when the call is not
answered (CCNR)
Precondition: The exchange supports this service.
Ringback when busy – CCBS (Completion of calls to busy subscriber)
The user you are calling is currently making a call. Automatic callback saves you making
repeated attempts to dial the number.
Callback when the call is not answered – CCNR (Completion of Calls No Reply)
If the user you are calling does not answer you can arrange automatic callback. As soon
as the user has finished a call and the line is free again you will be rung back. The call-
back request is automatically cancelled after about 2 hours (depending on the
exchange).
Activate while dialling:
~d
Enter the phone number and press the handsfree
key (instead of the talk key
c).
Activate during a call:
d
Press the handsfree key.
Deactivate handsfree:
c
Press the handsfree key.
i
If you wish to place the handset in the base during a call you must press
the handsfree key
d and hold it down while you position the handset in
the base.
d
Press the handsfree key again.
uvOK
Decrease or increase the volume and confirm.
20
Making calls
C1-C2 isdn / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / telephony.fm / 11.09.2003
Activating callback
The number you are calling is busy or your call is not answered:
Accepting a callback
The handset rings with a special ring and the display shows the callback number.
Cancelling callback
Before callback is signalled:
When callback is being signalled:
Precondition: The handset is ringing and the screen displays the callback number.
MENU
Open the menu.
CALLBCK OK
Press the display key.
Wait for confirmation from the exchange.
c
Press the talk key. The connection is established.
MENU
Open the menu.
s Base Settings OK
Select the menu item and confirm.
s Status OK
Select the menu item and confirm. The status list is
displayed (
= activated).
s Callback OK
Select the menu item and confirm. The current call-
back number is shown on the screen.
MENU
Open the submenu.
either ...
Check:
s Back OK
Confirm.
or ...
Cancel:
Delete OK
Confirm. The callback function is cancelled.
MENU
Open the menu.
Delete OK
Confirm. The callback function is cancelled.
21
Functions during a call
C1-C2 isdn / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / during.fm / 19.11.2003
Functions during a call
Making a call to several users
You initiate a call to several users through an enquiry call. You can then speak to the
other users either one at a time ("toggling", page 23) or at the same time ("conference
call", page 23).
An enquiry call may only be made when you are making an external call.
External enquiry call
You wish to call another external user during an external or internal call.
Initiate enquiry call:
The call to the first user is now put on hold.
Make a call to the second external user:
either ...
MENU
Open the menu.
Enquiry call OK
Select the menu item and confirm.
or ...
S
Press the recall key.
~
Enter the second user's telephone number.
You can also make a call via the directory or other
lists (page 26).
If the second external user you have dialled is
busy:
MENU
Open the menu.
Back OK
Confirm to return to the first user.
If the second external user rings:
either ...
Toggle (page 23):
ts
Swap between callers.
or ...
Conference call (page 23):
MENU
Open the menu.
s Conference OK
Select the menu item and confirm.
or ...
Transfer the call (page 24).
22
Functions during a call
C1-C2 isdn / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / during.fm / 19.11.2003
Internal enquiry call
You wish to call an internal user during an external call.
Initiate an internal enquiry call:
The call to the first user is now put on hold.
Make a call to the internal user:
either ...
INT
Open Internal call.
or ...
MENU
Open the menu.
Enquiry call OK
Confirm.
INT
Open Internal call.
or ...
S
Press the recall key.
INT
Open Internal call.
either ...
~
Enter the number of the internal party you want.
or ...
MENU
Open the menu.
s LIST OK
Open list of handsets.
s Int.11 OK
Select and confirm the internal number you want,
e.g., Int.11.
If the internal user you have dialled is busy:
MENU
Open the menu.
Back OK
Confirm to return to the external user.
The internal party has answered:
either ...
Toggle (page 23):
ts
Swap between callers.
or ...
Conference call (page 23):
MENU
Open the menu.
s Conference OK
Select the menu item and confirm.
or ...
Transfer the call (page 24).
23
Functions during a call
C1-C2 isdn / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / during.fm / 19.11.2003
Toggling
Precondition: You have established an enquiry call (page 21 and page 22).
There is both an active call (the one established with an enquiry call) and a held call (the
first). You can speak to both callers one at a time.
Use
ts to swap between the two callers.
End enquiry call/toggling:
Conference call
Precondition: You have established an enquiry call (page 21 and page 22).
There is both an active call (the one established with an enquiry call) and a held call (the
first). In a conference call you can speak to both other callers at the same time.
It is possible to conduct two conference calls at the same time on one base.
Establishing a conference
You are making an enquiry call. The first caller is put on hold.
either ...
End the call that is currently active:
MENU
Open the menu.
End OK
Confirm. You return to the waiting caller.
or ...
a
Press the end call key.
The active connection is ended. You will be called
back automatically by the person on hold.
i
You can make a conference call with
two external users or
with one internal user and one external user.
MENU
Open the menu.
s Conference OK
Confirm to set up a conference call.
24
Functions during a call
C1-C2 isdn / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / during.fm / 19.11.2003
Ending a conference
You have several options for ending a conference call:
Transferring calls
Transferring a call to an external number – ECT (Explicit Call Transfer)
Precondition:It is only possible to transfer a call if the network provider or the exchange
also supports ECT. If this is not the case, then the external call is disconnected. The
number cannot be called back.
You are making an external call and would like to transfer it to another external user.
Establish an external enquiry call (page 21), and then press the end call key
a (even
before the other party has answered) to transfer the call.
Transferring a call to another handset
You are making an external call and would like to transfer it to another handset.
Establish an internal enquiry call (page 22), and then press the end call key
a to trans-
fer the call. You can press the end call key before the second user has responded.
either ...
You end the conference:
a
Press the end call key
The conference call is ended; the two other users
will hear the busy tone.
or ...
You change the conference to an enquiry call:
MENU
Open the menu.
INDIV. OK
Confirm to change the conference to an enquiry call
(page 21 and page 22).The connection that was
active immediately before the conference was estab-
lished becomes the active call again.
25
Functions during a call
C1-C2 isdn / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / during.fm / 19.11.2003
Dealing with a waiting external call – Call Waiting (CW)
Precondition: Call Waiting (CW) has been set up (page 87).
You hear the call waiting tone (short beep) if you receive an external call while conduct-
ing another call (internal or external). The caller's number or name will appear in the
display if Calling Line Identification is enabled.
There are three options for dealing with a waiting external call:
Accept the waiting call – enquiry call:
Reject the waiting call:
Change caller:
Putting a call on hold (Call Hold)
Putting an external caller on hold:
You are conducting an external call.
Press the display key INT. The external caller is put on hold. You can initiate an internal
enquiry call (page 22).
Putting an internal caller on hold:
You are conducting an internal call.
MENU
Open the menu.
Accept OK
Confirm.
You accept the waiting call and the first call is put on
hold.
To toggle between both callers see page 23, for a
conference call see page 23.
MENU
Open the menu.
s Reject OK
Select the menu item and confirm.
i
If you reject the call waiting tone on your handset, it can still be heard on
other registered handsets.
a
End your current call. The waiting call becomes a
normal call.
c
Press the talk key to accept the call.
MENU
Open the menu.
Enquiry call OK
Confirm.
The internal caller is put on hold.
26
Using the directory and other lists
C1-C2 isdn / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / directories.fm / 19.11.2003
Using the directory and other lists
Directory and speed dial list
The directory makes dialling easier for you. The speed dial list is a special directory in
which you can store additional important numbers such as private telephone numbers
and the prefixes of network providers (known as "call-by-call numbers"). You open the
speed dial list with the
C key.
The speed dial list is operated in just the same way as the directory, except for the way
in which entries are stored. For storing entries in the speed dial list, please refer to
page 27.
Gigaset C1:
You can store up to 50 telephone numbers in the directory.
In the speed dial list you can store up to 10 telephone numbers.
To open the directory, press the directory key
h.
Gigaset C2:
You can store up to 100 telephone numbers in the directory.
In the speed dial list you can store up to 10 telephone numbers.
You open the directory with the directory key
h. You can mark any directory entry as
"VIP".
You create the directory and speed dial list for your individual handset. You can send
the lists/individual entries to the other handsets if you want them to be available at
other handsets as well (page 30).
i
Please refer to the Character Set Chart (page 105) to see how to
enter text.
You can enter up to 32 digits for a number and up to 16 letters for a
name.
For information on the order of entries in the directory please refer to
page 106.
i
The EATONI predictive text helps you input names (page 109, this
feature is deactivated when you purchase your phone).
Please refer to the Character Set Chart (page 105) to see how to
enter text.
You can enter up to 32 digits for a number and up to 16 letters for a
name.
For information on the order of entries in the directory please refer to
page 106.
27
Using the directory and other lists
C1-C2 isdn / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / directories.fm / 19.11.2003
Storing a telephone number in the directory
Storing a telephone number in the speed dial list
You can assign a digit (0, 2–9) to up to nine entries on your speed dial list. When you
press and hold one of these digits, e.g. "3" together with the talk key
c you are imme-
diately connected to the telephone number that is assigned the number 3.
h
Open the directory.
either ...
The directory is empty:
OK
Press the display key to confirm the prompt.
or ...
There are already entries in the directory:
MENU
Press display key to open menu.
New Entry OK
Confirm.
... then
~ OK
Enter phone number and confirm.
~ MENU
Enter the name and press the display key.
Save Entry OK
Confirm. The entry is stored.
a
Long press (back to idle status).
i
If your phone is connected to a PABX you may have to enter the access
code (outside line code) as the first digit of your directory entry (refer to
the operating instructions of your PABX).
C Open the speed dial list.
either ...
The directory is empty:
OK
Press the display key to confirm the prompt.
or ...
There are already entries in the directory:
MENU
Press display key to open menu.
New Entry OK
Confirm.
~ OK
Enter phone number and confirm.
~ MENU
Enter the name and press the display key.
Save Entry OK
Confirm. The entry is stored.
MENU
Press display key to open menu.
s Shortcut OK
Select the menu item and confirm.
s Shortcut: 2 OK
Select the digit and confirm.
a
Long press (back to idle status).
i
Speed dial digits cannot be assigned more than once at a time.
28
Using the directory and other lists
C1-C2 isdn / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / directories.fm / 19.11.2003
Dialling with the directory/speed dial list
Viewing and editing an entry in the directory/speed dial list
Copying and editing a directory entry
So that you do not have to make a similar entry twice, you can create a copy and then
edit that entry.
hC
Open the directory or speed dial list.
either ...
Scroll to the entry:
s
Select entry.
c
Press the talk key. The number is dialled.
or ...
Enter the first letter:
~
Enter the first letter of the name.
s
Select entry.
c
Press the talk key. The number is dialled.
hC
Open the directory or speed dial list.
s MENU
Select the entry and press the display key.
s Edit Entry OK
Select the menu item and confirm.
~ OK
Change the number and confirm.
~ MENU
Change the name and press the display key.
Save Entry OK
Confirm. The entry is stored.
a
Long press (back to idle status).
on handset:
C2
h
Open the directory.
s MENU
Select the entry and press the display key.
s Copy and Edit OK
Select the menu item and confirm.
either ...
~ OK
Change the number and confirm.
or ...
~ OK
Edit the name and confirm.
MENU
Press display key to open menu.
Save Entry OK
Confirm. The entry is stored.
... then
29
Using the directory and other lists
C1-C2 isdn / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / directories.fm / 19.11.2003
Marking a directory entry as VIP
You can mark directory entries of callers who are particularly important to you as "VIP"
(Very Important Person). You can also assign a particular melody to VIP numbers. You
can then tell who is calling you from the ringer melody. The VIP melody sounds after the
first ring tone.
Precondition: Calling Line Identification is activated (page 17).
Deleting a single entry or directory/speed dial list
OK
If you only edit the name, you will see a message tell-
ing you that the number already exists. Press the dis-
play key to confirm the prompt.
a
Long press (back to idle status).
i
The "VIP" setting and the voice patterns (in the case of the Gigaset with
answering machine) are not copied.
on handset:
C2
h
Open the directory.
s MENU
Select the entry and press the display key.
s VIP Entry OK
Select the menu item and confirm ( = On).
s OK
You hear the current melody. Select a melody (1–10)
(page 91) and confirm. The number ends with "VIP".
a
Long press (back to idle status).
hC
Open the directory or speed dial list.
s MENU
Select the entry and press the display key.
either ...
Delete a single entry:
s Delete Entry OK
Select the menu item and confirm.
or ...
Delete the entire directory/speed dial list:
s Delete List OK
Select the menu item and confirm.
OK
Press the display key to confirm the prompt.
... then
a
Long press (back to idle status).
30
Using the directory and other lists
C1-C2 isdn / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / directories.fm / 19.11.2003
Adding a displayed telephone number to the directory
When a telephone number appears in the display (CLIP) you can add it to your directory.
You can do this while dialling from the last number redial list, from the calls list/answer-
ing machine list (on a Gigaset with answering machine) or during a call.
Selecting a phone number from the directory
If you are prompted to enter an external telephone number while you are operating
your telephone, you can use the directory to do this.
Precondition: The input field for external telephone numbers is displayed.
The telephone number is added to the entry field.
Sending a single entry or complete list to a handset
You can send single entries or the complete list to another handset that is registered on
the same base. This avoids entering information twice. VIP settings and speed dial
(shortcut) digits are not sent.
MENU
Press display key to open menu.
s Copy to Directory
OK
Select the menu item and confirm.
OK
Confirm the telephone number.
~ MENU
If required, enter the name and press the display key.
Save Entry OK
Confirm. The entry is stored.
a
Long press (back to idle status).
hC
Open the directory or speed dial list.
... then
s OK
Select entry and confirm.
on handset:
C2
hC
Open the directory or speed dial list.
s MENU
Select the entry and press the display key.
either ...
Send a single entry:
s Send Entry OK
Select the menu item and confirm.
or ...
Send complete list:
s Send List OK
Select the menu item and confirm.
... then
s INT 2 OK
Select the handset to which you wish to send the
entry or list and confirm, e. g. handset 2. Your selec-
tions are sent to that handset.
a
Long press (back to idle status).
31
Using the directory and other lists
C1-C2 isdn / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / directories.fm / 19.11.2003
After an entry has been sent, you are asked if you want to send another entry. If you
confirm with the display key
OK, you can select more entries to send; once you have
finishing sending, press the "end call" key
a.
The successful transfer of data is confirmed with a message and with the confirmation
tone at the receiving handset. Existing entries in the receiving handset are retained.
Entries with identical numbers or names are not overwritten. The number of entries
that are stored in the receiving handset may therefore differ from the number of entries
that you have sent to it.
The transfer is cancelled if the phone rings and you take the call or if the memory of the
receiving handset is full. The last entry to be transferred appears in the display.
Last number redial list
The last number redial list contains the ten last dialled numbers. If names have also
been stored for these numbers in the directory, then these names will be displayed. If
there are several identical entries only the most recent will be displayed. If the last
number redial list is full, the oldest entry will be deleted. You can use the last number
redial list to redial the telephone numbers.
Manual last number redial
Deleting a single telephone number or the entire last number redial list
Open the last number redial list.
sc
Select the entry and press the talk key. The phone
number is dialled.
i
To add or change the telephone number, open the last number redial
list, then press MENU and confirm Use Number
with OK.
To add a telephone number from the last number redial list to the
directory (page 30), press
MENU s Copy to Directory OK.
Open the last number redial list.
s MENU
Select an entry and open the menu.
either ...
Delete a single telephone number:
s Delete Entry OK
Select the menu item and confirm.
a
If there still entries on the list, press the key and hold
(back to idle status).
or ...
Delete the entire last number redial list:
s Delete List OK
Select the menu item and confirm.
32
Using the directory and other lists
C1-C2 isdn / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / directories.fm / 19.11.2003
Opening lists with the message key
Providing a new entry is present in the relevant list, you can open the following lists
using the message key
f:
1. Incoming SMS message list Textmessage(SMS) (page 46)
2. List of missed calls Missed calls (page 32)
3. Answering machine lists AM1 , AM2 , AM3 (on Gigaset with answering machine).
These lists display the calls, messages and text messages belonging to the receive MSNs
that are assigned to the handset.
You hear an advisory tone as soon as a new entry (calls, messages on an integrated
answering machine and/or text message) arrives in one or more lists. The
Û icon is
displayed on the screen. On the C1 handset, the Message key
f also flashes.
If you press the f key, the following is displayed:
If only one list has new entries, you will see the first new entry in that list.
Open entry:
s (Select entry) OK
If several lists have new entries, those lists are offered for your selection.
Open entry:
s (Select list) OK, s (Select entry) OK
If there are no new entries, then the message "No new messages" is shown briefly.
Then the list of missed calls is opened.
Calls lists
There are two calls lists:
the list of missed calls
This contains all the calls that have not been accepted or have been rejected plus all
calls responded to by an answering machine for which there is no message
attached.
the list of accepted calls
This contains all the calls accepted by an internal user or answering machine.
The calls in these lists are displayed on a receive MSN assigned to the handset. In each
case the phone numbers for the last 20 calls are stored. The oldest entry is deleted if a
calls list is full and new entries are added. The most recent entry is at the top of the list
and the oldest at the bottom.
A caller is entered in the relevant calls list at the end of a call. If a caller's number has
been transferred and this phone number is entered in the directory, then the caller's
name is inserted. If there are several identical entries only the most recent will be dis-
played in the two lists. A caller can appear in both lists if one call he makes is answered
and another not. If an outgoing call is made to a caller who is entered in the list of
missed calls, then this entry is transferred to the last number redial list and deleted from
the list of missed calls.
33
Using the directory and other lists
C1-C2 isdn / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / directories.fm / 19.11.2003
Opening calls lists
You can open both calls lists via the menu. The list of missed calls can also be opened
via the
f key.
Calling back a caller
Precondition: The caller's number has been identified.
Open the list of missed or accepted calls (page 33). Now:
Callback begins at once. The phone number is deleted from the calls list and entered in
the last number redial list.
Displaying an entry
Open the list of missed or accepted calls (page 33). Now:
MENU
Open the menu.
s Base Settings OK
Select the menu item and confirm.
either ...
s Accepted calls OK
Select the menu item and confirm.
or ...
s Missed calls OK
Select the menu item and confirm.
i
If another internal user has already opened a calls list you cannot open it.
s
Select entry.
either ...
c d
Press talk key or handsfree key.
or ...
MENU
Open the menu.
Dial number OK
Confirm.
c d
Press talk key or handsfree key.
i
To a PABX: The access code (outside line code) is automatically put before
the phone number (page 97).
s MENU
Select entry and open the submenu.
s Display entry OK
Select the menu item and confirm.
34
Using the directory and other lists
C1-C2 isdn / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / directories.fm / 19.11.2003
Changing the caller's phone number
Open the list of missed or accepted calls (page 33). Now:
Adding an entry to the directory from the calls list
Open the list of missed or accepted calls (page 33). Now:
Deleting an entry from the calls list
Open the list of missed or accepted calls (page 33). Now:
s MENU
Select entry and open the submenu.
s Change number OK
Select the menu item and confirm. The number is
displayed.
~
Change the number.
MENU
Press the display key to open the submenu.
Save entry OK
Confirm.
s MENU
Select entry and open the submenu.
s Copy to dir. OK
Select the menu item and confirm.
OK
Confirm the telephone number.
~
Enter name (for text input see page 105).
MENU
Press display key to open menu.
Save Text OK
Confirm. The entry is stored.
a
Long press (back to idle status).
either ...
Delete a single entry:
s MENU
Select entry and open the submenu.
s Delete entry OK
Select the menu item and confirm. The entry is
deleted.
or ...
Delete all entries:
MENU
Open the submenu.
s Delete list OK
Select the menu item and confirm.
OK
Confirm the prompt.
a
Hold down (return to idle status).
35
Making cost-effective calls
C1-C2 isdn / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / charges.fm / 11.09.2003
Making cost-effective calls
Sign up with a network provider who offers particularly low-cost call rates (call-by-call).
You can use the speed dial list to manage your call-by-call numbers.
Linking a call-by-call number with a phone number
This function can be used to put a network provider's prefix in front of the telephone
number ("linking").
i
You manage entries in the speed dial list in the same way as entries in the
directory by opening the speed dial list with the
C key instead of the
directory. You will find instructions on storing, editing and deleting
entries starting on page 26.
C
Open the network access list.
sOK
Select the entry and press the display key.
Use Number OK
Confirm.
either ...
Enter the telephone number:
~
Enter the telephone number.
or ...
Select a number from the directory:
hsOK
Open the directory, select an entry and confirm.
c
Press the talk key. The number is dialled.
36
SMS (text messages)
C1-C2 isdn / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / sms.fm / 19.11.2003
SMS (text messages)
You can send and receive SMS text messages (Short Message Service) with your hand-
set. You can send an SMS to any fixed network or mobile phone network number. Your
SMS can be received as a text message by any device with SMS functionality (mobile
phone, PC, another telephone). If the recipient of your SMS does not have a phone with
SMS functionality, then the SMS is played back.
You can write, edit, read, delete or forward SMS text messages from any registered
handset that has SMS functionality and to which the same receive MSN has been
assigned. When several handsets with the same receive MSN are in use at any one time,
only one handset can access the SMS functions.
General
Text messages are exchanged between SMS centres that are operated by service pro-
viders. The telephone number of the SMS centres through which you wish to send and
receive text messages must be entered in your phone (page 38). Up to ten SMS centres
can be entered. The SMS Service Centre "Anny Way" and the provider's SMS service
are preconfigured at the factory. You can change the telephone numbers of the SMS
centres.
You can receive text messages via any of the SMS centres whose number you have
entered. Of course you must be registered to receive text messages with those SMS cen-
tres (page 40).
Your text message is sent through the SMS centre that is entered as the active send
service centre.
Before you can send and receive text messages from SMS
Calling Line Identification may not be permanently deactivated for the MSN used
(page 17).
You must be registered with your service provider to receive text messages
(page 40).
The handset must have Unrestricted authorisation to send an SMS. To receive an
SMS, Incoming only authorisation is adequate. This setting can only be made with
an S1, SL1 Komfort handset or on the SX303isdn, SX353isdn, CX203isdn,
CX253isdn base telephone
You must not allow the network provider to block the phone numbers you have
entered for the SMS centres.
In Germany, the SMS service is available exclusively to telephone numbers that are con-
nected with the local area network via Deutsche Telekom AG (you receive your tele-
phone bill from Deutsche Telekom). It is currently not possible to send a text message
if you have a call-by-call connection.
If the telephone of a receiver cannot receive an SMS in the fixed network, the SMS is
automatically read as a voice message. Between 7.00 and 22.00 hrs, these text mes-
sages are delivered immediately in the form of a telephone call. Text messages sent
after 22.00 hrs are stored and delivered the next day.
37
SMS (text messages)
C1-C2 isdn / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / sms.fm / 19.11.2003
If you have entered into a preselection contract with a network provider, ask whether
they support the "Fixed line SMS" feature. (Preselection means you are bound contrac-
tually to a network provider.)
In Switzerland, the SMS function is not supported on the ISDN network (as of Septem-
ber 2003).
Ask your service provider
what charges are billed for sending and receiving a text message,
which mobile phone operators you can send text messages to and which mobile
phone operators you can receive text messages from,
which functions your SMS service offers,
how you are registered with SMS centres which your phone may already be precon-
figured for – automatically by sending a message or by a special registration proce-
dure.
Managing SMS service centres
SMS messages are exchanged through SMS service centres. To send and receive a text
message, you require the phone number for your service provider's SMS centre. You
have to store this phone number in your telephone.
You may enter up to ten SMS centres in your telephone.
Sending an SMS – send centre
You must enter the phone number of the SMS centre you want to use for sending text
messages in your telephone and activate it as a "send centre" (page 38 and page 39).
This phone number will be used for sending all SMS messages.
As supplied, the "Anny Way" SMS centre has already been entered (number 0190
01504) and activated as the send centre. This means that, in Germany, you may send
text messages immediately.
You can activate another SMS centre as the active send service centre. The send centre
that was activated previously is then automatically deactivated.
Receiving an SMS
You can receive an SMS message via any SMS centre you have entered provided you
have registered with these SMS centres as an SMS recipient (if registered, see page 40).
38
SMS (text messages)
C1-C2 isdn / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / sms.fm / 19.11.2003
Entering, editing or deleting phone numbers for SMS centres
You can enter up to ten SMS centres.
Before entering or editing the number, please obtain information about special features
and what the SMS service provider offers.
MENU
Open the menu.
s Base Settings OK
Select the menu item and confirm.
s Settings OK
Select the menu item and confirm.
s Service centres OK
Select the menu item and confirm. The phone
number list appears.
s
Select entry, e. g. <empty>.
MENU
Open the submenu.
either ...
Create or edit an entry:
Edit entry OK
Confirm.
~
Enter the phone number of the SMS centre.
MENU
Press the display key to open the submenu.
Save entry OK
Confirm.
or ...
Delete an entry:
s Delete entry OK
Select the menu item and confirm.
a
Hold down (return to idle status).
i
If you delete the phone number of a send centre, then you must
activate another SMS centre to be the send centre in order to be able
to continue sending text messages.
If your telephone is connected to a PABX, you may have to prefix the
phone number with an access code (number with which you obtain
an exchange line, usually "0") (this depends on your PABX) see
page 50.
39
SMS (text messages)
C1-C2 isdn / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / sms.fm / 19.11.2003
Activating/deactivating SMS send centre
To send an SMS you must activate the phone number for the required SMS centre as the
send centre. By doing this you determine via which SMS centre the text message is to
be sent. Text messages can be received via all SMS centres entered, as long as you have
previously completed the corresponding registration procedure (see the next chapter)
to be recognized as an SMS-capable connection.
MENU
Open the menu.
s Base Settings OK
Select the menu item and confirm.
s Settings OK
Select the menu item and confirm.
s Service centres OK
Select the menu item and confirm. You will now see
the phone number list.
s
Select the required telephone number.
MENU
Open the submenu.
either ...
Activate SMS centre as the send centre:
s Serv.centre on? OK
Select the menu item and confirm. The display
changes to Serv.centre off? The SMS centre is acti-
vated as the send centre. In the list the phone
number of the SMS centre is marked with a
. The
previous send centre is automatically deactivated.
or ...
Deactivate SMS centre:
s Serv.centre off? OK
Select the menu item and confirm. SMS centre is
deactivated.
i
When the Service centres phone number list is opened, the display
jumps immediately to the send centre.
If you have not activated an SMS send centre you will not be able to
send an SMS, but you will be able to receive text messages from all
the SMS centres you have entered.
40
SMS (text messages)
C1-C2 isdn / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / sms.fm / 19.11.2003
Registering/de-registering with an SMS centre
In order to be able to receive text messages on your phone you must first register your
phone number with an SMS service provider. You can find out from the service provider
concerned which information you need to send to register and de-register.
To register with an SMS service provider you must first enter the phone number of the
SMS centre concerned and activate it as the send centre.
After you have registered, remember to re-activate the SMS centre as the send centre
via which you wish to send text messages.
Registering/de-registering with the "Anny Way" SMS service centre
To register you only need to send an SMS message to any recipient within the fixed net-
work or mobile phone network. Charges with be made for the SMS you have sent.
De-registering is only possible indirectly by deleting the phone number for "Anny Way"
(0190 01504) from the list of SMS centres. Any SMS sent to you will no longer be deliv-
ered as a text message but as a voice message.
Registering/de-registering with the Deutsche Telekom SMS centre
To register with the Deutsche Telekom SMS centre, proceed as follows:
1. Activate the Deutsche Telekom SMS centre (0193010) as the send centre.
2. Send a text message with the text "REGISTER" to the destination phone number
8888. This text message is free.
3. Re-activate your preferred SMS send centre.
To de-register, send a text message with the text "DE-REGISTER" to the number 8888.
Any SMS sent to you will then be played back as voice messages.
Memory
The number of text messages that can be stored in the base depends on the size of the
messages (about 11 text messages of up to 160 characters each). The memory is used
for the incoming and outgoing message list. If the memory is full, the message "Text list
full! Please delete entries" is displayed. Delete text messages you no longer require from
the incoming and outgoing message lists.
You can check how much capacity your SMS memory has left (in %).
i
Take care to register the phone number (MSN) that is assigned to the
handset as send MSN (page 83), and with which you are sending the text
message. If you also want to send and receive text messages via other
handsets with different MSN's, then you must also have these phone
numbers registered.
MENU
Open the menu.
SMS OK
Confirm.
s Available memory OK
Select the menu item and confirm. Available mem-
ory is displayed in %.
41
SMS (text messages)
C1-C2 isdn / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / sms.fm / 19.11.2003
Sending a text message and the outgoing message list
Notes on writing and sending an SMS message
If you are interrupted as you are writing (by a call, an incoming SMS or because the
handset changes to idle status because of prolonged inactivity), the SMS is automati-
cally stored in the outgoing message list. You can continue writing the SMS later
(page 43).
Text messages that cannot be sent are assigned an error status (page 50) and are placed
in the incoming message list.
Text messages are only stored automatically if sending is interrupted. If you wish to
store a message then you must do so before it is sent.
Writing text messages
Gigaset C1:
A single text message can be up to 160 characters long.
Remember that the service provider cannot deliver a text message that contains Greek
or Cyrillic characters.
Gigaset C2:
A single text message can be up to 160 characters long. If your text is longer, it will be
sent automatically as a linked message. Up to four messages with 153 characters each
can be linked. This means you can enter up to 612 characters. Bear in mind that linked
messages incur correspondingly higher charges.
Remember that the service provider cannot deliver a text message that contains Greek
or Cyrillic characters. If you have set Greek or Russian as your display language there-
fore, you will need to change the input language before you write a message.
When you have opened the input window for the text message, press the display key
MENU first. From the menu, select Predictive Text Language and then press OK to
confirm your choice. Now select an input language that uses the Roman character set
(e. g. Deutsch or English). Press OK to confirm your selection and then briefly press
the "end call" key
a twice to return to the input window. The setting of the input lan-
guage only applies to the current text message.
Write text messages as follows:
i
Remember that some service providers will bill you for a cancelled call
to the SMS centre. Deutsche Telekom's SMS Service will not charge for an
interrupted call.
MENU
Open the menu.
SMS OK
Confirm.
Write message OK
Confirm. The input field opens.
~
Input your text (for text input see page 105).
42
SMS (text messages)
C1-C2 isdn / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / sms.fm / 19.11.2003
Saving text messages
Precondition: You have written a text message (page 41) and the input field is open.
The message is stored in the outgoing message list. It can be retrieved and sent at a
later time (page 43).
Sending a text message without saving it
Precondition: You have written a text message (page 41) and the input field is open.
i
Gigaset C2: You will be assisted as you write a text message by the
EATONI (page 109) predictive text feature. EATONI is activated in the sup-
plied condition. You can deactivate EATONI at any time by selecting
MENU,
sPredictive Text OK.
U
Hello Tom
ÛuvMENU
Text of the message
MENU
Press the display key to open the submenu.
s Save Text OK
Select the menu item and confirm. You can then
send the text message (page 42).
MENU
Press display key to open menu.
Send Text OK
Confirm.
either ...
~
Enter the recipient's number (with prefix).
or ...
Select a number from the directory:
h
Open the directory.
s OK
Select entry and confirm. The number appears in the
display.
... then
MENU
Press the display key to open the submenu.
Send OK
Confirm.
U
01234567
ÛuvMENU
43
SMS (text messages)
C1-C2 isdn / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / sms.fm / 19.11.2003
Examples of phone number inputs:
Opening the outgoing message list
The outgoing message list shows you:
Text messages which you saved before you sent them (page 42).
Text messages that could not be sent because, for example, you were interrupted
by an incoming call while you were writing the message.
However, the list only shows text messages that are assigned to the same send MSN as
the handset.
These messages are stored until you delete them.
Reading and deleting text messages in the outgoing message list
Precondition: You have opened the outgoing message list (page 43).
i
The recipient's number must always include the area code (prefix), even
if you are in that area.
08912345678 A national telephone number within the fixed
network
077x1234567 A number within the mobile phone network
MENU
Open the menu.
SMS OK
Confirm.
s Outbox OK
Select the menu item and confirm. The figure shown
indicates how many text messages are stored in the
outgoing message list.
You can scroll through the list using
sand t.
i
When the memory is full, you are prompted to delete messages
(page 40).
s
Select SMS.
MENU
Open the menu.
either ...
Read SMS:
Read textmessage OK
Confirm. Use s to view the continuation of the
text message in the display.
or ...
Delete SMS:
s Delete textmess. OK
Select the menu item and confirm.
44
SMS (text messages)
C1-C2 isdn / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / sms.fm / 19.11.2003
Deleting the entire outgoing message list
This function deletes all the messages in the outgoing message list.
Precondition: You have opened the outgoing message list (page 43).
Sending or editing text messages in the outgoing message list
Precondition: You have opened a text message in the outgoing message list to read
(page 43).
You can now send the message as described on page 42.
MENU
Open the menu.
s Delete list OK
Confirm.
OK
Press the display key to confirm the prompt.
a
Short press (back to idle status).
MENU
Open the menu.
either ...
Write and send a new text message:
Write Message OK
Confirm. The input field is opened (page 41). You
can write a new text message.
or ...
Edit and send a stored text message:
s Use text OK
Select the menu item and confirm. The input field is
opened with the contents of the stored text mes-
sage. You can edit the text.
45
SMS (text messages)
C1-C2 isdn / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / sms.fm / 19.11.2003
Sending a text message to an e-mail address
You can send a text message to an e-mail address. To do this you should write the recip-
ient's e-mail address at the start of the text message and send this text message to the
call number of the e-mail service of your SMS send centre.
Entering the e-mail address at the start of the text message
Enter the recipient's e-mail address at the start of your text message. Use a space to sep-
arate the e-mail address from the message text (e. g. for "Anny Way", Deutsche Tele-
kom) or, if required for other providers, by inserting a colon.
You can save the text temporarily with MENU,
s Save TextOK.
Gigaset C1:
Enter the "@" character using the hash key R (press x 2), the colon using the key Q
(press 8 times), and the space with 1 (press once).
Gigaset C2:
You can do this using the (page 109) predictive text.
If predictive text is on, enter "@" by giving the hash key
R 1 long and 1 short press.
If the predictive text feature is deactivated enter the character "@" using the hash
key R (press 2 times ), the colon using the Q key (press 8 times) and the space
character using the
1 (press once ).
Precondition: You are writing a text message (page 41) and the input field is open.
Entering the text of the message
~
Enter the full e-mail address and end it with a space
or a colon.
~
Enter the text. The text is always displayed on one
line.
MENU
Press display key to open menu.
Send Text OK
Confirm.
1 U
p.mai@ort.de Hello
ÛuvMENU
E-mail address, space,
SMS text (example).
46
SMS (text messages)
C1-C2 isdn / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / sms.fm / 19.11.2003
Sending a text message as an e-mail
You must send the text messages to the number for the e-mail service of your send
centre. The number for the "Anny Way" SMS centre is 6245, and for Deutsche Telekom
it is 8000.
Receiving text messages, incoming message list
Notes on receiving a text message
New SMS are signalled to all handsets with the same receive MSN (depending on the
features offered by the individual handset) by a message in the display, by flashing of
the message key
f and by an advisory tone. The date and time (transferred from the
SMS centre) are indicated for each SMS received.
The incoming message list contains only those text messages sent to a receive MSN to
which your handset is assigned. If no MSN's have been set up, then all text messages
received are shown on all handsets.
In the incoming message list new (unread) messages come before the old messages.
New and old messages are sorted according to their time of arrival: oldest new
message, ... , newest message, oldest old message, ..., newest old message.
Gigaset C1:
New text messages are indicated by the icon
Ü and by an advisory tone.
Gigaset C2:
New text messages are indicated by the message New messages, by the f key flash-
ing and by an advisory tone.
Linked text messages are displayed as one SMS. If an incoming linked message is too
long or has not transferred completely, it will be split into individual messages and
stored in the incoming message list.
Opening the incoming message list
The incoming message list shows you:
all received messages,
messages that could not be sent despite several attempts. These messages are all
stored with an error status (page 50).
~
Enter the number of the e-mail service.
MENU
Press display key to open menu.
Send Text OK
Confirm.
U
6245
ÛuvOK
47
SMS (text messages)
C1-C2 isdn / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / sms.fm / 19.11.2003
The text message list is displayed, for example, as follows
Opening with the message key
Precondition: There is at least one new message in the list.
Opening with the menu
A new text message is displayed, for example, as follows:
If the SMS memory is full and the SMS centre is unable to transfer any more, an appro-
priate message will appear on the screen. Press OK to confirm and delete messages you
no longer require from the incoming and outgoing message list (see also page 43 and
page 48). The SMS centre will then re-transmit the text message.
Inbox 2/ 5
Number of new text messages in the list
Number of old, read text messages in the list
f
Press the message key.
If there are no new calls/messages in the other lists,
then the first new text message is opened immedi-
ately. Otherwise:
s Inbox OK
If necessary, select and confirm. The incoming mes-
sage list is opened and the first new message is dis-
played.
MENU
Open the menu.
SMS OK
Confirm.
s Inbox OK
Select the menu item and confirm.
Number of the text message currently in the display / total number of
new text messages
Text message status:
New, Old, Error
Phone number of sender
1 U
New textm. 1/2
1234567890
tsMENU
1 U
1234567890
12.07.03 09:45
tsMENU
You can toggle between the displays using display keys s and t.
48
SMS (text messages)
C1-C2 isdn / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / sms.fm / 19.11.2003
Reading and deleting text messages in the incoming message list
Precondition: You have opened the incoming message list (page 46).
Once you have opened a new message it acquires the status Old.
Deleting the entire incoming message list
This function deletes all new and old text messages in the incoming message list.
Precondition: You have opened the incoming message list (page 46).
Replying to or forwarding text messages
While you read a text message you can use the following functions:
s
Select SMS.
MENU
Open the menu.
either ...
Read SMS:
Read textmessage OK
Confirm. Use s to view the continuation of the
text message in the display.
or ...
Delete SMS:
s Delete textmess. OK
Select the menu item and confirm.
a
Hold down (return to idle status).
MENU
Open the menu.
s Delete list OK
Select the menu item and confirm.
OK
Press the display key to confirm the prompt.
a
Long press (back to idle status).
MENU
Press display key to open menu.
either ...
Reply to an incoming message:
Reply OK
Confirm. You can reply to the message immediately
in the input field.
or ...
Answer "Yes":
s Answer: Yes OK
Select the menu item and confirm.
or ...
Answer "No":
s Answer: No OK
Select the menu item and confirm.
or ...
Edit the incoming message and return it:
s Use text OK
Select the menu item and confirm.
~
Edit text.
... then
MENU
Press display key to open menu.
49
SMS (text messages)
C1-C2 isdn / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / sms.fm / 19.11.2003
To forward a text message, open the menu with MENU and select the Send option.
Now send the message as described on page 42.
Calling back the text message sender
Open the SMS incoming message list (page 46). Now:
Callback begins at once.
Adding a text message sender's telephone number to the directory
Precondition: You have opened the incoming message list and selected a message
(page 46).
Send OK
Confirm and then send the message as described on
page 42.
or ...
s Save Text OK
Select and confirm to store the entry.
s
Select entry.
either ...
c
Press the talk key.
or ...
MENU
Open the menu.
Dial number OK
Select.
or ...
Dial using network provider's prefix:
MENU
Open the menu.
s NET list OK
Open the speed dial list (network provider list).
s OK
Select entry and confirm. The network provider's
prefix is put in front of the phone number.
i
To a PABX: The access code (outside line code) is automatically put before
the phone number (page 97).
MENU
Press display key to open menu.
s Copy to dir. OK
Select the menu item and confirm.
OK
Confirm the telephone number.
~
Enter a name (up to 16- characters) (for inputting
text see page 105).
MENU
Press display key to open menu.
Save Text OK
Confirm. The entry is stored.
a
Long press (back to idle status).
50
SMS (text messages)
C1-C2 isdn / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / sms.fm / 19.11.2003
Text messages to a PABX
You can only receive a text message when the Calling Line Identification is for-
warded to the extension of the PABX (CLIP).
The CLIP of the phone number of the SMS centre is evaluated in your telephone.
If your phone is connected to a PABX, you may have to prefix the number of the SMS
centre with an access code (this depends on your PABX). You can store the access code
in your base (page 97).
If in doubt, you can test your PABX for example by sending a text message to your own
number and adding the access code before the number of the SMS centre. If you do not
receive the message, send another one, this time without the access code.
When you send messages, your sender number may be sent without your extension
number. The recipient cannot reply to you directly in this case.
Errors when sending and receiving a text message
Errors when sending a text message
Text messages that cannot be sent are assigned an error status e.g. "Error FD" and are
saved in the incoming message list.
The following error codes are displayed:
You can display information about the cause of errors on the screen.
Precondition: You have opened the incoming message list (page 46).
i
The number of the text message recipient must be stored in the directory
together with its area code (prefix) so that it can also be used for sending
text messages.
Error code Description
E0 Calling Line Identification is permanently deactivated (page 17).
FE Error occurred during message transfer.
FD Connection to SMS centre failed.
Text messages cannot be sent or received if the number of an SMS cen-
tre is missing or incorrectly stored. Check that the number of the SMS
centre has been correctly stored.
C2 Wrong recipient phone number.
s
Scroll to the text message you were unable to send.
s Error status OK
Select the menu item and confirm. The cause of the
error appears in the display.
OK
Now press the display key to return to the incoming
message list.
51
SMS (text messages)
C1-C2 isdn / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / sms.fm / 19.11.2003
Errors when receiving a text message
A message appears on the screen if your phone cannot receive any more text messages.
You cannot receive text messages under the following conditions:
call forwarding has been activated with Immediately,
the memory (incoming and outgoing message lists) is full.
Self-help with error messages
Error Message Possible Cause Remedy
You cannot send messages. Calling Line Identification
(CLIP) has been withheld per-
manently.
Permit Calling Line Identifica-
tion (CLIP) again (page 17).
Message transfer was inter-
rupted (e. g. by an incoming
call).
Re-send the message.
No number or an invalid
number is entered for the SMS
centre activated as the send
centre.
Enter phone number
(page 38).
You receive a message whose
text is incomplete.
Your phone's memory is full. Delete some old messages
(page 48).
The message is played back. Your terminal is stored in the
database of your SMS provider
as having no fixed network
SMS functionality, i. e. you are
no longer registered with the
provider.
Register the terminal (again)
for SMS reception.
For the "Anny Way" SMS service
centre: send a blank text mes-
sage to number 2547.
For Deutsche Telekom:
send a text message with the
message REGISTER to 8888.
Messages are only received
during the day.
If your SMS network provider's
database does not yet know
that your terminal supports
fixed network SMS functional-
ity, then it will only attempt to
deliver messages during the
day.
Register the terminal (again)
for SMS reception to get it re-
assigned in the database.
52
Operating the answering machine directly
C1-C2 isdn / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / answeringm_use.fm / 19.11.2003
Operating the answering machine directly
The ISDN phone has three answering machines (AM1, AM2, AM3), each of which you
can operate and set independently. You can operate the answering machines either
directly via a registered handset (via the menu) or by remote control (internal or exter-
nal call to the answering machine, see operating instructions for the base).
Which answering machine you can operate directly using your handset depends on the
assignment of the receive MSNs:
There is no MSN assigned to the answering machines (factory setting):
AM1 answers all calls.
Each answering machine can be set, operated and played back from each handset/
terminal.
One or more MSNs are assigned to each answering machine:
Each answering machine can only be set and played back using handsets/terminals with
the same receive MSN.
Exception: If a receive MSN is assigned exclusively to one answering machine, and not
to any other handset/terminal, then this answering machine can be operated by all
internal users.
The date and time of arrival of each message is logged if you have previously set this
function (page 74).
You can hide answering machines that you do not wish to use (page 63).
Definitions of terms used below:
at the base:
CX150isdn SX150isdn CX253isdn SX255isdn SX353isdn
i
If an answering machine is currently being used by one user (directly or
by remote control), then no other user can access the answering machine
during this time.
Message Message that a caller leaves on the answering machine.
Memos "Spoken notes" that you can record on the answering machine for mem-
bers of your family or office colleagues, for example.
AM mode Answer and record or announce only.
Answer and record
mode
The caller hears the announcement and may then leave a message.
Announce only mode The caller hears the announcement but cannot leave a message.
53
Operating the answering machine directly
C1-C2 isdn / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / answeringm_use.fm / 19.11.2003
Selecting an answering machine
The list of answering machines AM1, etc., is also opened if you press and hold the
number key
1. The list only contains the answering machines set to be shown on the
handset. If only one answering machine can be reached via the handset, or only one
answering machine is set to be shown, the list is skipped.
If the answering machine menu has not been opened and instead the message "No AM
allocated" is displayed, then you cannot use the answering machine directly with the
handset (page 52). If necessary, change the assignment of the incoming MSNs
(page 83).
Activating/deactivating the answering machine
Precondition: You have selected an answering machine (page 53).
When the answering machine is activated the remaining memory (in %) is displayed on
the screen.
Which AM mode the answering machine assumes after activation (answer and record
mode or announce only mode) depends on the announcement selected (page 54).
You can only activate an answering machine in answer and record mode if there is
memory still available. If the remaining memory is less than 60 seconds, you will be
prompted to delete old messages. If the remaining memory is less than 10 seconds the
answering machine is started in announce only mode.
If the answering machine assigned to a handset is activated, the
× icon is shown on
the screen. The
× flashes when a recording is in progress.
MENU
Open the menu.
s Voice Mail OK
Select the menu item and confirm.
s AM1 OK
If necessary, select answering machine and confirm,
e. g. AM1.
~ OK
If AM lock is set (page 66): enter the answering
machine PIN and confirm.
either ...
Activate the answering machine:
s Activate? OK
Select the menu item and confirm.
or ...
Deactivate the answering machine:
s Deactivate? OK
Select the menu item and confirm.
54
Operating the answering machine directly
C1-C2 isdn / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / answeringm_use.fm / 19.11.2003
Selecting announce only and AM mode
You can activate Announcement 1, Announcement 2 or Announcem. only for each
answering machine. As supplied, the three announcements already include standard
messages. You can delete the standard messages and record your own announcements
(page 54).
When you select an announcement you also determine in which AM mode the answer-
ing machine is to run (page 52).
Announcement 1, Announcement 2: answer and record mode.
Announcem. only: announce only mode
In answer and record mode a Concl.announcem is given automatically at the end of a
recording providing you have recorded a concluding announcement (page 54).
When the phone is supplied Announcement 1 is selected. The Concl.announcem
contains nothing.
Precondition: You have selected an answering machine (page 53).
Recording/changing announcements
You can record the following announcements: Announcement 1, Announcement 2,
Announcem. only and Concl.announcem.
Precondition: You have selected an answering machine (page 53).
s Announcements OK
Select the menu item and confirm.
s Announcement 2
Select announcement, e. g. Announcement 2
(
=set).
MENU
Press the display key to open the submenu.
Select OK
Confirm. The announcement set previously is deac-
tivated automatically.
i
The answering machine switches automatically from answer and record
mode to announce only mode when the memory is full. As soon as mem-
ory space is available again (e. g., because you have deleted some mes-
sages) the answering machine automatically switches back to recording
mode.
s Announcements OK
Select the menu item and confirm.
s Announcement 2
Select announcement, e. g. Announcement 2
(
= currently activated).
MENU
Press the display key to open the submenu.
s Record OK
Select the menu item and confirm.
OK
Press the display key to start recording.
Say the announcement message.
OK
Press the display key to end the recording. The
announcement is repeated for you to check.
55
Operating the answering machine directly
C1-C2 isdn / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / answeringm_use.fm / 19.11.2003
Recording is automatically terminated if:
you pause for more than 8 seconds when recording your announcement
the memory is full. Delete old messages or announcements you no longer require.
The announcement will not be stored if you press the end call key during the recording
or repeat playback.
Playing back/deleting announcements
Only announcements that have been recorded can be deleted. The standard message
cannot be deleted.
Precondition: You have selected an answering machine (page 53).
Recording memos
Memos are "spoken notes" recorded, for example, for members of your family. A memo
is played back, saved and deleted in the same way as a message. If a new memo arrives
the
Û icon is displayed on all the handsets assigned to the answering machine.
You can also record memos when the answering machine is deactivated.
When the memory is full, and when there are pauses in the recording longer than
8 seconds, the recording of the memo is cancelled automatically.
Precondition: You have selected an answering machine (page 53).
To stop recording, press the end call key
a.
s Announcements OK
Select the menu item and confirm.
s Announcement 2
Select announcement, e. g. Announcement 2
(
=activated).
MENU
Press the display key to open the submenu.
either ...
Play back the announcement:
s Play back OK
Select the menu item and confirm.
or ...
Delete the announcement:
s Delete OK
Select the menu item and confirm.
OK
Press the display key to confirm the prompt.
s Memos OK
Select the menu item and confirm.
s Record memo OK
Select the menu item and confirm.
OK
Press the display key to start recording.
Say the memo message.
OK
Press the display key to end the recording.
56
Operating the answering machine directly
C1-C2 isdn / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / answeringm_use.fm / 19.11.2003
Two-way recording
You can make a two-way recording of a call. The two-way recording can then be played
back or deleted like a message.
During a call:
Picking up a call while the answering machine is responding
You can pick up a call, even if the answering machine has already switched itself on
(the
× icon flashes on the screen), or your announcement is still running, or the caller
is already leaving a message. When you pick up the call the recording stops.
Preconditions:
The same receive MSN is assigned to both the answering machine and the handset
picking up the call (page 62).
Automatic listen in is not activated on any other handset (page 66).
Automatic call pick up is activated (see page 67, factory default):
Automatic pickup is deactivated:
In order to call another external party while the answering machine is recording a call
you must deactivate the automatic pickup (page 67).
MENU
Open the menu.
s Record OK
Select the menu item and confirm.
s AM1 OK
Select an answering machine and confirm,
e. g. AM1. The two-way recording starts at once.
OK
Press the display key to end the two-way recording.
i
The two-way recording is also ended when the call ends or when the
memory is full. You should inform the person you are speaking to in
advance that you are making a two-way recording.
cd
Press the talk or handsfree key. You pick up the call.
cd
Press the talk or handsfree key.
either ...
MENU
Open the menu.
Open listening OK
Confirm to listen in. The caller cannot hear you.
or ...
MENU
Open the menu.
s Accept OK
Select and confirm to pick up the call.
57
Operating the answering machine directly
C1-C2 isdn / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / answeringm_use.fm / 19.11.2003
Playing messages
The Û icon is shown on the handset screen to indicate the arrival of a new message.
On the Gigaset C1, the Message key
f also flashes. Pressing the messages key f
gives you direct access to the new messages. You can also open the lists of new and old
messages via the menu.
Opening lists with the menu:
Precondition: You have selected an answering machine (page 53).
Playback starts with the oldest message. When all the messages have been played back
you will be asked whether you wish to delete the messages.
The following is shown on the screen for each message:
The date and time of the recording are stated when the message is played back provid-
ing this function is set (page 64).
If automatic pause is activated the answering machine switches to pause mode after
playing back a message. Press the
s display key (or MENU Continue OK) to continue
playback.
Jumping to the next or previous message during playback
Switching to pause mode during playback, ending pause mode
Messages OK
Confirm.
Total number of messages
in the list
Current number of message
shown
Message status:
Old mess.: or New mess.:
Caller's phone number
1 U
1234567890
New mess.: 1/15
ÛtsMENU
s
Go to the next message.
t
Jump to the beginning of the current message.
tt
Jump to the previous message.
MENU
Switch to pause mode.
Continue OK
Confirm. Playback continues.
58
Operating the answering machine directly
C1-C2 isdn / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / answeringm_use.fm / 19.11.2003
Returning a call during playback
You can call back a caller immediately while a message is being played.
Precondition: The caller's number has been identified.
During playback:
Playing a message to another caller
During an external call you can play messages from the answering machine to the per-
son you are calling.
Precondition: The same receive MSN is assigned to the handset and the answering
machine.
During the call:
MENU
Press the display key to open the submenu.
either ...
Call back:
s Call back OK
Select the menu item and confirm.
or ...
Call back using the network provider's phone
number:
s NET list OK
Select the menu item and confirm.
sOK
Select the network provider's number and confirm.
MENU
Press the display key to open the menu.
s Play message OK
Select the menu item and confirm.
s AM1 OK
If necessary, select answering machine and confirm,
e. g. AM1.
~ OK
If AM lock is set (page 66): Enter the AM PIN and con-
firm.
Information about the oldest message is displayed
on the screen. The message is not played back.
s MENU
Select message and open the submenu.
s Playback OK
Select the menu item and confirm. The playback
starts. The other caller can listen in.
End playback:
MENU
Press the display key to open the submenu.
s Exit OK
Select the menu item and confirm. The playback
stops. You can speak to the caller again.
59
Operating the answering machine directly
C1-C2 isdn / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / answeringm_use.fm / 19.11.2003
Playing back memos
Precondition: You have selected an answering machine (page 53).
You can set the playback speed for messages/memos to four levels, Slow, Normal
speed, Fast or Very fast. When the phone is supplied Normal speed is set for all
answering machines.
During playback:
Playback continues at the new speed. All subsequent messages/memos are played back
at this speed until you make another change.
s Memos OK
Select the menu item and confirm.
s Play memo OK
Select the menu item and confirm.
st
Jump to the next or previous memo.
MENU
Press display key to open menu.
s Speed OK
Select the menu item and confirm.
s Fast OK
Select the speed level and confirm,
e.g. Fast (
=set).
60
Operating the answering machine directly
C1-C2 isdn / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / answeringm_use.fm / 19.11.2003
Deleting messages/memos
You can delete messages or memos individually or all together. Only messages and
memos that have been listened to for at least 3 seconds can be deleted. These record-
ings are then described as old.
Deleting single messages/memos
Precondition: You have selected an answering machine (page 53).
Deleting all old messages/memos
Precondition: You have selected an answering machine (page 53).
either ...
Delete a single message:
Messages OK
Confirm. Message playback begins.
st
Select message.
MENU
Press the display key to open the submenu.
s Delete message OK
Select the menu item and confirm. The current mes-
sage is deleted.
or ...
Delete a single memo:
s Memos OK
Select the menu item and confirm.
s Play memo OK
Select the menu item and confirm.
st
Select memo.
MENU
Press the display key to open the submenu.
s Delete curr.memo OK
Select the menu item and confirm. The current
memo is deleted.
either ...
Delete all old messages:
Messages OK
Confirm. Message playback begins.
MENU
Press the display key to open the submenu.
s Del.old messages OK
Select the menu item and confirm.
Yes
Confirm.
or ...
Delete all old memos:
s Memos OK
Select the menu item and confirm.
s Play memo OK
Select the menu item and confirm.
MENU
Press the display key to open the submenu.
s Delete old memos OK
Select the menu item and confirm.
Yes
Confirm.
61
Operating the answering machine directly
C1-C2 isdn / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / answeringm_use.fm / 19.11.2003
Marking an old message or memo as "new"
You can mark messages/memos you have already played back as "new". This message/
memo is then displayed on the handset as a new entry with the
Û icon on the screen.
Pressing the messages key
f gives you direct access to the message/memo once
more.
During playback:
If other recordings are available, playback continues.
Adding a number to the directory
While a message is being played back you can display the caller's phone number and
store it in the directory.
Precondition: The caller's number has been identified.
During playback:
Checking messages/memos
Precondition: You have selected an answering machine (page 53).
MENU
Press the display key to open the submenu.
s Status to 'new' OK
Select the menu item and confirm. The current
recording is given the status "new".
MENU
Press the display key to open the submenu.
s Save number OK
Select the menu item and confirm.
OK
Confirm the telephone number.
~
Enter name.
MENU
Press the display key to open the submenu.
Store OK
Confirm.
s Status OK
Select the menu item and confirm.
either ...
Display number of new and old messages:
Messages OK
Confirm. The number of new and old messages is
displayed.
or ...
Display number of new and old memos:
s Memos OK
Select the menu item and confirm. The number of
new and old memos is displayed.
62
Setting the answering machine
C1-C2 isdn / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / answeringm_config.fm / 19.11.2003
Setting the answering machine
Once you have connected your telephone your answering machine is ready for use.
Answering machine AM1 is set to be shown and activated. It displays all messages (on
all receive MS's). AM1 can be played back and set from all handsets (factory default). All
phrases in the answering machine are in English.
As supplied, AM2 and AM3 are hidden (page 63) and are deactivated. To use them, they
must be shown, and all answering machines shown must be assigned their own receive
MSN.
You can configure AM1, AM2 and AM3 separately.
Assigning a receive MSN
You can assign one or more receive MSNs to each (shown) answering machine (AM1,
AM2, AM3). However, each MSN can only be assigned to one answering machine (only
one recording can be running at any one time).
Once an answering machine has been assigned to a receive MSN it can only be set and
operated via handsets/terminals to which the same receive MSN is assigned.
at the base:
CX150isdn SX150isdn CX253isdn SX255isdn SX353isdn
MENU
Open the menu.
s Base Settings OK
Select the menu item and confirm.
s Settings OK
Select the menu item and confirm.
s Setup user OK
Select the menu item and confirm.
Setup device OK
Confirm.
s
Select answering machine, INT 91: AM 91 for AM1,
INT 92: AM 92 for AM2 or INT 93: AM 93 for AM3.
MENU
Open the submenu.
s Receive MSN OK
Select the menu item and confirm.
s OK
Select the receive MSN and confirm, e.g. MSN:
Anna. Only the MSNs that are still not assigned to an
answering machine are offered.
Repeat this procedure for all receive MSNs that you
wish to assign to the answering machine.
63
Setting the answering machine
C1-C2 isdn / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / answeringm_config.fm / 19.11.2003
Hiding/showing an answering machine
If you only want to operate one or two answering machines for your connection you can
remove the other answering machine(s) from all displays and menus. When supplied,
AM1 is set to show, AM2 and AM3 are hidden.
When hidden there must be no messages or memos remaining in the answering
machine:
If there are new messages/memos you have not yet played back on the answering
machine, you will be notified when you try to hide it. The answering machine will
continue to be shown.
If, when you wish to hide an answering machine, it still contains old messages/
memos that have already been played back, you will be asked if you wish to delete
the old recordings. The answering machine will only be hidden if you confirm with
OK .
When an activated answering machine is hidden it is deactivated. When it is set to show
again, the answering machine returns to the status it had before it was hidden.
MENU
Open the menu.
s Base Settings OK
Select the menu item and confirm.
s Settings OK
Select the menu item and confirm.
s Setup user OK
Select the menu item and confirm.
Setup device OK
Confirm.
s
Select the internal numbers for the answering
machine (INT 91, INT 92 or INT 93).
MENU
Open the submenu.
either ...
Hide answering machine:
s Hide AM? OK
Select the menu item and confirm.
or ...
Show answering machine:
s Show AM? OK
Select the menu item and confirm.
64
Setting the answering machine
C1-C2 isdn / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / answeringm_config.fm / 19.11.2003
Specifying the number of rings before the answering machine
starts
You can set when you want the answering machine to activate (after how many rings).
The options are: 1 ring tone, 2 ring tone, ..., 9 ring tone. Instead of a set number of
rings, you can also set the charge saving setting Automatic 2/4 (factory default). In
this setting the answering machine activates automatically:
after 2 rings if there are new messages,
after 4 rings if there are no new messages.
Precondition: You have selected an answering machine (page 53).
Activating/deactivating voice announcement of date and time
You can have the recording date and -time (time stamp) announced when each mes-
sage/memo is played back (activated when supplied).
Precondition: You have selected an answering machine (page 53).
Setting the recording time and recording quality
You can set the maximum length of a message and its recording quality. The recording
quality determines the total recording time of your answering machine.
On the High quality setting the total recording time is up to 12 min., on Long record-
ing (standard quality, generally adequate) up to 25 min. When supplied, the recording
quality Long recording and the recording time Maximum are already set.
s Settings OK
Select the menu item and confirm.
s No. of rings OK
Select the menu item and confirm.
s Automatic 2/4 OK
Select and confirm number of rings or
Automatic 2/4 (
= set).
s Settings OK
Select the menu item and confirm.
Message/Memo OK
Confirm.
s Time stamp OK
Select the menu item and confirm ( = activated).
i
The recording of a call ends:
after a pause in speaking lasting more than 8 seconds;
at the end of a call; the caller terminates the connection;
after the set maximum recording time has expired, on Maximum
setting, when the memory is full.
65
Setting the answering machine
C1-C2 isdn / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / answeringm_config.fm / 19.11.2003
Setting the recording time
You can limit the maximum length of a message to1 minute, 2 minutes or 3 minutes.
If you set
Maximum for the recording time (factory setting) then it is "unlimited" (until
the memory is full).
Precondition: You have selected an answering machine (page 53).
Setting recording quality
Precondition: You have selected an answering machine (page 53).
Activating/deactivating automatic pause
If automatic pause is activated the answering machine switches to pause mode after
playing back a message or memo. The next message will not be played back until you
press the
s display key.
When the phone is supplied, automatic pause is deactivated.
Precondition: You have selected an answering machine (page 53).
s Settings OK
Select the menu item and confirm.
Message/Memo OK
Confirm.
Message length OK
Confirm.
s 3 minutes OK
Select the recording time and confirm,
e.g. 3 minutes (
= activated).
i
Once the recording period has expired, the concluding announcement is
played automatically if stored. Then the connection is closed down.
There is no limit to the duration of memo recordings.
s Settings OK
Select the menu item and confirm.
s AM quality OK
Select the menu item and confirm.
either ...
Set high quality:
High quality OK
Confirm.
or ...
Set long recording:
s Long recording OK
Select the menu item and confirm.
s Settings OK
Select the menu item and confirm.
s Automatic pause OK
Select the menu item and confirm ( = activated).
66
Setting the answering machine
C1-C2 isdn / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / answeringm_config.fm / 19.11.2003
Locking the answering machine, defining AM PIN
You can protect your answering machine against unauthorised access. To do this,
define an AM PIN (Personal Identification Number) and activate the AM lock. The set-
tings may then only be changed and the messages played back after the PIN has been
entered.
Entering and changing the AM PIN
When supplied, the AM PIN is preconfigured to 0000.
Precondition: You have selected an answering machine (page 53).
If you make an error when keying in the AM PIN you can delete your entry using
the
W key and enter it again.
Activating/deactivating the AM lock
When the phone is supplied the answering machine lock is deactivated.
Precondition: You have selected an answering machine (page 53).
Activating/deactivating automatic listen in on the handset
You can set your answering machine to switch a handset assigned to it automatically to
listen in when a message is recorded.
When supplied, automatic listen in is deactivated.
Assigning a handset
Only one handset may be assigned to an answering machine. You can choose a handset
to which one of the answering machine's receive MSNs is assigned. Only terminals that
support handsfree talking are displayed. Auto answer (page 67) must be activated.
Precondition: You have selected an answering machine (page 53).
i
The answering machine can only be controlled remotely if you have
defined an AM PIN.
s Settings OK
Select the menu item and confirm.
s Change AM-PIN OK
Select the menu item and confirm.
~ OK
Enter new AM PIN (up to 8 digits) and confirm.
~ OK
Repeat the new AM PIN and confirm.
s Settings OK
Select the menu item and confirm.
s AM lock OK
Select the menu item and confirm ( = lock set).
s Settings OK
Select the menu item and confirm.
s Aut. listen in OK
Select the menu item and confirm.
67
Setting the answering machine
C1-C2 isdn / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / answeringm_config.fm / 19.11.2003
Activating/deactivating listen in
You can only activate the listen in function if a handset has been assigned to the
answering machine.
Precondition: You have selected an answering machine (page 53).
Activating/deactivating automatic pickup
With automatic pickup you can take a call directly from the answering machine
(announcement or recording is running) on any handset or by lifting a receiver (tele-
phone with cord) providing the same receive MSN is assigned to all devices. You just
need to press the talk key
c on the handset. The recording of the call will then stop.
As supplied, automatic pickup is activated.
Precondition: The same receive MSN is assigned to both the answering machine and
the handset/terminal.
s Select HS OK
Select the menu item and confirm.
s OK
Select the handset and confirm,
e.g. Int13: Anna.
s Settings OK
Select the menu item and confirm.
s Aut. listen in OK
Select the menu item and confirm.
either ...
Activate listen in:
Activate? OK
Confirm.
or ...
Deactivate listen in:
Deactivate? OK
Confirm.
i
If automatic listen in is activated for a handset (page 66) then the call can
only be taken on this handset.
MENU
Open the menu.
s Base Settings OK
Select the menu item and confirm.
s Settings OK
Select the menu item and confirm.
s System settings OK
Select the menu item and confirm.
s AM auto. pickup OK
Select the menu item and confirm ( = activated).
68
Setting the answering machine
C1-C2 isdn / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / answeringm_config.fm / 19.11.2003
Activating/deactivating automatic notification via text message
If you have received new messages on the answering machine, your telephone can
automatically send a text message to you on an external phone number (e. g. to a
mobile phone). A text message of this kind will read, for example:
New message: 01712205625 for office at 18:27 hrs on TH, 19.07. You have 1 new
AM message(s).
Automatic text message notification is not available in all countries.
Entering destination phone number for a text message
No destination number has been stored.
Precondition: You have selected an answering machine (page 53).
Changing or deleting the destination number for a text message
Precondition: You have selected an answering machine (page 53).
i
An SMS send centre must be activated to send the text message
(page 39).
s Settings OK
Select the menu item and confirm.
s SMS notificat. OK
Select the menu item and confirm.
~
Enter destination number (up to 20 digits).
MENU
Press the display key to open the submenu.
Save entry OK
Confirm.
a
Hold down (return to idle status).
s Settings OK
Select the menu item and confirm.
s SMS notificat. OK
Select the menu item and confirm.
MENU
Press the display key to open the submenu.
either ...
Enter or change the destination number:
Change number OK
Confirm.
~
Change the destination number.
MENU
Press the display key to open the submenu.
Save entry OK
Confirm.
or ...
Delete the destination number:
s Delete number OK
Select the menu item and confirm.
a
Hold down (return to idle status).
69
Setting the answering machine
C1-C2 isdn / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / answeringm_config.fm / 19.11.2003
Activating/deactivating text message notification
You can only activate text message notification if a destination number is stored.
Precondition: You have selected an answering machine (page 53).
s Settings OK
Select the menu item and confirm.
s SMS notificat. OK
Select the menu item and confirm.
MENU
Press the display key to open the submenu.
2 minutes
either ...
Activate text message notification:
s Activate? OK
Select the menu item and confirm.
or ...
Deactivate text message notification:
s Deactivate? OK
Select the menu item and confirm.
70
Using several handsets
C1-C2 isdn / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / several_handsets.fm / 19.11.2003
Using several handsets
Using a handset as a room monitor
With this function, a previously stored internal or external number is called when a set
noise level in the room is reached (the baby cries). When you answer the call you hear
the noise in the baby's room. The room monitor remains activated on the handset
even after you hang up.
The handset should be between 1 and 2 metres away from the baby. The microphone
must be directed towards the baby.
When the room monitor is activated, incoming calls to the handset which is near the
baby are indicated without a ring tone, they are just shown on the display. The display
and the keypad are not illuminated.
When entering an external phone number, check the following:
the number where the room monitor call is forwarded must not be blocked by an acti-
vated answering machine.
on handset:
C2
W
Always check the settings of the room monitor before you leave,
e. g. sensitivity and phone line.
i
If you redirect your room monitor to an external number, then you
should tell that number's owner.
A room monitor stops calling an external number after about
90 seconds. The room monitor stops calling an internal number
(handset) after about 3 minutes.
After the room monitor makes a call, the room monitor is blocked for
2 minutes.
The room monitor function severely curtails the handset's operating
time. If possible, place any handset that is in the vicinity of a baby in
the charger. This ensures that the battery does not discharge.
The room monitor function can also be used in Walk and Talk mode
(page 72).
71
Using several handsets
C1-C2 isdn / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / several_handsets.fm / 19.11.2003
Activating the room monitor function and entering the "call to" number for
the first time
If the room monitor is activated, you go straight to the room monitor setting when you
press the display key
MENU (open menu).
Setting the room monitor's sensitivity
Deactivating the room monitor
The room monitor function must be deactivated on the handset that is in the baby's
room.
MENU
Press display key to open menu.
s Additional Features OK
Select the menu item and confirm.
Room Monitor OK
Confirm.
either ...
Enter an internal number as the "call to" number:
s Call Internal OK
Select the menu item and confirm.
s OK
Select the handset and confirm.
or ...
Enter an external number as the "call to" number:
s Call External OK
Select the menu item and confirm.
~ OK
Enter phone number and confirm.
i
You can pick the external number from the directory. Instead of key-
ing in the number, press the
h key, use s to select an entry and
confirm your choice with
OK.
If you enter an external number as the destination number, only the
last 4 digits will appear in the input field.
MENU
Press display key to open menu.
s Additional Features OK
Select the menu item and confirm.
Room Monitor OK
Confirm.
s Level OK
If necessary, select and confirm.
s OK
Select Low or High and confirm. The selection is
checked
.
MENU
Press display key to open menu.
Room Monitor off OK
Confirm.
72
Using several handsets
C1-C2 isdn / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / several_handsets.fm / 19.11.2003
Deactivating the room monitor remotely
You can deactivate the room monitor remotely. Take the call from the room monitor
and press
O R. The room monitor function will deactivate about 90 seconds after
the call ends. The room monitor will make no further calls. The other room monitor
functions on the handset (e. g. no ringer) will remain activated until you press MENU
and OK on the handset that is in the baby's room.
Setting the Walk and Talk mode
The Walk and Talk function allows two C1 handsets to communicate with each other no
matter how far they are from the base.
Example: You go on holiday and take two handsets with Walk and Talk functionality
with you. Set the Walk and Talk function on both handsets. You can now communicate
using the handsets.
Precondition:
Both handsets have been registered to the same base or
Both handsets are registered to different bases and both are set to Best Base
(page 15) or
One of the handsets is not registered to any base and the registered handset is set
to Best Base or
Neither handset is registered to a base.
on handset:
C2
i
In Walk and Talk mode
the maximum range between handsets is 300 metres outdoors,
the handsets cannot be reached by incoming calls,
handset operating times are severely curtailed.
73
Using several handsets
C1-C2 isdn / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / several_handsets.fm / 19.11.2003
Activating/deactivating the Walk and Talk mode
If you press the talk key c or the handsfree key d when you are in Walk and Talk
mode, the call will go to all handsets that are in Walk and Talk mode. The connection is
made with the first handset to answer the Walk and Talk call.
Activate the Walk and Talk mode:
MENU
Press display key to open menu.
s Additional Features OK
Select the menu item and confirm.
s Walk and Talk OK
Select the menu item and confirm.
Deactivate the Walk and Talk mode:
MENU
Press display key to open menu.
Walk and Talk Off OK
Confirm.
i
Ring and advisory tones are set in exactly the same way as if your
handsets at home were in range of the base (page 91).
"Activate/deactivate ringer" (page 92) and "Activate/deactivate key-
pad lock" (page 10) are available in the Walk and Talk mode.
The Walk and Talk mode is retained even when you switch your hand-
set off and back on.
74
Date and Time
C1-C2 isdn / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / time_calendar.fm / 19.11.2003
Date and Time
Setting the date and the time
Correct date and time settings are essential if, for example, you want to know exactly
when calls were received.
The first time you make a call on your phone, the date and time are transmitted by the
exchange. However, you can also set the date and time on the handset.
Changing the time mode
You can choose between the 12 hour and the 24 hour display (factory setting) for the
time (a.m. = 1st half of the day; p.m. = 2nd half of the day).
MENU
Open the menu.
s Calender/Clock OK
Select the menu item and confirm.
s Date/Time OK
Select the menu item and confirm.
... then
Enter the date:
~OK
Enter day/month/year and confirm. Example:
For 20.05.2003, enter
2QQ5QI.
Enter the time:
~OK
Enter hours/minutes and confirm. Example:
For 9.35, enter
QOI5.
Only when the 12-hour display is selected:
sOK
Select a.m. or p.m. and confirm.
a
Long press (back to idle status).
MENU
Open the menu.
s Calender/Clock OK
Select the menu item and confirm.
s Time Mode OK
Select the menu item and confirm.
either ...
s 12 hour OK
Select the menu item and confirm ( = On).
or ...
24 hour OK
Confirm ( = On).
a
Long press (back to idle status).
75
Date and Time
C1-C2 isdn / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / time_calendar.fm / 19.11.2003
Setting the alarm clock
You can use your handset as an alarm clock.
Precondition: You have set the date and time (page 74).
Activating/deactivating the alarm clock and setting the wake-up time
Cancelling a wake-up call
A wake-up call sounds on the handset with its selected ringer melody, and Alarm Clock
appears in the display. Press any key to cancel the wake-up call. The alarm clock is still
switched on.
on handset:
C2
Switching the alarm clock on:
¼
Press the display key.
Alarm Clock OK
Confirm ( = On).
Set the wake-up time:
~ OK
Enter hours/minutes and confirm. Example:
For 7.15, enter
QM15. The top line of the
screen displays the alarm clock icon
¼.
When the 12-hour display is selected:
s am OK
Select a.m. or p.m. and confirm ( = On), e.g. am.
or ...
Deactivate the alarm clock:
¼
Press the display key.
Alarm Clock OK
Confirm ( disappears).
a
Long press (back to idle status).
i
A wake-up call only sounds when the handset is in the idle status and
the room monitor function is not activated.
To find out how to set the wake-up volume and melody, turn to
(page 91).
When you deactivate the alarm clock the ¼ icon will only go out if
there is no active appointment.
76
Date and Time
C1-C2 isdn / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / time_calendar.fm / 19.11.2003
Setting an appointment
You can use your handset to remind yourself of an appointment. To do this, you have
to save the times.
Activating/deactivating the appointment function
on handset:
C2
MENU
Open the menu.
s Calender/Clock OK
Select the menu item and confirm.
Set Appointment OK
Confirm ( = On).
OK
Confirm again if an appointment is activated.
Enter the date:
~ OK
Enter the day/month and confirm.
Example: For 20.05. enter
2QQ5.
Enter the time:
~ OK
Enter hours/minutes and confirm.
Example: For 9:05 enter
QOQ5.
Specifying the appointment:
~ OK
Enter a name (up to 16 characters) and confirm (for
inputting text see page 105). Delete an existing
appointment.
a
Long press (back to idle status).
The top line displays the alarm clock icon
¼.
i
If you do not give the appointment a name, its date and time will
appear in the display when it is due.
To find out how to set the wake-up volume and melody, turn to
page 91.
If you are using the 12 hour clock, select a.m. or p.m. with s and
press
OK to confirm.
An appointment will be displayed only if the handset is in idle status.
An appointment is not displayed when the room monitor is active or
while a phone call is in progress.
77
Date and Time
C1-C2 isdn / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / time_calendar.fm / 19.11.2003
Deactivating an appointment call
An appointment is signalled with the selected ringer melody (page 91).
Cancelling an appointment
Viewing an appointment you have not kept
If the handset reminds you of an appointment but you do not keep it, a message
appears in the display together with the name of the appointment. If you did not name
the appointment, its date and time are displayed. Press any key to cancel the message.
OK
Press the display key. The alarm clock icon ¼ disap-
pears when the alarm clock is not activated.
MENU
Open the menu.
s Calender/Clock OK
Select the menu item and confirm.
Set Appointment OK
Confirm ( disappears).
78
Security settings
C1-C2 isdn / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / security.fm / 11.09.2003
Security settings
Changing the system PIN
You can protect the following settings against unauthorised access using the system
PIN (Personal Identification Number):
Call forwarding to an external number
(MENU
s Base Settings / sExt. call forw.)
SMS service centres, user configurations, security, ISDN, and system settings
(MENU
s Base Settings / sSettings)
The system PIN will not work with the number 0000.
When supplied, the system PIN is preconfigured to 0000.
MENU
Open the menu.
s Base Settings OK
Select the menu item and confirm.
s Settings OK
Select the menu item and confirm.
~ OK
Providing you choose a number other than 0000:
Enter PIN and confirm.
Security OK
Confirm.
s Change PIN OK
Select the menu item and confirm.
~ OK
Enter new system PIN (up to 8 digits, 0 to 9) and con-
firm.
~ OK
Repeat the new system PIN and confirm.
a
Hold down (return to idle status).
!
Memorise the new system PIN! If you forget it the phone will require
expert intervention. If this happens, contact the Siemens Hotline.
79
Security settings
C1-C2 isdn / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / security.fm / 11.09.2003
Emergency numbers
The emergency numbers relevant to each country have been entered in the base sta-
tion. These cannot be edited or deleted. You may enter five emergency numbers of your
own choice.
Setting up, editing, reading and deleting personal emergency numbers
i
An emergency number may also be dialled from a handset with limited
authorisation.
MENU
Open the menu.
s Base Settings OK
Select the menu item and confirm.
s Settings OK
Select the menu item and confirm.
~ OK
If required, enter the PIN and confirm.
Security OK
Confirm.
s Emergency nos.
Select. The emergency numbers list is opened.
s <no entry>
Select list entry, e. g. <no entry>.
MENU
Press the display key to open the submenu.
either ...
Set up or edit emergency number:
Change number OK
Confirm.
~
Enter new emergency number (up to 32 digits) or
edit existing emergency number. You can also copy
the number from the directory
s or speed dial
list
C.
MENU
Press the display key to open the submenu.
Save entry OK
Confirm.
or ...
View emergency number:
s Display number OK
Select the menu item and confirm.
or ...
Delete emergency number:
s Delete number OK
Select the menu item and confirm.
a
Hold down (return to idle status).
i
If your phone is connected to a PABX you must enter the applicable
access code (outside line code, e.g. 0; see page 97) before the emer-
gency number. This also applies to emergency numbers you have preset
and for which you need to re-enter as an alternative, for example, "0110"
and "0112".
80
System settings
C1-C2 isdn / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / settings_bs.fm / 19.11.2003
System settings
The abbreviations in brackets after the titles indicate the ISDN service concerned. Some
services may only be used if they have been authorised by the network provider (there
may be an extra charge).
Changing the name for an internal party
When the phone is supplied, all internal numbers are allocated the names Int.11, Int.12
etc., according to their numbering. You can change these entries individually to suit
your requirements.
MENU
Open the menu.
s Base Settings OK
Select the menu item and confirm.
s Settings OK
Select the menu item and confirm.
~ OK
Enter system PIN if required (page 78).
s Setup user OK
Select the menu item and confirm.
s Setup device OK
Select the menu item and confirm.
s Int.11
Select internal number, e. g. Int.11.
MENU
Open the submenu.
s Name OK
Select the menu item and confirm.
~ MENU
Change the name and open the menu.
Save entry OK
Confirm. The name is now shown in the internal list,
including when an internal call is made from this
internal number.
i
Since names are saved in the base station, another name can be allocated
to a handset when registering to a different base. This makes it possible
to recognise which base the handset is currently connected to.
81
System settings
C1-C2 isdn / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / settings_bs.fm / 19.11.2003
Setting up/deleting an ISDN phone number (MSN)
Your ISDN connection offers you two telephone lines (B channels) that you can use at
the same time. You can establish up to ten separate phone numbers (MSN) on your
base station.
What is an MSN?
MSN = Multiple Subscriber Number. You can apply for up to ten different telephone
numbers for one multiple ISDN connection. An MSN is one of the phone numbers
assigned to you without an area code.
You telephone uses the MSN entirely as you require. The following differentiation is
made:
Receive MSN: Phone numbers you may be called on. You can assign the receive
MSNs to specific internal users (terminals). Incoming calls are only forwarded to the
terminals to which the relevant MSN has been assigned. Terminals are, for instance,
handsets or answering machines.
Send MSN: Phone numbers that are identified to the person you are calling. The
network operator calculates charges based on the send MSNs. You can assign a
fixed send MSN to each internal user.
Possible internal users are:
Depending on the functions provided by the base, you can assign internal phone num-
bers to the following internal users. Please refer to the operating instructions for the
base for the internal phone numbers that are available.
Handsets
Base telephone (CX203isdn, CX253isdn, SX303isdn, SX353isdn)
Analogue devices (SX205isdn, SX255isdn, SX303isdn, SX353isdn)
PC via a USB connection (SX205isdn, SX255isdn, SX303isdn, SX353isdn)
Bluetooth devices (SX303isdn, SX353isdn)
Data modules
Answering machines integrated in the base
Example of how to assign an MSN:
You have applied for four MSNs, two for business use (MSN1, MSN2) and two for private
purposes (MSN3, MSN4). Four handsets are connected to a base. Two handsets (Int.11
and 12) and the answering machine AM 91 are intended for business use, and two
handsets (Int.13 and 14) and the answering machine AM 92 are intended for private
use.
Internal users Use Receive MSN Send MSN
Handsets Int.11, 12 Business
MSN1, MSN2 MSN1
Answering
machine
AM 91
MSN1, MSN2 ---
Handset Int.13 Private MSN3 MSN3
Handset Int.14 MSN4 MSN4
Answering
machine
AM 92
MSN3, MSN4 ---
82
System settings
C1-C2 isdn / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / settings_bs.fm / 19.11.2003
Setting up an ISDN phone number (MSN) / changing the name
All newly stored phone numbers are automatically assigned to all registered hand-
sets.
Each newly set up phone number automatically gets its own ringer melody, which can
be changed to suit your individual requirements (page 84).
Cancelling ISDN phone numbers (MSN)
MENU
Open the menu.
s Base Settings OK
Select the menu item and confirm.
s Settings OK
Select the menu item and confirm.
~ OK
Enter system PIN if required (page 78).
s ISDN settings OK
Select the menu item and confirm.
s Set up MSN OK
Select the menu item and confirm.
s
Select MSN, e. g. MSN1: Anna.
MENU
Open the submenu.
Edit entry OK
Select the menu item and confirm.
~ OK
Enter phone number and confirm.
~
Enter a name (up to 16 characters – optional)
(for inputting text see page 105).
MENU
Open the submenu.
Save entry OK
Select the menu item and confirm.
MENU
Open the menu.
s Base Settings OK
Select the menu item and confirm.
s Settings OK
Select the menu item and confirm.
~ OK
Enter system PIN if required (page 78).
s ISDN settings OK
Select the menu item and confirm.
s Set up MSN OK
Select the menu item and confirm.
s
Select MSN, e. g. MSN1: Anna.
MENU
Open the submenu.
s Delete entry OK
Select the menu item and confirm.
i
If the MSN you have cancelled was the send MSN (page 83) of an internal
user then a new send MSN (the MSN with the lowest ranked number) will
automatically be assigned to this internal user.
83
System settings
C1-C2 isdn / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / settings_bs.fm / 19.11.2003
Assigning a phone number (MSN)
You can assign certain individual phone numbers (MSN's) to registered terminals. When
doing this determine
which phone number makes a registered terminal ring (receive MSN)
under which number an internal user dials (send MSN).
Assigning a receive MSN
As supplied, a newly registered handset will ring whenever a phone number you have
set up is dialled.
If you want to assign the handset certain specific receive MSN's:
Assigning a send MSN
When the phone is supplied no send MSN has been entered. The exchange provides the
send MSN.
You can determine a send MSN for each internal user. This MSN is shown to the person
you call and the call is also charged to this MSN.
MENU
Open the menu.
s Base Settings OK
Select the menu item and confirm.
s Settings OK
Select the menu item and confirm.
~ OK
Enter system PIN if required (page 78).
s Setup user OK
Select the menu item and confirm.
s Setup device OK
Select the menu item and confirm.
s Int.11
Select internal number for the handset, e. g. Int.11.
MENU
Open the submenu.
s Receive MSN OK
Select the menu item and confirm.
s OK
Select MSN and confirm, e. g. MSN1: Anna.
MENU
Open the menu.
s Base Settings OK
Select the menu item and confirm.
s Settings OK
Select the menu item and confirm.
~ OK
Enter system PIN if required (page 78).
s Setup user OK
Select the menu item and confirm.
s Setup device OK
Select the menu item and confirm.
s Int.11
Select internal number, e. g. Int.11.
MENU
Open the submenu.
s Send MSN OK
Select the menu item and confirm.
s OK
Select MSN and confirm, e. g. MSN1: Anna.
84
System settings
C1-C2 isdn / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / settings_bs.fm / 19.11.2003
Assigning an MSN a ringer melody
Each new receive MSN you set up is automatically given its own ringer melody, which
you can change individually. For a receive MSN you can:
Select one of the available ringer melodies. This means that all handsets will use this
ringer melody to indicate an incoming call to a receive MSN.
Set handset external ringer. Then the handsets assigned to the receive MSN will
use the ringer melody set on the handset for external calls (page 91).
MENU
Open the menu.
s Base Settings OK
Select the menu item and confirm.
s Settings OK
Select the menu item and confirm.
~ OK
Enter system PIN if required (page 78).
s ISDN settings OK
Select the menu item and confirm.
s Set up MSN OK
Select the menu item and confirm.
s
Select MSN, e. g. MSN1: Anna.
MENU
Open the submenu.
s Ringer Melody: 5 OK
Select melody and confirm, e. g. Ringer Melody: 5
( = set).
85
System settings
C1-C2 isdn / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / settings_bs.fm / 19.11.2003
Forwarding external calls – Call Forwarding (CF)
For each receive MSN you can store a destination number for each of the following con-
ditions:
ImmediatelyOn busyOn no reply
Set up external call transfers are entered in a list. Active call transfers are identified in
this list.
When the phone is supplied, external call forwarding is not set.
Setting up the forwarding destination
Activating/deactivating external call forwarding
i
All three conditions can be activated at the same time.
MENU
Open the menu.
s Base Settings OK
Select the menu item and confirm.
s Ext. call forw. OK
Select the menu item and confirm.
~ OK
Enter system PIN if required (page 78). The list of set
up call transfers is displayed.
MENU
Open the submenu.
New entry OK
Confirm.
s OK
Select the receive MSN and confirm, e. g. MSN1:
Anna.
s Immediately OK
Select condition and confirm, e. g. Immediately.
You will be notified if you have selected an MSN for
which another internal user has already set up call
forwarding. You can either return to the selection of
other settings with a short press on the end call key,
or continue with
OK.
~ MENU
Enter number and open the menu.
Save entry OK
Confirm.
Yes
Confirm to set up call forwarding.
MENU
Open the menu.
s Base Settings OK
Select the menu item and confirm.
s Ext. call forw. OK
Select the menu item and confirm.
~ OK
Enter system PIN if required (page 78).
s
Select call forwarding, e. g. MSN1 to 22222.
MENU
Open the submenu.
either ...
Activate:
86
System settings
C1-C2 isdn / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / settings_bs.fm / 19.11.2003
Editing an entry
Deleting external call forwarding
s Activate? OK
Select the menu item and confirm.
or ...
Deactivate:
s Deactivate? OK
Select the menu item and confirm.
You will be notified if you have selected call forward-
ing that another internal user has already set up.
You can either return to the selection of other set-
tings with a short press on the end call key, or con-
tinue with
OK.
MENU
Open the menu.
s Base Settings OK
Select the menu item and confirm.
s Ext. call forw. OK
Select the menu item and confirm.
~ OK
Enter system PIN if required (page 78).
s
Select call forwarding, e. g. MSN1 to 33333.
MENU
Open the submenu.
s Edit entry OK
Select the menu item and confirm.
You will be notified if you have selected call forward-
ing that another internal user has already set up.
You can either return to the selection of other set-
tings with a short press on the end call key, or con-
tinue with
OK.
~ MENU
Enter the new number and open the menu.
Save entry OK
Confirm.
Yes
Confirm to set up call forwarding.
MENU
Open the menu.
s Base Settings OK
Select the menu item and confirm.
s Ext. call forw. OK
Select the menu item and confirm.
~ OK
Enter system PIN if required (page 78).
s
Select call forwarding, e. g. MSN1 to 22222.
MENU
Open the submenu.
s Delete entry OK
Select the menu item and confirm.
You will be notified if you have selected call forward-
ing that another internal user has already set up.
You can either return to the selection of other set-
tings with a short press on the end call key, or con-
tinue with OK.
87
System settings
C1-C2 isdn / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / settings_bs.fm / 19.11.2003
Activating/deactivating Call Waiting – (CW)
This function can be set up separately for each user. When call waiting is activated the
caller will hear the ringing tone if you are already making a call. This call is announced
both acoustically, and visually on your handset screen.
When call waiting is deactivated, the caller will hear the ringing tone if you are already
making a call and other phones are assigned to this MSN.
When call waiting is deactivated, the caller will hear the busy tone if you are already
making a call and yours is the only phone assigned to this MSN.
This function is activated when the phone is supplied. For call waiting with an external
call see page 25.
MENU
Open the menu.
s Base Settings OK
Select the menu item and confirm.
s Settings OK
Select the menu item and confirm.
~ OK
Enter system PIN if required (page 78).
s Setup user OK
Select the menu item and confirm.
s Setup device OK
Select the menu item and confirm.
s Int.11
Select internal number, e. g. Int.11.
MENU
Open the submenu.
s Call waiting OK
Select the menu item and confirm ( = activated).
88
System settings
C1-C2 isdn / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / settings_bs.fm / 19.11.2003
Configuring the answering machine on the network for fast access
Precondition: You cannot use your network provider’s answering machine on the net-
work unless you have requested this from your network provider.
As soon as the answering machine’s phone number is entered on the network, the fast
access capability is available to you: By pressing and holding the
1 key, you can dial
the answering machine directly on the network.
Enter/delete phone number for the answering machine on the network
This setting is now valid for all registered handsets and the base.
at the base:
CX100isdn SX100isdn CX205isdn CX203isdn SX303isdn
MENU
Open the menu.
s Base Settings OK
Select the menu item and confirm.
s Settings OK
Select the menu item and confirm.
~ OK
Enter system PIN if required (page 78).
s System settings OK
Select the menu item and confirm.
s Network Mailb. OK
Select the menu item and confirm. If the phone
number has been assigned, it will appear on the
screen.
MENU
Open the submenu.
either ...
Create or edit a number:
Change number OK
Confirm.
~
Enter or change a number for the answering
machine on the network.
MENU
Open the submenu.
Save entry OK
Confirm.
or ...
Delete number:
s Delete number OK
Select the menu item and confirm.
89
System settings
C1-C2 isdn / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / settings_bs.fm / 19.11.2003
Calling the answering machine on the network
Press 1 and hold. This connects you directly to the answering machine. If you now
press the handsfree key
d, you can 'open listen' to the announcement of the answer-
ing machine and operate it easily and conveniently on the network.
Display/play back a message on the answering machine on the network
When a message arrives for you, you get a call from the answering machine on the net-
work. If you have requested Calling Line Identification, the display shows e. g. the
number 0800 330 2424, for the network mailbox. If you accept the call, the new mes-
sages are played back. If you do not accept the call, the number of the answering
machine is stored in the list of missed calls on the network and the message key flashes.
Restoring the factory setting
All functions are restored to the factory settings. The system PIN is reset to "0000". All
entries (caller list) are deleted.
i
Before resetting, deactivate all active call transfers! The handsets are still
registered.
MENU
Open the menu.
s Base Settings OK
Select the menu item and confirm.
s Settings OK
Select the menu item and confirm.
~ OK
Enter system PIN if required (page 78).
s System settings OK
Select the menu item and confirm.
s Spec. function OK
Select the menu item and confirm.
s Factory setting OK
Select the menu item and confirm.
s Reset all OK
Select the menu item and confirm.
90
Individual handset settings
C1-C2 isdn / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / settings_hs.fm / 19.11.2003
Individual handset settings
Your handset has default settings. You can change these settings individually.
Changing the display language
You can view the display texts in different languages.
Activating/deactivating Auto Answer
If you have activated this function, simply remove the handset from the base or the
charger when you receive a call (factory setting: On).
MENU
Press display key to open menu.
s Settings OK
Select the menu item and confirm.
s Language OK
Select the menu item and confirm. The current lan-
guage is checked
(the default setting is English).
s OK Select a language and confirm.
a
Long press (back to idle status).
i
If you set the wrong language in error, press MENU M 2. Now
select the correct language with
s and press OK to confirm your
choice.
When you change the display language the character set can change
too, e. g. for Russian.
MENU
Press display key to open menu.
s Settings OK
Select the menu item and confirm.
Auto Answer OK
Confirm to deactivate or activate the function
(
=activated).
a
Long press (back to idle status).
91
Individual handset settings
C1-C2 isdn / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / settings_hs.fm / 19.11.2003
Adjusting the loudspeaker volume
You can adjust the handsfree volume to five levels and the earpiece volume to three
levels – even while an external call is in progress.
Changing the ringer tone
You can set the ringer tone individually.
A range of options is available:
Six volume levels:
Five volume levels (1–5; e. g. volume level 2 =
ˆ),
"Crescendo" call (6; the volume increases with each ring =
).
Ten melodies (1–10; melodies 1–3 are the "classical ringer tones")
Changing the ringer melody
Gigaset C1:
You can set the ringer individually for an internal or an external call.
Gigaset C2:
You can set the ringer individually for an internal or external call, for a wake-up call or
for an appointment.
MENU
Press display key to open menu.
s Audio Settings OK
Select the menu item and confirm.
Earpiece Volume OK
Confirm. You hear the current setting.
v OK
Select the earpiece volume and confirm.
s Handsfree Volume OK
Select the menu item and confirm.
v OK
Select the handsfree volume and confirm.
a
Long press (back to idle status).
i
Setting the ringer melody on the handset is only effective, if the handset
external ringer is set instead of a ringer melody (page 83) for the incom-
ing MSN of the handset.
MENU
Press display key to open menu.
s Audio Settings OK
Select the menu item and confirm.
s Ringer Melody OK
Select the menu item and confirm.
either ...
For external calls:
External Calls OK
Confirm.
or ...
For internal calls:
s Internal Calls OK
Select the menu item and confirm.
or ...
For an appointment (on the C2; page 76):
92
Individual handset settings
C1-C2 isdn / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / settings_hs.fm / 19.11.2003
Adjusting the ringer volume
Activating/deactivating the ringer
All handsets ring when there is an incoming call. You can cancel the ringer on your
handset before you answer a call or when the handset is in idle status; the ringer can be
cancelled permanently or just for the current call.
To cancel the ringer in idle status, press the
P key and hold until the Ú icon appears.
The ringer cannot be re-activated while an external call is in progress.
s Appointment OK
Select the menu item and confirm.
or ...
For a wake-up call (on the C2; page 75):
s Alarm Clock OK
Select the menu item and confirm.
or ...
To set all functions to ring the same (on the C2):
s All Ringer Tones OK
Select the menu item and confirm.
Use same melody for all? OK
Confirm.
... then
Melody 1 OK
Confirm melody, e. g. Melody 1
(
= activated).
a
Long press (back to idle status).
MENU
Press display key to open menu.
s Audio Settings OK
Select the menu item and confirm.
s Ringer Volume OK
Select the menu item and confirm.
v OK
You hear the current volume. Select volume and
confirm.
a
Long press (back to idle status).
Cancelling the ringer permanently:
P
Press the star key and hold until the ringer cannot be
heard any longer. The ringer is now permanently
cancelled. The
Ú icon appears in the display.
Re-activating the ringer:
P
Press the star key and hold.
93
Individual handset settings
C1-C2 isdn / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / settings_hs.fm / 19.11.2003
Activating/deactivating advisory tones
Your handset uses "advisory tones" to tell you about different activities and statuses.
The following advisory tones can be activated and deactivated individually (the default
setting is On).
Key click: Every key press is confirmed.
Acknowledge tones:
Confirmation tone (rising tone sequence): at the end of an input/setting, when
the handset is placed in the base and when a text message or a new entry arrives
in the caller list or answering machine list
Error tone (a descending tone sequence): with incorrect inputs
End of menu tone: when scrolling at the end of a menu
Battery tone: The batteries must be charged.
MENU
Press display key to open menu.
s Audio Settings OK
Select the menu item and confirm.
s Advisory Tones OK
Select the menu item and confirm.
either ...
Activate/deactivate Key Tones:
Key Tones OK
Confirm ( = activated).
or ...
Activate/deactivate Battery Low:
s Battery Low OK
Select the menu item and confirm.
s On OK
Select and confirm condition (Off, On, During Call),
e. g. On (checked with
).
a
Press the "end call" key briefly to return to the previ-
ous menu level.
or ...
Activate/deactivate Confirmation Tone:
s Confirmation Tone OK
Select the menu item and confirm ( = activated).
... then
a
Long press (back to idle status).
94
Individual handset settings
C1-C2 isdn / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / settings_hs.fm / 19.11.2003
Resetting a handset to the factory setting
You can reset individual settings and changes you have made. This will not affect
entries in the directory, the calls list, or the speed dial list, nor the handset's registration
to the base or logos and melodies that you have loaded.
Press
a to cancel the reset.
Factory settings of the handset
MENU
Press display key to open menu.
s Handset Settings OK
Select the menu item and confirm.
s Reset Handset OK
Select the menu item and confirm.
OK
Press the display key to confirm the prompt.
a
Long press (back to idle status).
Base selection Best Base page 15
Earpiece volume 1 page 91
Handsfree volume 3 page 91
Ringer volume 5 page 91
Ringer melody 1 page 91
Auto answer activated page 90
Battery tone/Key click/Confirmation tone activated page 93
Display language country specific page 90
Alarm clock/Appointment (on the C2) deactivated page 75/
page 76
Appointment name (on the C2) deleted page 76
Last number redial list empty page 31
Room monitor/room monitor sensitivity (on the
C2)
deactivated/high page 71/
page 71
95
Operating with other devices
C1-C2 isdn / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / devices.fm / 11.09.2003
Operating with other devices
Setting device type
Making calls with devices on the analogue connection
(TAE connection)
Telephones with tone dialling (DTMF = dual tone multi-frequency dialling) can be oper-
ated on analogue connections. Telephones with pulse dialling are not supported.
at the base:
SX205isdn SX255isdn SX303isdn SX353isdn
MENU
Press display key to open menu.
s Set base OK
Select the menu item and confirm.
s Settings OK
Select the menu item and confirm.
~ OK
Enter system PIN if required (page 78).
s Setup user OK
Select the menu item and confirm.
Setup device OK
Confirm.
sINT 21
Select the internal number, e. g. INT 1121.
MENU
Open the submenu.
s Device type OK
Select the menu item and confirm.
sFax
Select a device type and confirm, e. g. Fax.
MENU
Open the submenu.
Save entry OK
Confirm. The name is now shown in the internal list,
including when an internal call is made from this
internal number.
i
If the setting is changed from a device type that does not require a receive
MSN to one that does, all MSNs that are programmed in the system will
be transferred as active receive MSNs for this internal user.
at the base:
SX205isdn SX255isdn SX303isdn SX353isdn
i
For notes on making calls with devices on the analogue connection,
please refer to the operator’s manual for the base.
96
Operating with other devices
C1-C2 isdn / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / devices.fm / 11.09.2003
Activating/deactivating Auto engaged
When Auto engaged is activated, the exchange line becomes engaged as soon as the
receiver is picked up. This means that normal internal dialling is no longer possible.
However, an internal call can be made as an enquiry call by pressing the
S key.
Activating/deactivating repeater mode
You can increase the range of your handsets with the Gigaset Repeater. You can operate
up to six repeaters on your base. To ensure the repeater is installed correctly, repeater
mode must be activated on the base.
You can use this function to activate and deactivate repeater mode.
By factory default, this repeater capability is deactivated.
MENU
Press display key to open menu.
s Set base OK
Select the menu item and confirm.
s Settings OK
Select the menu item and confirm.
~ OK
Enter system PIN if required (page 78).
s Setup user OK
Select the menu item and confirm.
Setup device OK
Confirm.
sINT 21
Select the internal number, e. g., INT 1121.
MENU
Open the submenu.
s Auto. seizure OK
Select the menu item and confirm.
MENU
Press display key to open menu.
s Set base OK
Select the menu item and confirm.
s Settings OK
Select the menu item and confirm.
~ OK
Enter system PIN if required (page 78).
s System settings OK
Select the menu item and confirm.
s Spec. function OK
Select the menu item and confirm.
s Repeater OK
Select the menu item and confirm ( = activated).
OK
Press the display key to confirm the prompt.
a
Long press (back to idle status).
97
Operating when connected to a PABX
C1-C2 isdn / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / pabx.fm / 11.09.2003
Operating when connected to a PABX
Access code
Precondition: If your telephone is connected to a PABX, you must
– depending on your PABX – enter an access code for external calls when you use the
machine for the first time. See the operating instructions for your PABX. You can enter
a one to four-digit access code.
For incoming calls, the access code is automatically placed in front of the caller's phone
number in the display and in the calls lists, and likewise when copied to the directory.
The saved phone number can then be dialled e. g. directly from the caller list (see
page 32).
Dialling options
The KEYPAD function allows you to control certain services by entering sequences of
characters and digits.
You should set the KEYPAD function if your telephone is connected to an ISDN PABX or
to an exchange (e. g. Centrex), which is controlled by means of a KEYPAD protocol. The
digits/characters 0 to 9, *, # are transmitted as keypad information elements. Please
inquire of your service provider about which information and codes you can transmit.
i
Note the special features of text messages on PABXs (page 50).
MENU
Open the menu.
s Base Settings OK
Select the menu item and confirm.
s Settings OK
Select the menu item and confirm.
~ OK
Enter system PIN if required (page 78).
s System settings OK
Select the menu item and confirm.
Access code OK
Confirm.
~ MENU
Enter access code and open the menu.
Save entry OK
Confirm.
i
For manual dialling and entering directory, emergency and direct dial
numbers you must also enter the access code.
98
Operating when connected to a PABX
C1-C2 isdn / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / pabx.fm / 11.09.2003
If your telephone is integrated in a Centrex system, the following performance features
can be used.
Setting options
You can switch between the settings Standard dial (factory setting), Auto keypad and
Dial * and #.
Standard dial
Once Standard dial has been activated, * and # are not transmitted during dialling, and
if * and # are entered it is not possible to switch to the keypad.
Auto keypad
Once * or # has been entered, this setting automatically transfers ringing during dialling
to the keypad. This automatic switchover is needed for giving commands to the
exchange or PABX.
Dial * and #
Once Dial * and # has been activated, the * and # characters are transmitted during
dialling as commands to the exchange or PABX.
Regardless of the setting options above, after dialling or during the conversation, the
phone switches automatically to tone dialling (DTMF), for instance for remote control
of an answering machine.
Calling Name Identification
(CNI)
When you receive calls from other CENTREX subscrib-
ers, the caller's number and name are displayed on
the screen.
Message Waiting Indication
(MWI)
The display key
Ü is offered on added-feature hand-
sets if new calls are present in the calls list. Calling up
the calls list deletes the display key
Ü.
CENTREX call A CENTREX call is announced acoustically in the same
way as an internal call.
MENU
Open the menu.
s Base Settings OK
Select the menu item and confirm.
s Settings OK
Select the menu item and confirm.
~ OK
Enter system PIN if required (page 78).
s System settings OK
Select the menu item and confirm.
s Spec. function OK
Select the menu item and confirm.
s Dial properties OK
Select the menu item and confirm.
s Standard dial OK
Select the setting and confirm, e. g. Standard dial
(
= activated).
99
Making calls with the door subscriber station
C1-C2 isdn / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / door_intercom.fm / 11.09.2003
Making calls with the door subscriber station
Calling from the door subscriber station
In a call with the door subscriber station, the following features are not available:
Hold a call
Enquiry from a call with the door subscriber station
Toggling a user at the door subscriber station
Conference with a user at the door subscriber station
Forwarding or transferring a call from the door subscriber station
The door subscriber station calls internal users for 20 seconds. If call forwarding from
the subscriber station is directed externally, the ringing time is extended to 60 seconds.
on handset:
C2
at the base:
SX205isdn SX255isdn SX303isdn SX353isdn
c
Press the talk key. You are connected to the door
subscriber station. The
Door icon appears on the
screen.
... then
a
Press end call key.
or ...
MENU
Open the menu.
Door open OK
Select and confirm to store the door opener. The
door opener is opened. The following confirmation
is displayed on the screen
Door is opening. The con-
nection with the door subscriber station is ended
automatically when the door is opened.
100
Making calls with the door subscriber station
C1-C2 isdn / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / door_intercom.fm / 11.09.2003
Call waiting at the door subscriber station
The door subscriber station calls internal users for 20 seconds. If call forwarding from
the subscriber station is directed externally, the ringing time is extended to 60 seconds.
Accept call waiting
Press the display key
ACCEPT. You accept the waiting call.
If the interrupted call is an internal call, it is disconnected when the waiting call is picked
up.
If the interrupted call is an external call, it is placed on hold when the waiting call is
picked up. Both parties are shown on the display, the current one is marked.
Changing parties
If the interrupted call is an internal call, you can change conversation partners.
Internal call with door subscriber station
You can call the door subscriber station internally (page 16).
MENU
Open the menu.
Accept OK
Select and confirm to store the door opener. The
door opener is opened. The following confirmation
is displayed on the screen
Door is opening. The con-
nection with the door subscriber station is ended
automatically when the door is opened.
a
End your current call. The waiting call becomes a
normal call.
c
Press the talk key to answer the call.
101
Appendix
C1-C2 isdn / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / appendix.fm / 19.11.2003
Appendix
Care
Wipe the base and handset with a damp cloth (use no solvent) or an antistatic cloth.
Never use a dry cloth. This can cause static.
Contact with liquid
If the handset should come into contact with liquid, on no account switch the device
on. Remove all batteries immediately.
Allow the liquid to drain out of the device, and then pat all parts of the device dry.
Keep the handset with the batteries removed in a warm, dry place for at least 72 hours.
In many cases, you will then be able to use it again.
Questions and answers
If you have any questions about the use of your phone, you can contact us 24/7 at
www.my-siemens.com/customercare
. You will find the most frequently asked ques-
tions and answers below.
!
What has happened
when …
Possible cause Possible solution
… the display is blank? The handset is not switched on.
The batteries are flat.
Press the end call key a
for about 2 seconds.
Charge or replace the batteries
(page 9).
… the handset fails to respond
to a key press?
The keypad lock is activated. Press the hash key
R
for about 2 seconds to deacti-
vate the lock (page 10).
Base 1 or Searching for
Base, for example, is flashing
on the screen?
The handset is outside the range
of the base.
The handset is not registered.
The base is not switched on.
Move the handset nearer to the
base.
Register the handset
(page 14).
Check the power connector at
the base.
… the handset does not ring? The ringer is switched off. Switch on the ringer in the
handset (page 92) or the base
S150.
… the incoming call number is
not displayed even though
CLIP is set?
Calling Line Identification is
blocked.
The caller must ask his network
provider to enable the identifi-
cation of his number (CLI).
102
Appendix
C1-C2 isdn / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / appendix.fm / 19.11.2003
… the calls list does not indi-
cate a time for a message?
Date/time are not set. Set the date/time (page 74).
… the answering machine
says "PIN is incorrect" during
remote operation?
The answering machine PIN
entered is incorrect or still set to
0000.
Enter the answering machine
PIN again or set a PIN that is dif-
ferent from 0000 (page 78).
… the answering machine
does not record any messages
or has automatically switched
over to 'announce only'?
Its memory is full. Delete old messages.
Play back new messages and
delete.
… the handset does not ring
after the ISDN number (MSN)
has been set up?
The area prefix has been stored
with the MSN.
Store MSN without area prefix
(page 81).
… there are no incoming
calls?
Call forwarding Immediately
has been activated.
The MSN has not been assigned
to the internal user.
Deactivate call forwarding
Immediately (page 85).
Determine the receive MSN
(page 83).
… you cannot access the
answering machine?
The answering machine lock has
been activated.
Enter answering machine PIN
(page 66).
… you are unable to record
any new information or
announcements?
There is insufficient remaining
memory.
Delete old messages/informa-
tion (page 60).
Reduce the quality of the
recordings (page 64).
… you have a PABX and, after
dialling, the wrong connec-
tion or no connection is
made?
You have entered the wrong pre-
fix or no prefix.
Check and correct the prefix
(page 97).
the handset does not ring
as set?
There is a different setting for
the ringer melody for the MSN.
Change the ringer tone melody
(page 84).
… it is not possible to access
the answering machine from
the handset?
The handset is not assigned to
the receive MSN for the answer-
ing machine.
Check assignment (page 62).
… some of the ISDN func-
tions do not work as stated?
The ISDN function has not been
enabled.
Check with your network pro-
vider.
… the handset does not
receive an SMS as a text mes-
sage?
You are not registered with both
SMS centres.
Register with SMS centres
(page 40).
What has happened
when …
Possible cause Possible solution
103
Appendix
C1-C2 isdn / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / appendix.fm / 19.11.2003
Service (Customer Care)
You have access to straightforward support concerning with technical aspects of your
device and how to operate it through our Online Support on the Internet:
This site can be accessed at any time wherever you are. It will give you 24/7 support for
all our products. It also provides interactive troubleshooting, a list of FAQs and answers
plus operating instructions and current software updates for you to download.
You will also find the FAQs and answers in the Questions and Answers section
(page 101) of this guide.
If you have any trouble with the equipment, please contact the Siemens telephone
service:
The Siemens Service is available to deal with device faults only. Your specialist dealer
will be able to help you with any questions about operating your device.
Please address any questions about the DSL or cable connection to your network
provider.
Replacement or repair services are not offered in countries where our product is not
sold by authorised dealers.
Your Gigaset is intended for operation in your country, as depicted on the underside of
the base station. Country-specific conditions have been taken into account.
The CE mark attests to the phone's compliance with the essential requirements of the
R&TTE directive.
Excerpt from the original declaration:
"We, Siemens AG, declare, that the above mentioned product is manufactured according to our
Full Quality Assurance System certified by CETECOM ICT Services GmbH in compliance with ANNEX
V of the R&TTE-Directive 99/5/EC. The presumption of conformity with the essential requirements
regarding Council Directive 99/5/EC is ensured."
Senior Approvals Manager
The Declaration of Conformity (DoC) has been signed. In case of need, a copy of the original DoC
can be made available via the company hotline.
www.my-siemens.com/customercare
United Kingdom 0 87 05 33 44 11
Ireland 18 50 77 72 77
104
Appendix
C1-C2 isdn / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / appendix.fm / 19.11.2003
Specifications
Recommended batteries
Handset operating times/charging times
These operating and charging times apply only when using the recommended batter-
ies. The battery charge capacity decreases after a few years for technical reasons.
Nickel-cadmium (NiCd) Nickel-metal-hydride (NiMH):
Sanyo N-3U
(700 mAh)
Saft RH 6 NiMH 1300
(1300 mAh)
Mobile Power 700
(700 mAh)
Panasonic HHR-110 AA
(1100 mAh)
Panasonic 600 DT
(600 mAh)
Sanyo HR-3U
(1600 mAh)
Emmerich 700
(700 mAh)
GP GP130 AAHC
(1300 mAh)
Varta Phone Power
(1300 mAh)
Emmerich 1300
(1300 mAh)
Capacity
(mAh)
Standby time
(hours)
Calling time
(hours)
Charging time
(hours)
700 up to 180 more than 10 approx. 5.5
1200 up to 300 more than 17 approx. 11
1600 up to 400 more than 23 approx. 14
i
For the initial charge we recommend a continuous, uninterrupted charg-
ing period (see table), whatever charge status is indicated!
105
Appendix
C1-C2 isdn / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / appendix.fm / 19.11.2003
General Specifications
Character set chart
Standard characters
Press the relevant key repeatedly or hold it down
Feature Value
DECT standard is supported
GAP standard is supported
No. of channels 60 duplex channels
Radio frequency range 1880–1900 MHz
Duplex method Time multiplex, 10 ms frame length
Channel grid 1728 kHz
Bit rate 1152 kbit/s
Modulation GFSK
Language code 32 kbit/s
Transmission power 10 mW, average power per channel
Range up to 300 m outdoors, up to 50 m indoors
Environmental conditions for operation +5 °C to +45 °C;
20 % to 75 % humidity
Dialling mode DTMF (tone dialling) / DP (dial pulsing)
Dimensions/Handset Gigaset C1: approx. 151 x 55 x 27 mm (L × W × H)
Gigaset C2: approx. 151 x 55 x 27 mm (L x H x W)
Weight Gigaset C1: Handset with battery cells approx. 130 g
Gigaset C2: Handset with battery cells approx. 129 g
1 x 2 x3 x4 x5 x6 x7 x8 x9 x10 x11 x12 x13 x14 x
1
Space
1
â
£$¥¤
2 a bc2äáàâãç
I d ef 3ëéèê
4 ghi4ïíìî
5 jkl5
L mno6öñóòôõ
M pqrs7ß
N t uv8üúùû
O wxyz9ÿýæøå
Q . ,?!0+-: ¿¡ " ; _
P
Abc-->
abc
abc -->
123
*
/()<=>%
R #@\&§
106
Appendix
C1-C2 isdn / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / appendix.fm / 19.11.2003
Creating and editing text
On the Gigaset C2 you can also use the predictive text function (page 109).
You can create and edit text in a number of ways:
The cursor is controlled with u v t s.
Characters (to the left of the cursor) are deleted with Û.
Characters are added to the left of the cursor (page 12).
To switch from upper case (first letter written in upper case, all other letters in lower
case) to lower case, press the
P key before you enter the letter. Pressing the
P key again switches from lower case letters to digits. Press again to return to
upper case letters.
The first letter of the name of directory entries is automatically capitalised, followed
by lower case letters.
When you press a key and hold it, the characters of that key appear in the bottom
display line and are highlighted one after the other. When you release the key the
highlighted character is inserted into the input field.
You can see in the display whether upper case, lower case or digits are selected:
"A" or "a" appears on the bottom display line when you make an entry in the
directory.
"Abc", "abc" or "123" appears at the top right of the screen when a text message
is entered.
Order of directory entries
As a rule, entries in the directory are arranged in alphabetical order, although blank
spaces and numerals (digits) take first priority. The order in which entries occur is as
follows:
1. Space (shown here as
s)
2. Digits (0–9)
3. Letters (alphabetical)
4. Other characters
If you want to circumvent the alphabetical order of the entries in the directory, insert a
space before the name. This entry then goes to the first position (example: "
sCarla").
You can also number the entries with digits (e. g. "1Jane", "2Mary", "3John").
Names prefixed with a star (e. g. "*Jane") appear at the end of the directory.
107
Appendix
C1-C2 isdn / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / appendix.fm / 19.11.2003
Guarantee certificate (United Kingdom)
Without prejudice to any claim the user (customer) may have in relation to the dealer
or retailer, the customer shall be granted a manufacturer's Guarantee under the condi-
tions set out below:
In the case of new devices and their components exhibiting defects resulting from
manufacturing and/or material faults within 24 months of purchase, Siemens shall,
at its own option and free of charge, either replace the device with another device
reflecting the current state of the art, or repair the said device. In respect of parts
subject to wear and tear (including but not limited to, batteries, keypads, casing),
this warranty shall be valid for six months from the date of purchase.
This Guarantee shall be invalid if the device defect is attributable to improper treat-
ment and/or failure to comply with information contained in the user manuals.
This Guarantee shall not apply to or extend to services performed by the authorised
dealer or the customer themselves (e.g. installation, configuration, software down-
loads). User manuals and any software supplied on a separate data medium shall be
excluded from the Guarantee.
The purchase receipt, together with the date of purchase, shall be required as evi-
dence for invoking the Guarantee. Claims under the Guarantee must be submitted
within two months of the Guarantee default becoming evident.
Ownership of devices or components replaced by and returned to Siemens shall vest
in Siemens.
This Guarantee shall apply to new devices purchased in the European Union. The
Guarantee is issued by Siemens plc, Siemens House, Oldbury, Bracknell, Berkshire,
RG12 8FZ.
Any other claims resulting out of or in connection with the device shall be excluded
from this Guarantee. Nothing in this Guarantee shall attempt to limit or exclude a
Customers Statutory Rights, nor the manufacturer's liability for death or personal
injury resulting from its negligence.
The duration of the Guarantee shall not be extended by services rendered under the
terms of the Guarantee.
Insofar as no Guarantee default exists, Siemens reserves the right to charge the cus-
tomer for replacement or repair.
The above provisions does not imply a change in the burden of proof to the detri-
ment of the customer.
To invoke this Guarantee, please contact the Siemens telephone service. The relevant
number is to be found in the accompanying user guide.
Guarantee certificate (Ireland)
Scope
This equipment guarantee applies to end users ("customers"). This guarantee does
not in any way affect the customer's statutory rights.
The guarantee applies to the supplied devices and all their components but not to
their installation or configuration or to the services provided by the dealer. Manuals
and any software supplied on a separate data medium are excluded from the guar-
antee. This guarantee does not apply to decorative covers or any other personalised
108
Appendix
C1-C2 isdn / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / appendix.fm / 19.11.2003
parts or software not included in the scope of supply. The guarantee also does not
apply to decorative top or bottom shells for special editions.
The guarantee provides for devices or components that, despite proper care and
use, have demonstrably developed defects due to faulty workmanship and/or faulty
materials to be replaced or repaired at our discretion free of charge. The guarantee
does not cover normal wear and tear. Alternatively, we reserve the right to replace
the defective device with a successor model or reimburse the original purchase price
on return of the defective device. Our decision is final. Any legal claims are excluded.
Claims under the guarantee cannot be made if the defect or damage was caused by
improper care or use. Improper care or use includes the following:
Opening the device (this is classed as third-party intervention)
Manipulating components on the printed circuit board
Manipulating the software
Defects or damage caused by dropping, breaking, lightning or ingress of
moisture. This also applies if defects or damage were caused by mechanical,
chemical, radio interference or thermal factors (e.g. microwave, sauna, etc.).
Repairs or other work done by persons not authorised by us.
Devices fitted with accessories not authorised by Siemens.
Any further claims due to damage are excluded, such as damage arising outside the
device, provided this was not due to gross negligence and/or intent on our part.
Claims under the guarantee must be made as soon as the defect is noticed.
A till receipt showing the date of purchase must be presented as proof. Each claim
under the guarantee is accepted with the express reservation that subsequent inves-
tigations confirm the validity of the claim.
Any devices or components that are replaced become our property.
The costs of materials and labour will be borne by us, but not the costs of transport,
postage or freight.
We are entitled, at our discretion, to make technical changes (such as firmware
updates) beyond repair or replacement in order to upgrade the device to the latest
state of the art. There is no additional charge to the customer for this work. Our deci-
sion is final. Any legal claims are excluded.
The guarantee is valid in the country of purchase. It applies only if the device is oper-
ated in the relevant geographical area in accordance with the information on the
packaging and in the operating instructions.
Any further claims are excluded. Siemens is not liable in any circumstances for
downtime, loss of profits, loss of data or loss of any other information. The customer
alone is responsible for safeguarding such data and information.
Changes to this guarantee require prior approval by Siemens in writing.
Guarantee period
The guarantee applies in countries in the EU from 1 January 2002 for a period of 24
months.
In all other countries the guarantee period shall be the relevant minimum statutory
guarantee period, but no longer than 24 months.
The guarantee period starts on the day of purchase by the customer.
A successful claim under the guarantee does not extend the guarantee period.
Work under the guarantee is handled by our Customer Care Centres.
109
Appendix
C1-C2 isdn / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / appendix.fm / 19.11.2003
Predictive text
The EATONI predictive text helps you to write:
Text messages,
Names in the directory,
Names in the speed dial list.
Each key between
Q and O is assigned several letters and characters which all
appear on a selection line immediately above the softkeys (beneath the text area) as
soon as you press a key. When you are entering letters, the letter you are most proba-
bly looking for is greyed. This letter is at the beginning of the selection line and is trans-
ferred to the text area.
If this letter is the one you want, confirm it by pressing the next key. If the letter selected
by the EATONI is not the one you want, then press the hash key
R repeatedly until
the required letter appears greyed in the display line and is transferred to the text area.
Activating/deactivating predictive text
Predictive text is activated and deactivated according to specific functions. Even if you
have deactivated EATONI, e. g. when entering a name in the telephone, it is still availa-
ble for writing text messages.
Precondition: You are in a text input field (text message, name in the directory or speed
dial list).
on handset:
C2
U
Hello Peter, my k
klj5
ÛuvMENU
Text of the message
Selection line
P
Press the star key for about 2 seconds: Switches from abc to Abc, from Abc
to 123 and from 123 back to abc mode (applies to the next letter).
R
Goes to the next letter in the selection list (greyed).
MENU
Press display key to open menu.
s Predictive Text OK
Select the menu item and confirm ( = On).
a
Press the "end call" key briefly to return to the text
area. Now enter your text.
110
Menu Tree
C1-C2 isdn / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / menuetree.fm / 19.11.2003
Menu Tree
Main menu
Instead of scrolling to locate a menu function, you can select a menu function faster by
opening the menu and keying in the digit combination ("shortcut").
Example: MENU 541 for "set ringer melody for external calls".
With the telephone in the idle status, press MENU (open the menu).
Gigaset C1:
With the telephone in the idle status, press MENU (open menu):
1SMS Write message
Inbox
Outbox
Available memory
4 Calender/
Clock
4-3 Date/Time
4-4 Time Mode
5 Audio Settings 5-1 Earpiece Volume
5-2 Handsfree Volume
5-3 Ringer Volume
5-4 Ringer Melody 5-4-1 External Calls 5-4-1-1 Melody
1
5-4-1-... [to]
5-4-1-0 Melody
10
5-4-2 Internal Calls 5-4-2-1 Melody
1
5-4-2-... [to]
5-4-2-0 Melody
10
5-5 Advisory Tones 5-5-1 Key Tones
5-5-2 Battery Low 5-5-2-1 Off
5-5-2-2 On
5-5-2-3 During
Call
5-5-3 Confirmation
Tone
7Handset Set-
tings
7-1 Auto Answer
7-2 Language
7-3 Register Handset
7-4 Select Base (List)
7-5 Reset Handset
111
Menu Tree
C1-C2 isdn / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / menuetree.fm / 19.11.2003
Gigaset C2:
With the telephone in the idle status, press MENU (open menu):
8Base Settings
9 Voice Mail AM1
AM2
AM3
For continuation see submenu Base
Settings
(page 112)
For continuation see submenu
Voice Mail
(page 113)
3 Additional
Features
3-1 Room Monitor
3-2 Walk and Talk
4 Calender/
Clock
4-1 Set Appointment
4-2 Alarm Clock
4-3 Date/Time
4-4 Time Mode
5 Audio Settings 5-1 Earpiece Volume
5-2 Handsfree Volume
5-3 Ringer Volume
5-4 Ringer Melody 5-4-1 External Calls 5-4-1-1 Melody
1
5-4-1-... [to]
5-4-1-0 Melody
10
5-4-2 Internal Calls 5-4-2-1 Melody
1
5-4-2-... [to]
5-4-2-0 Melody
10
5-4-3 Appointment 5-4-3-1 Melody
1
5-4-3-... [to]
5-4-3-0 Melody
10
5-4-4 Alarm Clock 5-4-4-1 Melody
1
5-4-4-... [to]
5-4-4-0 Melody
10
5-4-5 All Ringer Tones 5-4-5-1 Melody
1
5-4-5-... [to]
5-4-5-0 Melody
10
5-5 Advisory Tones 5-5-1 Key Tones
5-5-2 Battery Low 5-5-2-1 Off
5-5-2-2 On
5-5-2-3 During
Call
112
Menu Tree
C1-C2 isdn / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / menuetree.fm / 19.11.2003
"Base Settings" submenu
To begin: with the handset in idle status, press MENU, s Base Settings OK or
MENU N
5-5-3 Confirmation
Tone
7Handset Set-
tings
7-1 Auto Answer
7-2 Language
7-3 Register Handset
7-4 Select Base
(List)
7-5 Reset Handset
8Base Settings
9 Voice Mail AM1
AM2
AM3
For continuation see submenu Base
Settings (page 112)
For continuation see submenu
Voice Mail (page 113)
Missed calls
(phone number list) -> Caller list menu (page 32)
Accepted calls
(phone number list) -> Caller list menu (page 32)
Ext. call forw. (List of existing exter-
nal diverts)
New entry
MSN list
Immediately
On busy
On no reply
Activate? Deactivate? – if divert activated
Edit entry Immediately
On busy
On no reply
Delete entry
Settings Security Change PIN (Enter PIN)
Emergency nos. Emergency numbers
(preconfigured)
Emergency numbers
(personal)
Change number
Delete number
Display number
Setup user Setup device Internal number -> Submenu for specific type
of device
De-reg. device
Select device
System settings Access code
AM auto. pickup
Network Mailb.
Telephone number
will be
displayed
Change number
Delete number
Spec. function Factory setting Reset all
Dial properties Standard dial
Auto keypad
113
Menu Tree
C1-C2 isdn / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / menuetree.fm / 19.11.2003
"Voice Mail" submenu
To begin: With the handset in idle status, press MENU, s Voice Mail OK or MENU
O
, select an answering machine, e. g. AM1, and confirm with OK.
Dial * and #
Repeater
ISDN settings Set up MSN List of all set up MSNs Edit entry
Ringer melody
Delete entry
Display entry
Unknown call = on
Service centres
(List of SMS service
centres)
Edit entry
Serv.centre on? or Serv.centre off?
Delete entry
Messages
List of all
messages AMx
Continue
Delete message
Call back
NET list
Repeat
Del.old mes-
sages
Display
Status to 'new'
Save number
Speed Slow
Normal speed
Fast
Very fast
Exit
Memos Record memo
Play memo
List of all memos
AMx
Continue
Delete
curr.memo
Repeat
Delete old
memos
Status to 'new'
Speed Slow
Normal speed
Fast
Very fast
Exit
Announce-
ments
Announcement 1
Announcement 2 Select
Announcem. only Record
Play back
Delete
114
Menu Tree
C1-C2 isdn / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / menuetree.fm / 19.11.2003
Directory key and speed dial list key
Press the directory key h or the speed dial list key C, select an entry with sand
press MENU to open the required list. The following menu functions are available:
Concl.announce
m
Record
Play back
Delete
Settings Message/Memo Message length 1 minute
2 minutes
3 minutes
Maximum
Time stamp
No. of rings Automatic 2/4
1 ring tone
to
9 ring tone
Automatic pause
Remote options Remote control
Remote delete
Change AM-PIN
AM lock
AM quality High quality
Long recording
Aut. listen in Activate? or Deactivate? – if activated
Select HS
SMS notificat. Activate? or Deactivate? – if activated
Change number
Delete number
Activate? or Deactivate? – if currently activated
New Entry
Use Number
Edit Entry
Delete Entry
Delete List
115
Index
C1-C2 isdn / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / C1_C2_isdnSIX.fm / 19.11.2003
Index
A
Accepting a call. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Access code
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Acknowledge tones
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Activating
Advisory tones
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Alarm clock
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Answer
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Answering machine
. . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Answering machine automatic
pause
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Answering machine voice
announcement
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Appointment
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Automatic pickup on the AM
. . . . . 67
Call forwarding
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Call waiting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Handset
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Listening in on the answering
machine
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Notification via text message (AM)
. 68
Repeater
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Ringer
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Room monitor
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Walk and Talk mode
. . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Activating automatic pause
. . . . . . . . 65
Activating/deactivating advisory tones 93
Activating/deactivating keypad
protection
. . . . . . . 1, 2, 10
Adjusting the loudspeaker volume
. . . 91
Alarm clock
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Activate/deactivate
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Machine
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Alarm to internal/external
(room monitor)
. . . . . . . 71
AM1
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
AM3
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Analogue
Making calls with analogue devices
95
Announce only (answering machine)
. 52
Announcement (answering machine)
52
Anny Way
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36, 37
Register/de-register
. . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Answer
Activate
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Auto answer
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Deactivate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Answer and record (answering machine)
Setting quality
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Setting time
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Answer and record
(answering machine)
. . . 52
Answering machine
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Access to list
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1, 2
Activate
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Activating automatic pause
. . . . . . . 65
Activating/deactivating lock
. . . . . . . 66
AM on the network
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Assigning a handset
. . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Assigning a receive MSN
. . . . . . . . . 62
Automatic listen in
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Automatic pickup
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Changing an announcement
. . . . . . 54
Checking settings
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Deactivate
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Defining PIN
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Delete announcement
. . . . . . . . . . 55
Deleting memos
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Deleting messages
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Denying
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Hiding/showing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Memos
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Notification via text message
. . . . . 68
Phone numbers in the directory
. . . . 61
Play back messages
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Playback speed
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Playing back an announcement
. . . . 55
Playing back memos
. . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Record memo
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Recording an announcement
. . . . . 54
Remote control
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Returning a call during playback
. . . 58
Selecting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Setting recording quality
. . . . . . . . . 64
Setting recording time
. . . . . . . . . . 64
Specifying the number of rings before
AM starts
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Spoken date/time
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Two-way recording
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Answering machine see also
Network mailbox
116
Index
C1-C2 isdn / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / C1_C2_isdnSIX.fm / 19.11.2003
Appointment
Activate/set
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Deactivate
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Name
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Not kept
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Setting the ringer
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Area code
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Area prefix, see area code
Assign
Phone number (MSN)
. . . . . . . . . . . 83
Receive MSN
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Ringer melody for MSN
. . . . . . . . . . 84
Send MSN
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Assigning the ringer melody
. . . . . . . 84
Automatic
Answer
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Automatic pickup on the AM
. . . . . . . 67
B
Back to idle state . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1, 2
Base
Change
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Selecting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Setting up
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Batteries
Charging
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Charging status display
. . . . . . . . . . . 9
Display
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Inserting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Recommended
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 7, 104
Battery charging status display
. . . 1, 2, 9
Battery tone
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Belt clip
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Best base
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15, 72
Brief overview of the handset
. . . . . . . 1
C
Call
Accept
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1, 2, 17
Ending
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1, 2, 16
Transfer internally (connect)
. . . . . . 16
Two-way recording
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Unknown
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Call forwarding
Activate/deactivate
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Clear
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Editing an entry
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
External
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Set up destination
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Call Hold
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
Call Waiting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25, 87
Call waiting
Accept
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
Activate
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87
at the door subscriber station
. . . .100
Deactivate
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87
Rejecting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
Callback
Accept
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
Activating
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
Clear
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
When the call is not answered
. . . . .19
When the number is busy
. . . . . . . .19
Call-by-Call numbers
. . . . . . . . . .26, 35
Caller list
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
Delete an entry
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
Opening the
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
Calling
External . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
Internal
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
Calling back a caller
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
Calling back an SMS sender
. . . . . . . .49
Calling back from calls list
. . . . . . . . . .33
Cancel
Function
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1, 2
Cancel function
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1, 2
Care of the telephone
. . . . . . . . . . . .101
CCBS
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
CCNR
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Centrex
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97
CF
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85
Change
Announcement (answering
machine)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54
Display language
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90
Loudspeaker volume
. . . . . . . . . . . .91
Name for an internal party
. . . . . . .80
Ringer
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91
SMS in the outgoing message list
. .44
System PIN
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78
Volume in handsfree mode
. . . . . . .19
Changing the display language
. . . . . .90
Changing the input language (SMS)
. .41
Changing the system PIN
. . . . . . . . . .78
Character set chart
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .105
Characters
Clear
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106
Enter
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
Overwriting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
117
Index
C1-C2 isdn / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / C1_C2_isdnSIX.fm / 19.11.2003
Charging the batteries
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Check
Settings (answering machine)
. . . . 61
Clear
Characters
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
External call forwarding
. . . . . . . . . 86
Phone number for the send centre
. 38
SMS entry
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
SMS incoming message list
. . . . . . 48
SMS outgoing message list
. . . . . . . 44
CLI
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
CLIP
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
CLIR
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
CNI
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
COLP
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
COLR
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Conference call
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Confirmation tone
. . . . . . . . . . . . 12, 93
Correcting wrong inputs
. . . . . . . . . . 12
Creating and editing text
. . . . . . . . . 106
CW
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25, 87
D
Date and time. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Date setting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Deactivate
Advisory tones
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Alarm clock
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Answer
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Answering machine
. . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Answering machine voice
announcement
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Appointment call
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Automatic pickup on the AM
. . . . . 67
Call forwarding
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Call waiting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Handset
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Listening in on the answering
machine
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Notification via text message (AM)
. 68
Repeater
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Ringer
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Walk and Talk mode
. . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Deactivate SMS send centre
. . . . . . . . 39
Default settings
Handset
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
restore
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Delete
Announcement on the answering
machine
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
directory entry
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Entry in speed dial list
. . . . . . . . . . . 29
ISDN phone numbers
. . . . . . . . . . . 82
Last number redial list
. . . . . . . . . . . 31
Memos (answering machine)
. . . . . 60
Messages (answering machine)
. . . . 60
Delete key
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Deleting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
De-registering
From SMS centre
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Handset
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14, 15
Deutsche Telekom AG
. . . . . . . . . . . . 36
SMS centre
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Devices
Making calls with analogue devices
. 95
Dialling
Cancel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
With the directory
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
With the speed dial list
. . . . . . . . . . 28
Directory
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Adding a phone number
. . . . . . 30, 61
Adding telephone number to
the directory
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Adding the phone number of an
SMS message sender
. . . . . . . . . . 49
Copy and edit an entry
. . . . . . . . . . 28
Delete an entry
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Dialling
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Display and edit an entry
. . . . . . . . . 28
Marking an entry as VIP
. . . . . . . . . 29
Opening the
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1, 2
Order of entries
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Selecting a telephone number from
the directory
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Send
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Send an entry to a handset
. . . . . . . 30
Storing a number
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Use to input telephone number
. . . . 30
Directory key
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 1, 2, 8, 11
Display
12/24 hour display
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Caller's phone number
. . . . . . . . . . 18
Changing language
. . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Display keys
. . . . . . . . . . . . 1, 2, 8, 11
In idle status
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Memory
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Missed appointments
. . . . . . . . . . . 77
118
Index
C1-C2 isdn / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / C1_C2_isdnSIX.fm / 19.11.2003
Network mailbox message
. . . . . . . 89
Phone number (CLI/CLIP)
. . . . . . . . 17
Removing protective film
. . . . . . . . . 9
Door subscriber station
Call waiting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Internal call
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Making calls
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
E
Earpiece mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1, 2, 19
EATONI
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26, 42, 109
ECT
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Emergency numbers
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Enable
SMS send centre
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
End call key
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1, 2, 16
Enquiry call
External. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Internal
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Entry (directory)
Clear
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Display and edit
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Find and dial
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Error message, see SMS
Error tone
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12, 93
Errors when
Receiving an SMS
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Sending an SMS
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Exit
Call
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1, 2
External call
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Internal call
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
F
Fast access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Network mailbox
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
For access code, see
Forwarding a text message
. . . . . . . . 48
Forwarding calls
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
G
Gigaset repeater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Group call to internal users
. . . . . . . . 17
H
Handset
Activate/deactivate
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
As room monitor in Walk and
Talk mode
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Brief overview
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1, 2
Call
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
Change for best reception
. . . . . . . .15
Change to another base
. . . . . . . . .15
Charging times
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104
Deactivate
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10
Default settings
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94
De-register
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
Idle status
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
Machine
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10
Operating and charging times
. . . .104
Operating time
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104
Preparing to use
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9
preparing to use
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9
Register on another base
. . . . . . . . .15
Registering
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14
Restore factory settings
. . . . . . . . . .94
Settings (individual)
. . . . . . . . . . . .90
Transferring a call
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
use as room monitor
. . . . . . . . . . . .70
Handset charging times
. . . . . . . . . .104
Handset idle status
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
Handsfree
Activate/deactivate
. . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Adjust volume
. . . . . . . . . . . . .13, 19
Handsfree key
. . . . . . . . . . . .1, 2, 8, 11
Hash key
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1, 2, 10
Hearing aids
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7
Hide (answering machine)
. . . . . . . . .63
I
Incoming message list (SMS) . . . .41, 46
Clear
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48
Opening the
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46
Initiate dialling
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1, 2
Inserting the batteries
. . . . . . . . . . . . .9
Internal
call with door subscriber station
. .100
Enquiry call
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
making calls
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
Internal key
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11
Internal party, changing the name
. . .80
ISDN phone numbers (MSN)
clear
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82
setting up
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82
K
Key 1 (answering machine) . . . . . . .1, 2
Key click
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93
119
Index
C1-C2 isdn / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / C1_C2_isdnSIX.fm / 19.11.2003
Key press (confirmation tone)
. . . . . . 93
Keypad
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Keys
Delete key
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Directory key
. . . . . . . . . . . 1, 2, 8, 11
Display keys
. . . . . . . . . . . . 1, 2, 8, 11
End call key
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2, 16
Handsfree key
. . . . . . . . . . 1, 2, 8, 11
Hash key
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1, 2, 10
Internal key
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Last number redial key
. . . . . . . . . . 11
Menu key
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Message key
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 1, 2, 32
Of the handset
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1, 2
OK key
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
On/Off key
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1, 2
Recall key
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1, 2
Rocker key
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8, 11
Speed dial list key
. . . . . . . . . . . . 1, 2
Star key
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1, 2
Talk key
. . . . . . . . . . . . 1, 2, 8, 11, 16
L
Last number redial
Delete list
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Key
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Manually
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Last number redial key
. . . . . . . . . . . 11
Last number redial list
. . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Linking
Call-by-Call number with phone
number
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
SMS
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Liquid, contact with
. . . . . . . . . . . . 101
List
Delete last number redial list
. . . . . 31
Directory list
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Internal list
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Last number redial
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
SMS incoming message list
. . . . . . 46
SMS outgoing message list
. . . . . . . 43
Speed dialling
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Listening in on the answering
machine
. . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Loudspeaker volume
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
M
Make an external call . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Making calls
Accept call waiting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Answering a call
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Callback when the call is not
answered
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Callback when the number is busy
. . 19
Calling Line Identification
. . . . . . . . 17
Conference call
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
External
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Handsfree
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Making an external call
. . . . . . . . . . 16
Making an internal call
. . . . . . . . . . 16
Reject the waiting call
. . . . . . . . . . . 25
To several users
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Toggling
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
With the door subscriber station
. . . 99
Manual
Last number redial
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Registration
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Medical appliances
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Melody (ringer tone)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Memos, see Answering Machine
Menu
End tone
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Key
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Tree
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Message key
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1, 2
Open list
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Opening lists
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Messages, see Answering Machine
Microphone
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1, 2
Move cursor
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12, 106
MSN
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Assigning the ringer melody
. . . . . . 84
Multiple subscriber number
. . . . . . . 81
Setting up/deleting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Multiple Subscriber Number (MSN)
. . . 81
N
Network mailbox
Configuring for fast access
. . . . . . . 88
Viewing message
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Network provider
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Notes (spoken) see Memo
Number, see Phone number or Entry
O
OK key. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
On/Off key
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1, 2
Open
120
Index
C1-C2 isdn / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / C1_C2_isdnSIX.fm / 19.11.2003
Battery compartment
. . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Caller list
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Directory
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1, 2
Internal list
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
SMS incoming message list
. . . . . . . 46
SMS outgoing message list
. . . . . . . 43
Speed dial list
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1, 2
Opening lists
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Opening the battery compartment
. . . . 9
Operating the answering
Machine
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Messages
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Remote control
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Operating time for handset
. . . . . . . 104
In room monitor mode
. . . . . . . . . . 70
In Walk and Talk mode
. . . . . . . . . . 72
Order in directory
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Outgoing message list
. . . . . . . . . 41, 43
Outside line code
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
P
PABX
Access code
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Operating when connected to a
PABX
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Text messages to PABXs
. . . . . . . . . 50
Play back
Announcement on the answering
machine
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Playback speed
Answering machine
. . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Predictive text
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Activate/deactivate
. . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Prefix, see area code
Preparing the telephone
Handset
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Putting a call on hold
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Q
Questions and answers . . . . . . . . . . 101
R
Reading an SMS entry . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Recall key
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1, 2
Receive MSN
Assigning
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Assigning for answering machine
. . 62
Receiving an SMS
. . . . . . . . . . . . 36, 46
Record
Announcement (answering
machine)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54
Call
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56
Memo on the answering machine
. .55
Registering
Handsets
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14
SMS centre
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
Registering/de-registering with an SMS
centre
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
Remote control
Operating the answering
. . . . . . . . .52
Removing protective film (display)
. . . .9
Repeater
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96
Activate
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96
Deactivate
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96
Replying to a text message
. . . . . . . . .48
Reset, see Factory settings
Resetting handset
To factory setting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .94
Ringer
Activate/deactivate
. . . . . . . . .1, 2, 92
Changing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91
Set volume
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91
Setting a melody
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91
Wake-up call/Appointment
. . . . . . .91
Rocker key
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8, 11
Room monitor
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70
Activating
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71
Alarm to internal/external
. . . . . . . .71
Deactivate
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71
Deactivate remotely
. . . . . . . . . . . .72
Setting the sensitivity
. . . . . . . . . . .71
Using in Walk and Talk mode
. . . . . .72
S
Safety precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7
Script
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .105
Security settings
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78
Select (base)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
Send
Directory entry to a handset
. . . . . .30
SMS
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36, 41, 42
SMS in the outgoing message list
. .44
Send an e-mail, see SMS
Send centre, see SMS
Send MSN
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81
Assigning
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83
Service provider
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36
121
Index
C1-C2 isdn / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / C1_C2_isdnSIX.fm / 19.11.2003
Set
Recording quality
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Recording time
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Set time by
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Setting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Alarm clock
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Appointment
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Date
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Device type
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Display language
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Handset (individual)
. . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Loudspeaker volume
. . . . . . . . . . . 91
Playback speed on the AM
. . . . . . . 59
Ringer for appointment
. . . . . . . . . 91
Ringer for wake-up call
. . . . . . . . . . 91
Ringer melody
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Ringer volume
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
System
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Time
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Walk and Talk mode
. . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Setting the answering machine
. . . . . 62
Setting the device type
. . . . . . . . . . . 95
Setting up
ISDN phone numbers
. . . . . . . . . . . 82
Short Message Service, see SMS
Shortcut
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Show (answering machine)
. . . . . . . . 63
Signal tone, see Advisory tones
SMS
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Activate send centre
. . . . . . . . . . . 39
Anny Way
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Calling back message sender
. . . . . 49
Change input language
. . . . . . . . . 41
Clear
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43, 48
Deactivating send centre
. . . . . . . . 39
Delete incoming message list
. . . . . 48
Deleting the outgoing message list
. 44
De-register from the SMS centre
. . . 40
Editing in the outgoing message
list
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Entering e-mail address
. . . . . . . . . 45
Errors when receiving
. . . . . . . . . . 51
Errors when sending
. . . . . . . . . . . 50
Forward
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Incoming message list
. . . . . . . . . . 46
Managing SMS service centres
. . . . 37
Opening the incoming message list
46
Opening the outgoing message list
. 43
Phone numbers in the directory
. . . 49
Predictive text
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Read
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43, 48
Receiving
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36, 46
Register with the SMS centre.
. . . . . 40
Reply to
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Requirements
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Saving
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Self-help with error messages
. . . . . 51
Send
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36, 41, 42
Send a text message to an e-mail ad-
dress
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Send centre
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Send e-mail
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Sending as an e-mail
. . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Sending messages in the outgoing
message list
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Sending to a PABX
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Storage capacity
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Text message
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Writing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
SMS centres, managing phone
numbers
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Specifications
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Speed dial key
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Speed dial list
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Delete a single entry
. . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Dialling
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Edit a single entry
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Opening the
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1, 2
Storing a number
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
View a single entry
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Speed dial list key
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1, 2
Star key
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1, 2
Storage capacity, see SMS
Storage space in the SMS memory
. . . 40
Storing
Phone number in the speed dial list
. 27
SMS
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Telephone number in the directory
. 27
Switch
Earpiece to handsfree mode
. . . . . 1, 2
Handsfree to earpiece mode
. . . . . 1, 2
Switch off, see Deactivate
System settings
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
T
Talk key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1, 2, 8, 11, 16
Telephone
Care
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Contact with liquid
. . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Preparing to use
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
122
Index
C1-C2 isdn / englisch / A31008-X150-B103-1-7619 / C1_C2_isdnSIX.fm / 19.11.2003
Telephone number
Adding to the directory
. . . . . . . . . . 30
Adding to the directory (AM)
. . . . . 61
Adding to the directory (SMS)
. . . . . 49
Assigning (MSN)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Display caller's (CLIP)
. . . . . . . . . . . 17
Input from directory
. . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Managing numbers for
SMS centres
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Pick from directory
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Storing in the directory
. . . . . . . . . . 27
Storing in the speed dial list
. . . . . . 27
Withhold identification
. . . . . . . 17, 18
Text entry
Toggle between upper/lower case
. 1, 2
Text message
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Time mode
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Toggling
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Tone
Battery tone. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Confirmation tone
. . . . . . . . . . 12, 93
End of menu tone
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Error tone
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12, 93
Two-way recording
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
V
Viewing a message from the
network mailbox
. . . . . . 89
VIP (directory entry)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Volume
Adjust in handsfree mode
. . . . . . . . 19
Loudspeaker volume
. . . . . . . . . . . 91
Ringer volume
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
W
Wake-up call
Deactivate
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Setting the ringer
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Walk and Talk
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Walk and Talk mode
Activate/deactivate
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Using a handset as a room monitor
. 70
Warning tone, see advisory tones
Wireless amplifier see Repeater
Withhold
Calling Line Identification
. . . . . . . . 17
Writing a text message
. . . . . . . . . . . 41
Wrong inputs (correcting)
. . . . . . . . . 12
303


Need help? Post your question in this forum.

Forumrules


Report abuse

Libble takes abuse of its services very seriously. We're committed to dealing with such abuse according to the laws in your country of residence. When you submit a report, we'll investigate it and take the appropriate action. We'll get back to you only if we require additional details or have more information to share.

Product:

For example, Anti-Semitic content, racist content, or material that could result in a violent physical act.

For example, a credit card number, a personal identification number, or an unlisted home address. Note that email addresses and full names are not considered private information.

Forumrules

To achieve meaningful questions, we apply the following rules:

Register

Register getting emails for Siemens gigaset c1 at:


You will receive an email to register for one or both of the options.


Get your user manual by e-mail

Enter your email address to receive the manual of Siemens gigaset c1 in the language / languages: English as an attachment in your email.

The manual is 3,95 mb in size.

 

You will receive the manual in your email within minutes. If you have not received an email, then probably have entered the wrong email address or your mailbox is too full. In addition, it may be that your ISP may have a maximum size for emails to receive.

Others manual(s) of Siemens gigaset c1

Siemens gigaset c1 User Manual - German - 25 pages

Siemens gigaset c1 User Manual - Dutch - 313 pages

Siemens gigaset c1 User Manual - French - 321 pages


The manual is sent by email. Check your email

If you have not received an email with the manual within fifteen minutes, it may be that you have a entered a wrong email address or that your ISP has set a maximum size to receive email that is smaller than the size of the manual.

The email address you have provided is not correct.

Please check the email address and correct it.

Your question is posted on this page

Would you like to receive an email when new answers and questions are posted? Please enter your email address.



Info